신학자료 전용 사이트

샤프-헤르초크 종교백과

Schaff-Herzog Religious Encyclopaedia

백과사전 Schaff et al. 1882 general

지원 언어 현황

영 한1%

영 6639/6639 원문 · 한 75/6639 번역 · 0 검수

6639개 항목

한영 비교 보기
HARAKOS MARANOS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARANOS: A name given the " New Christiana " of Spain from the fact that they included Moors. See Spain.
MARBECK, PILGRAM MARBECK, PILGRAM

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARBECK, PILGRAM: Anabaptist leader and author; b. at Rattenberg (23 m. e.n.e. of Innsbruck) about the end of the fifteenth century; d. in or near Augsburg c. 1547. He was brought up in the Roman Catholic communion, but left it in early manhood and about 1522-23 became a " promulga- tor of the Wittenberg Gospel." But he found that " where God's word was preached in the Lutheran way a fleshly freedom followed in its trail " and soon became dissatisfied with Lutheranism. About 1525-26 he " accepted baptism as a witness of the obedience of faith, having regard in this solely to God's word and command " (his own account in his disputation with Butzer). He became an expert engineer and in 1525 was appointed by the Austrian government to a responsible position in connec- tion with the mines of that region. Early in 1528 he was in danger of being arrested and punished as an Anabaptist and made his way to Augsburg, where he hoped to find toleration and employment (J. Walch, Decas fabularum humani generU, Auga- burg, 1606). But persecution had already begun in Augsbuiig and in October he went to Strasburg, where his engineering skill was called into use. At this time Strasburg contained a greater number and a greater variety of Anabaptist leaders than any other city. Marbeck's force of character, at- tractive personality, intellectual vigor, blameless Christian walk, literary skill, and generosity brought him marked consideration among his fellow believers and at first won the highest praise from the leading Evangelical pastors, Butzer, Capito, Zell, and Blaurer. He gained the friendship of Margaretha Blaurer (q.v.) to such an extent that she protected him as far as she was able from persecuting meas- ures when Butzer turned against him and rebuked Butzer for his intolerance. Profoundly convinced of the evil of infant baptism, he was zealous in his efforts to win not only the masses but the preach- ers to antipedobaptist views. The publication of two books in support of his position led to his im- prisonment (October, 1531); but because of his engineering skill he was liberated without promis- ing to desist. On Dec. 9, at his own request, he engaged in a discussion with Butzer, the record of which has been preserved. In twenty-eight arti- cles he defended the antipedobaptist position with a logical acumen rarely excelled. But the council decreed his banishment and after an earnest plea for the Anabaptists he departed for Ulm and soon settled again in Augsburg. Until his death he was the guiding spirit of the antipedobaptist congrega- tions in the neighborhood of Ulm and Augsburg. In 1542 he published an exposition of his views on baptism, sin, hereditary sin, divine worship, magis- tracy, and the Lord's Supper (Vermahnung auch gam klarer gruruUicher und unvndersprechlicher Bericht zu wahrer Christlicher ewig bestandiger Bruder-Vereini— gung). This brought him into controversy with Schwenckfeld and his followers. A. H. Newman. Bibliography: J. Loserth, Zwei biographiache Skizzen aua der WiedertAufer in Tirol, Innsbruck, 1895; T. W. Rfih- rich, ZHT, 1860; C. A. Cornelius, OeachiehU dea mi2n- ateriachen Aufruhra, vol. ii., Leipsic, 1800; J. W. Baum, Capito und Bucer, Elberfeld. 1860; L. Keller. Ein Apoatd der WiederUXufer, Leipsic, 1882; C. Gerbert, QeechiehU der Straaaburger Sedenbewegung zur Zeit der Reformation, Strasburg, 1889; A. H. Newman, Hiat, of AntinPedo- baptiam, pp. 249-253, Philadelphia. 1897. Sidelights are cast by the writings and letters of the contemporary re- ligious leaders, Bucer, Capito, Luther, Zwingli, and others.
MARBURG, COITFERENCE OF MARBURG, CONFERENCE OF

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARBURG, CONFERENCE OF: A gathering of Protestant theologians at Marburg Oct. 2-4, 1529. The controversy on the Lord's Supper had already assumed considerable dimensions, when in the summer of 1526 the Diet of Speyer convened; therefore the Protestants took pains Preliminary to come to an agreement in order to Negotia- present a united front to their oppo- tions. nents. The efforts at harmony origi- nated among the Strasburg theologians, but were frustrated by Luther's firm adherence to his convictions. An attempt of Butzer in the summer of 1526 to influence Luther through Justus Jonas was also without result. Jonas first sug- gested that perhaps by a personal meeting of the leaders a remedy might be found; but it was Jo- hann Haner, former preacher of the cathedral in Warzburg, who approached Landgrave Philip of Hesse with the proposal of a conference. Ulrich of WOrttemberg used his influence upon the young prince for the same purpose. From the beginning political machinations were a factor in the efforts at harmony. In Feb., 1528, Duke Ulrich invited (Ecolampadius and Butzer to the court of the land- grave at Marburg, probably for the purpose of win- ning the support of Philip for the South Germans. Philip, however, was very anxious to bring together Luther and (Ecolampadius, and the development of affairs at the Diet of Speyer about 1529 made it necessary to strive for agreement. The Strasbuig theologians presented at Speyer a formula of the Lord's Supper which so skilfully concealed the op- position of the contending parties as to offer a basis for a temporary alliance between Saxony, Hesse, Nu- remberg, Strasburg, and Ulm on Apr. 22, 1529. The leading authorities, however, saw that these prelimi- nary negotiations would lead to a result only in case of a real agreement on the Lord's Supper. The landgrave therefore invited Zwingli on the same day to a religious conference, and Zwingli declared his willingness to attend. The theologians of Wit- tenberg took a different attitude. Melanchthon was evidently offended by the political nature of the proposed alliance, and Luther dissuaded the elector from giving his consent because '' no im- provement was to be hoped for among the princi- pal opponents " (Zwingli), even if the members of the conference should come to an agreement. After June 10 the theologians of Wittenberg received a formal invitation from Philip to meet at Marburg. Under the influence of the elector, Luther and Me- lanchthon gave their final consent on July 8, but unwillingly and with no hope of good results. The landgrave, however, persevered, and Zwingli was full of zeal, both aiming at a great political alliance of all Evangelical states. Neither the Wittenberg theologians nor the elector knew of the political in- tentions of the landgrave. On Sept. 27, 1529, Zwingli and Uhich Funk from Zurich, (Ecolampadius and Rudolph Frey from Basel, Butzer, Hedio, and Jacob Sturm from Stras- burg arrived at Marburg. Even before the arrival of Luther, Zwingli had come to an The understanding with the landgrave on Conference, political questions; but in order to make it effective, it was necessary to reconcile Luther. He arrived at Marburg on Sept. 30, with Melanchthon, Jonas, Cruciger, Veit Diet- rich and Georg R5rer from Wittenberg, Myconius from Gotha, Menius and Eberhard von der Thann from Eisenach. Duke Ulrich of WOrttemberg ar- rived the same night. The colloquy began on Oct. 2, after the arrival of the South (German Lutherans Cisiander, Brenz, and Stephan Agricola. Although a great crowd had gathered at Marburg, only fifty to sixty persons were admitted. At the beginning it was agreed that the question of the Lord's Sup- per should be the primary point of discussion. Luther adhered to the plain and simple words of Christ, " This is my body," which he wrote with a piece of chalk on the table, rejecting any metaphor- ical interpretation. (Ecolampadius, who replied first, started from John vi. and then pointed to the existence of numerous metaphors in Holy Scripture, which Luther, of course, did not deny. What he demanded, however, was justification for the as- sumption of a metaphor in the passage on the Lord's Supper where the text is clear without it. He also declared that he in no way rejected the spiritual eating, as mentioned in John vi. 53; he even re- garded it as necessary, but from this, he said, it did not follow that the bodUy eating instituted and commanded by Christ was of no use or unneces- sary. This was the point on which the controversy hinged — whether beside spiritual eating which both parties equally emphasized, bodily eating was also necessary. A further point of debate was the ques- tion of the ubiquity of the body of Christ, which Zwingli rejected on the basis of Rom. viii. 3; Phil, ii. 7; Heb. ii. 7. The characteristic difference in the fundamental conceptions of Zwingli and Luther showed itself in their estimate of reason. Luther conceded to it no right of decision in questions of faith, while Zwingli replied that God would not pro- pose to us for our belief anything inconceivable. At the end of the debate nothing had been accom- plished. Then Butzer, as chief representative of the Strasburg theologians, stated their doctrine of the Trinity, original sin, baptism, etc., and asked Luther for a testimony of his orthodoxy, but Luther did not comply with his request. * * Our spirit and your spirit do not agree," he said; for the same spirit could not, in his opinion, dwell in people who simply believed the word of Christ and those who vehemently com- bated it and gave it the lie. Therefore he wished to leave his opponents to the judgment of God; they might teach as they thought it justifiable before God. Thus the official negotiations were ended, but still the landgrave hoped to succeed by personal influence in his efforts at union. Luther now de- clared himself willing to draw up a statement of the most important points of doctrine on Articles of which an agreement was possible. Thus Marburg, originated on Oct. 4 the so-called " Articles of Marburg." Fourteen theses testified to agreement on the doctrine of the Trinity, the person of Christ, faith and justification, the Word of God, baptism, good works, confession, secular authority, tradition or human order, and infant baptism. The fifteenth article, on the sacra- ment of the body and blood of Christ, confesses as uniform doctrine the necessity of partaking of it in both kinds and rejection of the mass, and also that the spiritual eating of the body and blood is principally necessary for every Christian. As to the disputed point in the Lord's Supper, Christian charity should be shown toward each other. The document was signed in three copies by the ten official participants in the colloquy, Luther, Jonas, Melanchthon, Osiander, Agricola, Brenz, (Ecolam- padius, Butzer, Hedio, and Zwingli. By signing the articles, Zwingli had evidently gone to the ex- treme limit of concession in the interest of his great plans. Not entirely without reason, Melanchthon thought that the Swiss had '^ followed Luther's Mftlbnrc, KKTOallULI Ooatervao* of opinion." As tbe Wittenberg circle haii no idea of the political machi nations which called forth 2tvingli's love of peace, they naturally carried away an impressioD of the complete humiliatioD of their opponenti. But Zwiogli aacribed the victory not less to himself and explained the articles in hia own sense. It BOon became obvious that instead of bridging over tbe opposition, the conference of Marburg had brought it to fuller expression. (T. Kolde ) BlBUoosAFHi: Tbfl Articln wen printed by H. Heppe, Du IB Uarburorr Artikil, Cuvcl. I8S4: by Bindsdl. in CR, xxTi. 122-1Z7; sod by T. Kolde. in Din liutribuTg- itdu KonfcHion. pp. lie sqq., Golba. 1896. Sourow for the hiatory are the Oprra of ZwioKli, ed. ScbuJer and BohultheiH, voli. vii.-viii.; tbe Brii/e of Lutber. ed. De Wetl«. vols, iii.-lv.. or Enders' Li^Aen Brit/aBchitl. vol. viL; in T. Kolde, Analala LuMmind, GoUin. 1863; tbe BrUfaahfei of J. Jonag, ed. Kswerau, Halle. 1SS4 ' 13 MelancbthoD. n CR. I 1009 K : of Job 1. lOOfi; oentsryon tbe Gospels. Struburg, 1530. Cooault furtlwr: L, K. Scbmldt, Dot Reiioiaiuoeapr^ch tu Afitrburo, I6»B, Marburi, I B40: J. Kradolfer, Dai Marburaer Rtliaiani- gaprOtk. IBtB. Berlin. 1871: SihimniMjier, Brw/e vnd Akttn tut Goihiehle da AriiiTidtuffUTJrdtA* zu Marburg, 1M9, Gotha. ISTS; M. Leni. ZKO. iii IISTB), 28 Bqq.. 220<iiiq., *29«iq.; A. Erithson, Doi Martunwr R(Ji(;uin»- t—prOeh, 1M9, SlnubUTE. 1880; Egli. in Tkeoloiiitelitr ZtiUc/trilt out da Schick, i (1884), t aqq.: P. II. Poelrr. in BibluHJuta Sacra. April. I8ST, PP. 363-360; SehtSI, ChTittian Churih. vi. 829-053; T. M. LiniUay, H-it. Rif.. i. 3S3-3SB: tbs litenture under JoHAB, Jiim»: LrriuR: IfELAHCHTHOH; ZwiNQU; uid b1» iba principal worlu on the RErOHHATIOK.
HARCELLA MARCELLA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCELLA: Roman Christian of the fourth and fifth centuries. She came of a wealthy family and married early, but when her husband died seven months after the marriage, she made a vow of perpetual celibacy and gave all ber goods to her relatives and the poor. When Jerome came to Rome in 382 she became his friend and studied the Scriptures with him. When Rufinus translated Origen's work "On First Principles" she herself went to Pope Anastasius and showing him the he- retical passages induced him to condemn the doc- trines of Origen. At the sack of Rome in 410, she was tortured by the Goths, who sought to make ber reveal her supposed wealth, and died shortly afterward. Bibliography: The ehirf source of inlorraalion on her Uf« and eharaeter u Jerome'i letters, eipesially no. 127, Eng. IraoBl. in ASF. vi. 263-258; cf. DCB. iii. 803.
HARCELLINISTS MARCELLINISTS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCELLINISTS: A heretical sect of the latter part of the second century, consisting of the adherents of Marcellina, a pupil of Carpocrates (q.v.), whose system of Gnosticism she taught with much success in Rome while Anicetus was bishop (cf. Irenæus, Haer.. I., xxv. 6, ANF, i. 351).
MARCELLUS MARCELLUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCELLUS: The name of five Christian martyrs besides Marcellus I., bishop of Rome (q.v.). 1. A certain Marcellus is said to have been martyred by the Prefect Priscus at Chalon-sur- Sadne during the reign of Antoninus Pius, probably in 140. His festival is appointed for Sept. 4, but some throw doubt on the historicity of the legend. 2. Marcellus the Centurion, beheaded at Tingis (Tangier) on the birthday of the Emperor Diocle- tian, probably in 298, for refusing to celebrate the occasion with sacrifices. 3. A third Marcellus, bom at Rome, was martyred, according to tradition, at Argenton-sur-Creuse (165 m. s.w. of Paris) during the reign of Aurelian. Flee- ing from the persecutions of this emperor to the city where he was fated to die, he attracted the atten- tion of the Prefect Heraclius by his miracles and was scourged and roasted without being harmed. He was accordingly beheaded, while his friend Anastasius was scourged to death. Both these martyrs are commemorated on June 29. 4. Marcellus, Bishop of Apamea (the modem Kalaat al-Madik, 120 m. n.e. of Beirut) was burned to death during the reign of Theodosius the Great by a pagan mob roused by his destruction of their temples. 5. Marcellus, Bishop of Die, was bom at Avig- non, and died a prisoner of the Arians at Die (100 m. n. of Marseilles), early in the sixth century. He succeeded his brother as bishop and at his conse- cration a dove descended on his head. Refusing to accept Arian teachings, however, he was im- prisoned until his death. His festival is appointed for Apr. 9. (G. UHLHORNf.)
MARCELLUS OF ANCYRA MARCELLUS OF ANCYRA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCELLUS OF ANCYRA: Bishop of Ancyra (the modern Angora, 220 m. s.e. of Constantinople); b. probably in the latter part of the third century; d. about 374. He took part as bishop in the synod held at Ancyra apparently in 314, and Early Life; eleven years later was a somewhat in- Trinitarian conspicuous opponent of the Arians at Doctrine. Nicsea. In 335, however, he attracted attention by a book of which little is known, being extant only in fragments. His work was evoked primarily by a treatise of the Lucian- istic Asterius, although it formed a general attack upon both the living and the dead leaders of the great Eusebian party. His polemic was aimed against the Eusebian and Arian doctrine of three divine hypostases, which had been received from the teachings of Origen. Perceiving the pagan basis of this doctrine, Marcellus opposed not only the doc- trine of Christ's inferiority which it implied but also its polytheistic coloring. A rigid defender of mono- theism, he acknowledged only one God, although he recognized a certain differentiation in him. Pre- vious to the creation of the world God Doctrine had been simply a " monad," but with of the the formation of the universe the first Trinity, period of salvation was introduced by the " procession " of the Logos, which was eternal in God and has since remained the ** op- erative activity" of God. In the incarnation of the Logos it became, in a somewhat stronger form, *' divided from the Father by the weakness of the flesh," though it existed potentially in the Father not only throughout the period between the crea- tion and the incarnation, but also afterwards, so that God and the Logos are not to be separated, and the eye of faith accordingly sees the Father in Christ (John xiv. 9). In like manner Marcellus re- gards the Spirit as contained within the Logos until Jesus breathed on his disciples and bade them re- ceive the Holy Ghost (John xx. 22), after which it proceeded operatively from the Father and the Son. Up to the time of the outpouring of the Holy Spirit, therefore, Marcellus taught binitarianism, but after this event " the monad was extended into a triad." Nevertheless, this " extension " did not produce a disruption of the "monad," which is "potentially indivisible," so that the Father, the Logos, and the Spirit are one God. After the parousia, when 171 MaroaUus March Christ will appear in the flesh, both the Logos and the Spirit will be wholly reunited with God, and the '' monad " will again exist as it existckl before the creation of the world. The kingdom of the man Christ will then have an end (cf. I Cor. xv. 28), but the Logos, whose power has neither beginning nor interruption, will then, again existing in the Father, retain the divine omnipotence which he had never lost. Marcellus of Ancyra accordingly taught trinita- rian monotheism, which in its development from a " monad " to a ** triad " formed part of the plan of salvation, and in this teaching his theological in- terests were centered. He emphasized the thought that the " non-incarnate Word " is called merely Logos and not Son in the Scriptures, and he ac- cordingly referred the terms " Son of God," ** image of the invisible God," and " first-bom of every creature " (Col. i. 15), as well as all Biblical desig- nations of Christ except the Logos-concept, to the incarnate Logos. He thus escaped the Eusebian assumption of a " creation " of the Logos, which destroyed the doctrine of its eternity, and at the same time found a confirmation of his theory that the historic Christ was " God appearing in human form " and at the same time " the perfect man." The Eusebian Sjmod of Constantinople in 336 condemned the work of Marcellus as heretical, since it assumed that the Son began with his birth by Mary and also postulated an end of his kingdom. He was accordingly anathematized, the Teachings destruction of his book was ordered. Condemned; his followers, who seem to have been Later Life, numerous in Galatia, were bidden to return to orthodoxy, and Basil was apparently appointed to succeed him as bishop of Ancyra. Where Marcellus went after his deposi- tion is unknown, but the death of Constantine in 337 permitted him to return to his see. That he was formally reinstated seems scarcely probable, but at all events his reappearance in Ancyra re- sulted in tiunultuous scenes. He was again con- denmed at a second synod in Constantinople in the latter part of 338 or the early part of 339, and in the summer of the latter year went to Rome, where he was declared to be innocent. He then left Rome, and is next found at the Synod of Sardica in 343, where he was condemned for the third time by the Extern Church, but was again acquitted by the Western. Of his subsequent fortunes little is known. According to Sozomen, he returned to Ancyra as bishop, only to be again expelled in 350, but the assertion is supported by scant evidence. He was repeatedly condemned both by the Homoi- ousians and the younger Nicene school, while in the West, on the other hand, his doctrines were not discussed at any synod between 343 and c. 380. al- though Basil complained that the Occident had no words of blame for the teachings of Marcellus. Where he passed the last thirty years of his long life is unknown, nor are the place and exact date of his death determined. He is said by Jerome to have written many works against the Arians, although none are now extant. At the time of his death he had many followers in Galatia, though it is uncer- tain how far they actually understood and accepted his teachings. A committee sent apparently in the early part of the eighth decade of the fourth cen- tury, from Ancyra to Athanasius, who was mis- trustful of Marcellus, though he never polemized against him, presented a symbol which accepted the definition of the Son given in the Nicene Creed, but spoke of only one hypostasis of the Trinity, and also revealed other traces of the influence of Mar- cellus. He left no representative of his theology, however, and Marcellianism remained an imper- sonal heresy. It was condemned by Pope Dama- sus c. 380, and with the acceptance of the first canon of the synod held at Constantinople in 381, the name of Marcellus was placed on the list of heretics in the West after the middle of the fifth century. While it is true that the Christology of Marcellus recalls the doctrine of Paul of Samosata (see Mon- archianism), if the historic Christ be regarded as the '' new man " and the Logos or Spirit in him be considered undivided from God, on the other hand, the historic Christ is, in his Position in teaching, also " God manifest in the the History flesh." Both these views appear side of l>ogma. by side in the system of Marcellus, as they do in almost all the Chris- tology of the early Church before Apollinaris and the Nestorian controversy. Any estimate of the position of Marcellus in the history of dogma must proceed, therefore, from the twofold assump- tion that his general conception of Christianity was closely akin to that of Irenseus and that the creed of Sardica represented his economic trinitarian " monotheism." A remarkable similarity with the latter document is shown by the views of Phoeba- dius of Aginnum and the older writings of Hilary, while both Tertullian and Novatian are in harmony with Marcellus in their development of the " monad " into a '' triad " in the course of the plan of salva- tion. These points of resemblance, as well as the agreement of Marcellus with Irenseus, find their explanation in the fact that he represents the tra- dition of the pre-apologetic age, as it is found in the ** binitarianism " of Hennas, the Epistle of Bar- nabas, and the Second Epistle of Clement, as well as in many Gnostic systems; nor is it impossible that these traditions may have originated in Asia Minor, where both Marcellus and Irenseus lived, and where both modalistic Monarchianism and Montanism flourished. (F. Loofs.) Bibliography: In MarceUiana (Gdttingen. 1794) C. H. O. Rettberg carefully collected the fragments of Marcellus' writings, cf. MPO, xviii.; they are also in Klostermann'a ed. of Eusebius' "Against Marcellus," Leipeic, 1906. Earlier discussions are antiquated by T. Zahn, MarceiluM von An- cyra^ Gotha, 1867. Consult further: Hefele, ConcUieno^ achicKte, vol. i.; Hamack, Dogma, passim, consult Index; R. Seeberg, Lehrbudt der Doomengt8€hidKt€^ i. 175-176, Leipsio, 1895; F. Loofs, in SUzungsberichU der Berliner Akademie, philoaophiadi-hUtoriscKe KUuae, 1902; idem, in AbKandlungen der Berliner Akademie^ 1909, pp. 1 sqq.; DCB, ill 808-813 (excellent).
MARCH, DANIEL MARCH, DANIEL

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCH, DANIEL: Congregationalist; b. at Millbury, Mass., July 21, 1816; d. at Woburn, Mass., Mar. 2, 1909. He was educated at Yale College (A.B., 1840) and Yale Divinity School, from which he was graduated in 1845, after having been principal of Chester Academy, Vt., and Fairfield Academy, Conn. He held successive pastorates at Cheshire, Conn. Maroianlte* ICaroiou, Marolouite* 17fl (1845-48), First Congregational Church, Nashua, N. H. (1848-54), First Congregational Church, Wo- bum, Mass. (1855-61, 1876-93), and Qinton Street Presbyterian Church, Philadelphia ( 1861-76) . After 1893 he was pastor emeritus of the First Congrega- tional Church, Wobum. In theology he advocated " practical, common-sense interpretation of the Gos- pel of Christ." He wrote Religion for Heart and Home (Wobum, Mass., 1858); Walks and Homes of Jesus (Philadelphia, 1866); Night Scenes in the Bible (1868); Our Father's House (1869); Home Life in the Bible (1873); From Dark to Davm (1878); Days of the Son of Man (1881); The First Khedive: Lessons in the Life of Joseph (Philadelphia, 1887) ; Morning Light in Many Lands (Boston, 1891). Several of his works were translated into Swedish and German.
MARCUS MARCUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARCUS: Pope Jan. 18-Oct. 7, 336, successor of Sylvester. According to the Liber pontificalis he was a Roman by birth, the son of Priscus, and was buried in the cemetery of Balbina on the Via Ardeatina. He may have been archdeacon during the pontificate of Melchiades. The Liber ponti- ficalis attributes to him the provision that the pope should be consecrated by the bishop of Ostia, and states that he held two ordinations in Rome in the month of December; but he did not live to see that month. He built two basilicas, and received large gifts from Constantine, of which a list is given in the Liber porUificalis, The Pseudo- Isidore attributes to him a reply to a letter from Athanasius. (A. Harnack.) Bibliography: Liber pontifiealis, ed. T. Mommsen, in MOH, Oeet. pant. Rom., i (1898), 73-74; B. Platina, Livee qf the Popee, i. 76-77, London, n.d.; Bower, Popes, i. 54; DCB, iii 825.
MARGARET OF NAVARRE MARGARET OF NAVARRE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARGARET OF NAVARRE: Daughter of Duke Charles of Orléans-Angoulême, duchess of Alençon, and later Queen of Navarre, patron of the Reformation in France; b. at Angoulême Apr. 11, 1492; d. at the chAteau of Odos, near Tarbes, Dec. 21, 1549. After her father's death, Social she was sent by her mother, the witty Position; and ambitious Louise of Savoy, to the Patronage court of Louis XII., her guardian, of Letters, where she received an excellent educa- tion. Endowed with rare mental qualities, including eagerness for knowledge and a warm appreciation of everything beautiful, she studied philosophy and theology in addition to the living and dead languages. On Dec. 1, 1509, she married Charles, last Duke of Alençon, and on the accession of Francis I. in 1515, was introduced to the court. The king was very fond of his sister, for whose intellect he had a high esteem, and often asked her advice in difficult matters. Like him, she was the patron of many scholars and men of letters, who clustered about her at her court at N6rac. Among them were some of a serious turn of mind, who spoke to her of religion, such as Le- fdvre d'Etaples (see Faber Stapulensis, Jacobus) and his friend Gerard Roussel (q.v.), Michel d'Arande, Clement Marot (q.v.), and Guillaume Bri^onnet, bishop of Meaux (q.v.), who with the help of D'Arande, of Evangelical tendencies, was trying to awaken in his diocese a religious life that would lead to a study of the Bible. Between 1521 and 1524 she kept up a correspondence with Bri- 9onnet, through which she became acquainted with " the wisdom of learned ignorance," the art of con- templating God without intermediary (neglecting all scholastic deductions and even the use of the sacraments) and finding union with him only through an intense faith and increasing love. These letters also discuss the need of reform in the Church. In his reforming zeal Briçonnet had chosen Lefèvre d'Etaples as his vicar-general, and sent Michel d'Arande to Margaret as her chaplain. The latter expounded the Scriptures Attitude in private to Margaret and her brother Toward and mother, who, she says, often ex- Reform, pressed the wish to reform the Church; and she mentions the spreading of the idea that " divine truth is not heresy." It was on suspicion of heresy, however, that the Franciscans arraigned Bri^onnet before the Parlement of Paris Xarflraret of Navarre ICarneineke 178 in 1524. He was coerced into giving up his re- forming projects; but Michel d'Arande, Lefèvre d'Etaples, and Gerard Roussel remained in the private circle of the princess. In 1525 her hus- band died, and she spent the first period of her widowhood at Lyons, where D'Arande preached before lai^ audiences. During the captivity of Francis I. the persecution of the Huguenots began. When Louise of Savoy was regent, although she had seemed unfriendly to the monastic orders and favorable to reforming ideas, she allowed the in- troduction into France of the Inquisition. Lef^vre and Roussel, abandoned by BriQonnet, took refuge at Strasbuig, whither Michel d'Arande soon fol- lowed them. On June 24, 1527, Francis gave his sister in marriage to Henri d'Albret, king of Navarre, eleven years her junior. In her new posi- tion Margaret remained faithful to her Evangelical convictions, which were shared by her husband. With his assent she tried to reform the Church in their little kingdom. Gerard Roussel was made abbot of Clairac and later bishop of Oloron. Through her influence with Francis I., Lefèvre was appointed librarian of the chAteau of Blois, and when he was persecuted by the Sorbonne, she had him brought under her protection at N^rac. In Strasburg, where Lef^vre and Roussel had praised her dispositions, great things were expected of her for the cause of reform in France. In 1527 Sigismund von Hohen- lohe, dean of the cathedral there, imbued with Lu- theran ideas, entered into communication with her, expressing the desire to come to France to help the cause. In May, 1528, Capito dedicated to her his commentaries on Hosea, saying " All eyes are turned toward you; you are the hope of all Re- formers." As duchess of Alen9on, she had done much in that neighborhood for the revival of let- ters and for reform in religion. In the duchy of Berry, which she had ruled since 1518, the univer- sity of Bourges flourished under her protection, and it was here that Calvin and Beza were inclined toward Protestantism under Wolmar's teaching. She intended to found a college in B^m, to which Sturm and Latomus were to be called (1533); but her plan was not destined to be realized until her daughter Jeanne d'Albret founded the Academy of Orthez. Staying in Paris with her husband in 1533, she caused Gerard Roussel to preach the Evangelical doctrine in the chapel of the Louvre, and his boldness of s()eech raised a storm not only against him but against his patroness. The Miroir de VAme pecheresse (see bibliography) was condemned and prohibited by the Sorbonne, because it made no mention of the saints or of purgatory. Francis, ex- asperated by the insults directed against his sister, banished several of the most prominent reactionary clergy. By the help of his confessor G uillaume Petit, bishop of Senlis, he of)cned a process before the University of Paris for the reversal of the condemna- tion of the Miroir, and the sentence of the Sorbonne was annulled. To allay the popular excitement, Francis ordered both Roussel and his antagonists to keep silence on controverted points. Margaret took a lively share in her brother's correspondence with Melanchthon and Butzer with the view of working Qut a plan which might promote the reiuiion of Christendom by mutual concessions. When, how- ever, Francis definitely took the side of the perse- cutors, Margaret lost all her influence over him in religious matters, and retired in disgust to Navarre, where she and her husband devoted themselves to promoting the cause of reform. Searching the Scriptures, she became far more advanced, in all that concerned dogma, than her teachers D'Arande, Roussel, and even Lef^vre d'Etaples. This is manifest in her book Les Mar- guerites de la Marguerite, and in her last verses, Dia- logue de Vhomme et de Dieu and Lea Favoring Prisons. She adopted Calvin's doc- of the Ref- trines of salvation and the sacraments, ormation in and rejected confession, indulgences, Navarre, and prayer to the saints. As to the external forms of religion, which ap- peared to her non-essential, she kept up at the same time most of the old rites, because, although op- posed to clerical abuses, she had always hoped for a reform without a complete breach with Rome. But she did not wish to retain unity at the cost of renouncing the newly recovered truths or of em- ploying compulsion. She ordered that justifica- tion by faith should alone be preached in the king- dom of Navarre. The service was held, and the psalms were sung, in the vernacular. Many mo- nastic abuses were reformed, and only godly and Evangelical priests appointed to parishes. These improvements, established by Margaret in the churches of B^m and later introduced by Roussel in his diocese of Oloron, paved the way for a more thoroughgoing reform which was made later by Jeanne d'Albret, and explains the latter 's success. The little mountain kingdom became the refuge of persecuted Protestants, for all of whose needs Mar- garet provided. As long ago at Alen9on she had sheltered Sainte-Marthe, who had escaped from the gallows at Grenoble, so now she begged mercy from Francis I. for persecuted heretics, such as Louis de Berquin, Etienne Dolet, and the Waldenses of Provence. She spent most of her time either at N6rac with her court around her, or in the convent of Tusson, whither she retired during her mourn- ing after Francis I.'s death (1547), and set an ex- ample of Christian virtue. At all critical conjunc- tures she prayed without ceasing. From this period of her life date most of her religious poems, many of which were printed in the Marguerites de la Mar- guerite des princesses, while some remain in manu- script in the Biblioth^ue Nationale. But her whole time was not given up to religious pursuits. She was by nature a lover of mirth and gaiety. She had comedies performed Other at N6rac and at Mont de Marsan by Interests Italian players, and wrote a scries of in Life, lively tales entitled HeptarrUron des nouvelles, in the style of Boccaccio's Decameron, in which she drew from the example of human frailty the moral lesson that one can not rely on one's own strength but should have recourse in all circumstances to God. During the last ill- ness of Francis I. she went to him, and her pres- ence seemed to revive him; but scarcely had she returned to N6rac when she heard of his death (Mar. 31, 1547). The income of 24,000 livres which he granted her was used largely for charity. In 1538 she established a foundUng aaylum under the iiame of " Hoepice des enfants de Dieu le Pfire," ■commonly known from the costume of the inmates «B " Les enfants rouges." On Oct. 20, 1548, she unwillingly gave her decidedly Protestant daugh- ter, Jeanne d'Albret, in marriage to the vain and imlruBtworthy Antoine de Bourbon. Little more than a year later, after a long illness, she died, and was lamented and eulogized by native and foreign poets, as she well deserved to be. G. Bonet-Maury. par Jftut CAn*l Her I. □uHi ItM gnlca fl bt-neflrtt d tan npuiu, Alencon, 1531. uid elsewhere ollen. i 1533, Lyona. 1538, Enu. irajul. by PrioceM Eli Ood!)/ /Hidi/tadon of Ihr Chriiltn Smile, London Pofrin It dialotru tairt MarguiTilt: de Franct rt la/lt de Frana. Aleacon. 1533; La Marourrilei, vols,, Lyons. 1547; VHtptamfran, PnriB. 155B. where in UkKtunerablGAlilions and tranrdati lUe HSIIered in LetUrr di riii. Auomini illwlri, Venice. 1504; J, C. Wibel. LebentgridiicliU dct , . . Sifomung ran Hohtnlaht, NurembcrR, 174S; Gcnin, i.Mfru dt Mar- attrrili d-Anaa<^fme, Paris, IS41: A. Chunpollion. Tnp- ' ' ' a Fran^ia /., ib. 1S42, and in A. L, Hermibjud, n rtforniaUuTi. Paris, 1878-87. ine mant aulborilativB bLc^(^^kphy i» in F, Ftiuik'e ed. oF Let Marguerilet de la Mttrputrite dea printeteet, Tntro- duclion. 4 vols.. Paris, 1873. Coniull: P. de BouT' deillu. Beigneur de ISnnlAme. V'u da daitua illuHrrt. di»- CDUiB v., ib. ie65~«tt: V. Durand. Mareutiile de Namm, S vols., ib. 1849: Miss M. W. Freer, Lift i^ Margnmlt, Quwo of Nararre. 2 vo1>.. London. 1857; H. A. UllDd, aiTMbure. 1858: H. de lsFe^Ti^fe Percy. WnTfKiriJsd'An- emJtmr. Pkrii, 18(13; V. Ldro, Marourrilt d' AnaoaitTnt, ib. 1866: P. Albert, LitttrataTe franfoiae ou iri. liteU, ib. 1SSI; J. Bonnet, in Ballctin da la mrifU da pnUalan- titme franrait. ixivii. lOB-IM; F. Lotheiswn, Ksniein Marganit- con A^animi; an Kvllurhild ova der . . . frani/iaitdun RefnTmalion. Betlio. 1885; Mary Robinson, Maraarrt of jt ntmWt'me, London, IBSS: A. Lefmnc. Lta Idfti nJiiB*n*« dt hfaraarrile de Norarn, Paris. 1898; P. A, Becker. Margurrile , . , at G. Britanfui, ib. 1901; ELSicbel, W omefi and Men of Ihe French Renaiaaance, liaa- ISiJ. London. 1901; Lichlenbcrger. ESH. viii. fl7B sqq.
HASGASET, SAIKT MARGARET, SAINT

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARGARET, SAINT: Queen of Scotland; b. in Hungary c. 1045; d. at Edinburgh Nov. 16, 1093. She was of the royal family of England, granddaughter of Edmund Ironside, the last Eng- lish king before the Danish usurpation (d. 1010). Her father and bis brother were sent out of the country by Canute, and, as tradition has it, ulti- mately came to Hungary and there Margaret was bom. She probably accompanied her father to England in 1057. Her marriage with Malcolm III. of Scotland took place in 1007 according to some authorities, in 1060 or 1070 according to others. She applied to Lanfranc, archbishop of Canterbury, for instruction in the way of God's service, became distinguished for her austere and ascetic life, and did much to introduce Roman usages into the Scot- tish Church. Bibliography'tir: A Vila, by > contemporary, probably her contemof, Tureot. is in ASB, June. ii. 320-340. an Eng. tranaL of which is edited by W. Forbes-Leith. 3d ed.. Edinburgh. 1806. Consult: W. P. Skene, Cettic Seol- land. ii. 34*-3M, Edinhuo(h. 1877; W. J. Rew. Lira nf Oia Vambro-Briliak Sainta, pp. Zie-2.')1. 640-553; Llan- dovery. 1853: A. P. Forbes. KaUndart of Snjtlith SainU. pp. 387-3S1. EdinbuiRh, 1873.
KARGARET, SAIHT MARGARET, SAINT

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARGARET, SAINT: One of the Helpers in Need (q.v.)..
HARCARITA MARGARITA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARGARITA: The term applied in the Greek Church to the vessel containing the consecrated host, while the portions of the host reserved for the sick by the priests in special receptacles are called Tnargaritai (" pearls "). These tnargaritai are then placed in the consecrated wine, dipped from it with a spoon, and given to the sick.
MARGRETH, JOHANII JAKOB MARGRETH, JOHANN JAKOB

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARGRETH, JOHANN JAKOB: German Roman Catholic; b. at Hamburg May 29, 1873, He was educated at the University of Münster (1892-94, 1900-01) and the Gregorian University, Rome (1894-1900), studying philosophy from 1892 to 1896 (Ph.D.. Gregorian University, 1896) and theology from 1890 to 1900 (D.D., Gregorian Uni- versity, 1900). After being a theological tutor in the dioceses of Osnabrllck (1900-42) and Hildes- heim (1902-03), he became privat-docent for apo- logetics at Münster in 1903. Three years later he was appointed to his present position of professor of moral theology at the Seminary of Mainx. He has written Dag GAdeleben Jciu ChrUli dee Sohnet GoUes (Milnster, 1902).
MARIUS MARIUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARIUS: Bishop of Aventicum 574-94. In the process of Frankish conquest between 530 and 540, a considerable part of what is now Switzerland was incorporated, and with it the old Roman col- ony of Aventicum Helvetiorum. Toward the end of the sixth century it was made the seat of a bish- opric, and Marius is the first well-attested bishop. He was bom in the diocese of Autun in 530 or 531, probably of Gallic-Roman blood, and received an excellent education with a view to the priesthood. In 585 he took part as bishop of Aventicum in the Prankish Synod of Macon. He died in 594, on Dec. 31, according to a necrology of the church of Lau- sanne, where he was buried. The chronicle written by him, the manuscript of which is in the British Museum, is a continuation, without separate title, of that of Prosper, covering the years 455-581, and contains scanty but useful contributions to the his- tory of Valais and Burgundy. The saintly life at- tributed to him by his epitaph is one of the bright spots in a dark period. (Emil EoLif.) Bibliography: The Chronicon, ed. J. Rickly, is in Mfm- oiree et documerUa de la aocUU de Vhisl. de la Suiate Ro- mande, xiii. 19-56, Lausanne, 1853; MPL, Ixxii. 793- 802, and in W. Amdt, below. The chief source for a life is the Cartularium Isouaannenae, reproduced in full in MHnoirea et documenta de la aocietS de I'hiat, de la Suiaae Romande, vol. vi., Lausanne, 1851; cf. MGH, Script., X3dv (1880), 794 sqq., and AfGH, Auct. ant., xi (1893), 227 sqq. Consult: J. D(ey), in Memorial de Fribourg, i (1854), 49-55; W. Arndt, Biachof Marinua von Aren- ticum, Leipsic, 1875; Holder-Egger, in NA, 1876, p. 254; KL, viii. 868-869. The very scattered references are well collected in Potthast, Wegweiaer, p. 7G8.
MARIUS MERCATOR MARIUS MERCATOR

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARIUS MERCATOR: Ecclesiastical writer of the fifth century; d. after 451. But little is known of his life. His cast of thought, dogmatic views, style, acquaintance with Augustine, and knowledge of African affairs, point to North Africa as his birthplace. He appears to have been a cultivated layman, with a lively interest in theology, well read in Scripture, and able in polemics. What is known of him rests wholly on his writings, on a mention of him by Possidius, in Index librorum Augustini, iv.; and on a letter to Marius from Augustine, who thanks him for two tracts against the Pelagians, which the " young " author in 418 (hence he was hardly bom prior to 390) had sent over to him from Rome (ATPL, xlviii. 193). It is possible that he then followed, at Rome, the vocation of a public teacher; at all events, Augustine styles him doctor. He must have removed to Constantinople before 429, where he took part in the last stage of the Pelagian agitations and in the Nestorian dispute. In these matters he so keenly advocated the inter- ests of Rome that he gives the impression of having served the Roman see in some official capacity. He vigorously urged the condemnation of Julian of Eclanum and his companions, and to this end in 429 he addressed a memorial in Greek to the congregation in Constantinople, submitting a copy to the Emperor Theodosius II. and translating the same into Latin (Common iiorium super nomine Ccelestii), As a result the Pelagians were banished from the capital, and their ecclesiastical condem- nation followed at the Council of Ephesus of 431. In the same year Marius issued a second and ampler tract against the Pelagians (Commonitorium adver^ su^ hceresin Pelagii et Cadestii vd etiam acripta Ju- liani; also under the title Subnotatumes in dida qucBdam Juliani ad Pientium freshyierum, with ex- tracts from Julian's writings). His remaining lit- erary activity is confined to translation from Greek into Latin of documents bearing upon the Pelagian and Nestorian controversies. Of particular im- portance in this regard, especially in view of the meager transmission of the original text«, are his translations from writings of Nestorius (e.g., Ser- mones V. adveraus Dei genetricem Mariarn). Marius is not to be rated very highly as an au- thor. As exhibited in his writings, he was a close adherent of orthodox doctrine and an ardent admirer of Augustine and CJyril. His polemics included not only Pelagian ism and Nestorianism, but also the theology of the Antiochian school. His dogmatic position is that of a rather nar- row orthodoxy; his judgment is borrowed, his polemics is impassioned; he is often unjust, at times coarse and vulgar. His style is harsh and frequently ignoble. Nevertheless, his writings and literal translations are of permanent value for the history of the Pelagian and Nestorian controver- sies, inasmuch as not a few of the weightiest of the original documents are preserved exclusively through him. G. KrOger. Bibliography: The first collected edition of Mantis' works was by J. Gamier, Paris, 1673; the best is by S. Baluze, ib. 1684, reproduced in Gallandi, Bibliotheca vcterutn par trum, viii. 613-768, Venice, 1772; MPL, xlvl repro- duces in the main the p>oorcr text of Gamier. Consult: F. Loofs, Neatoriana, Hallo, 1905; J. Fessler, Jnatitu- tionea patrologiar, ii. 2, pp. 151-165, Innsbruck, 1896; O. Bardenhewer, Potrdogie, pp. 447-449, Freiburg, 1901; DCB, iii. 834-835: KL, viii. 869-871; W. Smith, JDio tionary of Greek and Roman Biography, ii. 1045-46, Lon- don, 1890 (Kives list of the writings); Ceillier, A%tleur% aacria, viii. 498-508. 188 Karlniui
HAKKOS BDGEHIEOS MARKOS EUGENIKOS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARKOS EUGENIKOS: Metropolitan of Eph- esus; b. at Constantinople in the latter part of the fourteenth century; d. 1443 {according to others, H47 or 1449). He was educated by the famous Joseph Bryennios, and at the age of twenty- five became a monk. About 143B, against his will, the emperor made him metropolitan of Ephesus, and both in this capacity and as the representative of the patriarch of Antioch he attended the Coun- cil of Ferrara and Florence. After his return he resided at first in Constantinople, but his ecclesias- tical polity debarred him both from that city and from Ephesus. He sought refuge in Athos, but was imprisoned at least once. In learning, Markos was inferior to such scholars as Gcnnadius and Gemistos Plethon, despite his thorough training in the theology and philosophy ot his countrymen. He was, however, a powerful though simple ora- tor, and was characterized by unyielding firmness. His importance in the history of the Church is due to his opposition to union with Latin Christianity; both before and after tbe Council of Florence he refused to sign the decree of union unless the pope would permit the use of leavened bread in the sacra- ment, or at least strike out the Filioque from the creed. According to his panegyrist Syropulos, he defended himself before the emperor, the patriarch, and the pope; but this seems doubtful, especially OS Hierotheus of Monembasia states that he fled to Constantinople instead. His unswerving opposi- tion to the union was not improbably the cause of its failure. His polemic nature Is shown by the majority of his writings (collected in MPG, cbt.), in which he considers almost all the points of con- troversy with the Latins, such as the doctrine of the Trinity, the question of purgatory, the signifi- cation of the Epiidesis (q.v.) in the Eucharist, and the problem of the Tabor light (see Hesychabtb). The respect in which he was held is clear from ttie fact that he was placed among the saints at an early date. An Acoluthia was composed in his honor in the fifteenth century, and a decree of the synod held by the Patriarch Seraphim in 1734 expressly termed him a saint. (Pkilifp Meyer.) it of the pertinent Ulersture, m Greek, is given in Hauck-Heriog. RE. nL 287. Tbe early life by Uanuel Peloponnesius. of the 15th or IBtb eeatury, was edited by Arwnii. Moscow. 1SB6. Consult Fabrl- cius-Bulea, BMMKica Qrata, xi, 970-077, Bambwti tIL B*r-*'»>ut :.% at. * if ^trai tfumc :-Wl: X>>( 7»skrf jk^wtr !K V M «n#w if i. iuwufln>r7 ir Fr»jitf!K lit I-iJ* *su^ v^.* f^u^ft Ji 'j^sMTt. -wrs^m fjffM zui i^jrf9 A.*. •« ?"49'jnni^nftan»i if WBtr J-*. jwtr.r^ t.-^ " -Ks* xutrr^<. # ran ' rmtmr 'is ttji^j^sn^tx. u/^*n*rf jwi M^/^^ar. -par, iccr;n»fi ts* Ti^*^^jw^jj^.^, ;*-xwt-,r» •» .•'^«uci. isui ifvr ft ?>fwif ^fi/fjr. ;:-- ^^^^nsTk ;#--»«* «tLt ji /liy til Punt «t ytffij^ '/ rfA hfuitip^uek^ ^joarvkZifliL ft* 1ti* ;/fi5ti«K#r Ji tiifct ^.j. ".CTK 7<!an p«nv cmmI/, li* f'f />3«sU6f-tv sari forsjB»i ft gr^rn-T^fcj ':f tfuw </vfi ft/jd «»r% «!^ ^ffjr-3t^CiZJt^ to ««i:p( *a« n^ U/ i^>M ;/.LUi(»r «rr>-j#K9i. Oe. *>b( ftMeinrx. cf CtttfVA fX. ix> l>^ , l^y/i. tiKj ft#idmw>i ft ;«sci- tMTi, wmv:«i f^x Mft/V/mt, V> tb« pftiiacxt:^ ftzvi thu kui$;. nfj'jtaiAiTit^ f^:ramnoei V> rm^ ft e&;:;rea. UifiU '/ H/f»MfSi fork tt;^f»vrhr^ ftMe to defy the edict <4 J»}\y 2^j, UM , tuA hfM tlwir mrrinn in ibt bftik '/ tfi^ ftrjd#!tjt U/w0^, UMi^jna, Uktrthuft mA- 4mmf)fi ft itriuiM i^fKwfn to ^^.hftniK <J^* Mitdiei. in which h^ ftMert^i t}j^ V^TftHy of th^ Prmc^fltftntA. arid in AiJiniAt *4 K\m munf: j^at hf: wft/i ji»immon«d to Foiwy t// fttUffyJ tJi^ f^X\$^^» diAp«jtftticm to Ut l¥;W tU;r«^, In thi* Qr^if^m^m^ MftirV^rftt waa ftn imfXiftant fu^Jr**, ftr«^J in tfj« d^f/at^ with th^ doc- t/ipf '/f x\m H'/rfx/nn^r, in Jan.. )i>f2. ttu hn^t^, bft|>- tiKrn, ftr^i hiittihtr fMnuU *A tfrnlrfr/^rmy, hf! waa one of t}^ thf*j<j niftfks'Hft0rft fA tJj^ Pf^-^^j^-ftnt/i. IMuniinK Uf fi/;iMm, Mftrlorftt pr^v\^ frr^ir the provincial Hynr^J }i#;W r/n Jan. 2«>, ]<762. After the mawiacn; at Vanwy r/n Mar. 1, );»2, the VrfMxl&nis of lirjijifn rt^t\yi9i] Ut ^^risse tJieir city, f^ tJie nif^ht of Apr. l/> t}¥?y carri#yJ out tJicir pnrpfrn^, and Mar- lornt waM ai^f^oinUf^J one r^ t^ic thrv^e h#;a/Jii of the n<;w ^ovcrnni«;nt, which utill \tTtAt^imtv\ Ut \jtt loyal to t^ic kin^, f{/iiii'n wan n\ft^^\i\y fori'tfurfl, atuI on May '/7 tJic city wiui jrivrwU^i by an amiy under the command of thi; I>ijc d'Aumalc, who, however, wa« fonv*d to r«?tirc on June 12. f>n H^;pt. 29 a necond force 1im| by (!harlcH hirnwrlf, Anthony of Navarre, and nl\u*rn apfM*ar(Hj Ix'fore tJic city. IU>ui;n waa grailiially rt^tlncMul, but Montgomery, who com- manded l\w ]H*HU*ntu{, like Marlorat, would accept no (4irtrm whieh did not inclu<le free cxerciao of tiio l'rol^««iani nAinitm, and on Oct. 20 the city wan car- HimI by Alorm. Marlorat and hiN family wen; cap- fiir(*d and ImpriNoniHl. Throe dayH latiT he wiin trlt'd iM'forn f he parliament on the charge of hif^h troiMOhi and on Oct. Hi) woa condomnod to bo exo- I I tna lie tnixc n 'rfiMmmn m tV JU SlUEirTtftlUK mil •iin ^ifssr: .1 jitam turn tamoBftua oifrmuM t^t. tiin. ZST^t: ♦'iignwi Taaaaana -msii 9\muwni'jurr m Macs uui. liiie 3v- T. TV JL T-tiMiinc IST* jucEx: "n ^J^BL iZ^lK 4BS.. ^ni. . JSHk :2. :.4hI. a 3tatItittJt Of 'a. TTnmip «n*. AjirpiexL I>«. 15. !je*?- Pr*xe<CA=.i ifaedQCEftn azid : Br33Bes z: io3S ftod died \fUT rfcwTTse ft thor^ 7!sa5eti for a *faie in Geneva, L Eftxlj foRKii a friecfif^ip vrih Cahrin and Beza. R^nrnirc to ii* ruk.:rr^ ecrjziiry becveen 1560 and 1562. he Kned for a tzt* in recc^nent. from which fae was srnxkZDOcieii to :be stirj^pe to free the Neth- €Tia:>i5 from Roc» arid Spain. Here his first ac;iT::T was the preparation of the " Comproinise '* by which the Dutch nobks pledged themselves to resist the introduction of the Inqatsition. while the petition to the Regent Margaret of Parma (Apr. 5, 1556; on the same subject w^as also written by him. He defended the iconoclastic riots in Antwerp in Aug., 1566, in his Van de bedden afgheworpen in de Sederianden in Augusta 1566 and Vraye narration el apotogie des ehases pass^es au Pays-Bas. Before long he also took up arms in the cause of the Ref- ormation, but, with his brother and Brederode, was repulsed at Austruweel (Mar. 13, 1567) in an attempt to raise the siege of Valenciennes, and fled successively to Breda and Germany. He was ban- ished by the ** Council of Blood," Aug. 17, 1568, and his estates were confiscated; but in this exile he became the life-long friend of William the Si- lent, in whose honor he wrote late in 1568 or early in 1569 the famous " William's Lay," a poem which IB still a favorite folk-song in Holland. Meanwhile he had entered the service of the Reformed elector- palatine, Frederick III., and at Heidelberg he wrote on Christology and the Eucharist, besides composing his De bienkorf der heUige roomsche 187 Karlorat du Pasqnier kercke (Emden, 1569) and attending the conven- tion at Wesel (Nov., 1568) and the synod at Em- den (Oct. 4-14, 1571). Holland soon claimed the services of Mamix, whose principal political activity was exercised be- tween 1572 and 1585. In the former year he was the plenipotentiary of William and secured the promise of the Estates to renew the war with Spain. On Nov. 4, 1573, however, he was a. Diplomat himself captured by the Spaniards at and Maaslandssluis. He was taken first to Soldier. The Hague and then to Utrecht, where he was induced to make vain negotia- tions for peace. He was exchanged on Oct. 15, 1574, and from March to June of the following year he acted as William's deputy at the fruitless conferences at Breda. Holland and Zeeland de- clared themselves indep)endent of Spain and offered the crown, under certain conditions, to Elizabeth of England, Mamix being the head of the embassy which remained in England from Christmas, 1575, to Apr., 1576, in a vain endeavor to persuade Eliza- beth to become the sovereign of the Dutch. In the latter 3rear, moreover, he was a leader in the " Pacification of Ghent.'' Don John of Austria, the Spanish viceroy, who carried through the " Eternal Treaty " (Feb. 17, 1577), recognizing in Mamix a dangerous enemy of Roman Catholicism, now unsuccessfully demanded his expulsion from Brussels. The Spanish attack on the citadel of Namur (July 24, 1577) roused the Dutch to a sense of their situation. Don John was retired from his office on Dec. 7, and three days later the second Brussels union was concluded for mutual protec- tion and toleration. Mamix, as privy councilor after Dec. 29, 1577, first put down the revolts in Groningen and Artois, and, at the Diet of Worms (May 7, 1578), secured German neutrality in the Dutch struggle with Spain. At this juncture, Mamix and William were at- tacked in an anonymous pamphlet, to which the former replied in his Response apologHique (see be- low, § 4) which is particularly interesting for its numerous details of his own life. After 3. Decline a fruitless visit to the Diet of Cologne of Power, in 1580, he entered upon the more hope- ful endeavor to induce Duke Francis of Alen^on-Anjou, the youngest son of Catharine de' Medici, to accept the throne of the revolted Dutch provinces. At the head of an embassy sent to France for this purpose, he reached Plessis (near Tours) on Sept. 9, 1580, and ten days later the treaty of Plessis-lez-Tours was signed, in which Mamix ably defended the civil and religious liber- ties of the Dutch. He remained in France until Mar. 8, 1581, and on July 22 of the same year Philip was declared deposed in favor of Francis, Mamix himself preparing the act {Acte de descheance de Philippe II. de aa aeigneurie dee Pays-Baa). In November he went to England, where Francis was paying court to Elizabeth, and on Feb. 19, 1582, he retumed with the new ruler. Francis, how- ever, madly attempted (Jan. 15-17, 1583) to seize Antwerp and the most important cities by treason or a coup d*6lai. He was defeated and forced to leave the Netherlands, while Mamix and William, as his allies, were exposed to such suspicion that the former retired to his estates in West-Soubui^, near Flushing. He was called from this seclusion to become first burgomaster in Antwerp, Nov. 30, 1584. A few days later the siege of the city by Alexander of Parma began, ending on Aug. 17, 1585, by its honorable surrender, though without recognition of Protestantism. A storm of indig- nation broke over Mamix, who defended his sur- render of the city in his Bref ricU de Vistat de la viUe d'Anvers du temps de Vassikgement. But his political activity was at an end, although he visited England in 1590, France in 1591, and Orange in 1597. He resided at West-Soubuig until 1596, when he removed to Leyden. Theologically Mamix was an enthusiastic parti- zan of Calvin and Beza, and in this spirit he se- cured the rejection of the Wittenberg 4. Theo- Concord at the Synod of Antwerp logical Po- (Aug. 20, 1566). lie was also instru- sition and mental in securing a Calvinistic Pre^ Bible bjrterian organization, culminating in Translation, a general synod, for the exiled congre- gations of his coreligionists. Here, too, belong his polemics against the fanatics and Anabaptists, exemplified in his Ondersaeckinge ende grondelijcke wederlegginge der geestdrijvische leered written in 1595. This was followed by a series of other polemics, the most important being the Re- sponse apologdtique it un libelle fameux (Leyden, 1598), a reply to an anonymous attack by Emmery de Lyere. He was a stem opponent, moreover, of all revelation of God alleged to exist outside the Bible and creation, and was a genuine Calvinist in his assertion that the secular arm had authority to suppress religious error. He was active as a trans- lator of the Bible and the Psalms. After ten or twelve years of labor, he issued a rimed version of the latter (Antwerp, 1580), but this, though the subject of many debates in the synods, never gained a place in the liturgy, despite its scholarly and lit- erary merits. Like previous Dutch versions of the Psalms, the early Dutch translation of the Bible was essentially faulty, and in 1578 the Synod of Dort deputed Mamix and Dathen to seek suitable , revisers. The commission was never executed, but Mamix had already begun to translate the Psalms and some of the Minor Prophets, when, in 1586, the Synod of The Hague made unsuccessful overtures to him for an entire new translation. It was not, however, until 1594, when he was formally re- quested by the States General to perform this task, that he consented, but he lived to complete only the Psalms and Genesis, though he left fragments of Exodus, Deuteronomy, Isaiah, Daniel, and other books (see Bible Versions, B, III.). His most important contribution to theology was the Bierikxjrf already mentioned. It is a biting satire on the Roman Catholic Church, written by a supposed adherent of that commu- 5. Other nion, and ridiculing all its arguments Works, against Protestantism. The book, which is clearly modelled on the Epie- toUe obscurorum virorum (q.v.), has won for Mamix a place among the great satirists of all time. The work ran through more than twenty editions (the ICaroxiites 188 last at Groningen, 1862) and was translated into most European languages (Eng. transl. by G. Gil- pin, London, 1579). After his death appeared his Traicti du sacrament de la saincte cene du Seigneur (Leyden, 1599), an intensely CalviniBtic attack on the doctrine of the Mass. He also carried on a controversial correspondence on the same subject with the Louvain professor Michael Bajus, which he published under the title Opitecula qucBdam Domini Sand Aldegandii (Franeker, 1598); while in his Trouwe vermaninge aen de t^irisUike Oemeynien van Brabant f Vlanderen, em. (Leyden, 1589) he urged his coreligionists to be patient under their afflic- tions. There is no complete edition of the works of Mamix, but select works were edited by E. Quinet, (Euvree de P. de Mamix de Sainte-Aldegande (9 vols., Brussels, 1857-60), while his theological writings were collected by J. J. van Toorenen- bergen, Philips van Mamix van SL Aldegande gadsdienstige en kerkelijke geechriften (3 parts. The Hague, 1871-91). (S. D. van Veen.) Bxblioorapht: The life of Mamix has been written by: J. Prins, Leyden, 1782; W. Broes, 3 vols., Amsterdam, 1838-40; E. Quinet, Paris, 1854; T. Juste, The Hague, 1858; A. Lacroix and F. van Meenen, Brussels, 1858; J. van der Have, Haarlem. 1874; P. P. M. Alberdingk Thijm. Leuven, 1876; and G. Tjalma,. Amsterdam, 1896. Consult also: P. Frederioq, Mamix en tijne Nederland§che Oeachriften, Ghent, 1881; Cambndge Modem Hittory, iii 201 sqq.. New York, 1005; A. Elkan, Philipp Mamix von St. Aldegande^ Parti., Die Jugend Johanne und PhUippa von Mamix, Leipaic, 1909. MARONITES. Character and Claims (S 1). Origin of the Name. Early Accounts ({ 2). The First Patriarch, Johannes Maron ({ 3). Relation to Monothelitism and Monophysitism ({ 4). Relations with Rome ({ 5). Modem Conditions ({ 6). In the United States ({ 7). The Maronites are a Syrian people, forming with- in the Christian Church a peculiar half-independent commimity or sect. Its members live z. Charac- scattered all over Syria; congregations terand are gathered in Aleppo, Damascus, Claims. Nazareth, and the Island of Cyprus; but the proper home of the commu- nity is the Lebanon region, from Tripoli in the north, to Tyre and the Lake of Gennesaret in the south. The districts of Kesrawan, n.e. of Beirut, and Bsherre (26 m. s.e. of Tripoli) are inhabited exclusively by Maronites; while in other places Maronites, Greeks, Jacobites, Druses, and others live as neighbors. The total number of the Mar- onite inhabitants of Lebanon is somewhat over 200,000, according to the newest reports. They pursue agriculture and cattle-breeding, and succeed well in the cultivation of the silk-worm. Their native tongue has for centuries been the Arabic, but they are of Syrian descent. The liturgy em- ployed in their divine service is in Syriac, though only a few understand that language; the read- ings from the Gosp)els, however, are in Arabic. They like to consider themselves a distinct nation; and they have, indeed, always succeeded in main- taining a certain measure of political independence. They are governed by sheikSi elected from among their own nobility; and to the Ottoman sultan, who appoints a Christian pasha over them, they pay a variable tribute. At the head of their church (the Ecdeaia Maronitarum) stands a patriarch, who is elected by themselves and has the title of patri- arch of Antioch and all the East. He is elected by a two-thirds' vote of the archbishops and bishops. He resides during summer in the monastery Kano- bin, in the Lebanon, and during winter at Bkerki. He receives confirmation from the pop)e; for from the latter part of the twelfth century there has existed a relationship between the see of Rome and the Maronites. Although this relationship depends more upon an external basis and upon adjustments made from time to time, and though real unity in doctrine or worship has never existed, the claim of later Maronlte authors is often to the effect that from apostolic times their church has maintained an undisturbed orthodoxy, essentially that of the Roman Catholic Church. Authors who have writ- ten in this strain are Abraham Ecchellensis (q.v.) and Faustus Nairon, in Dissertatio de origine, nom- ine ac religione Maronitarum (Rome, 1679). These writers follow somewhat closely a few Roman Catholic writers, though there have been manifest traces of monothelite tendencies. On the Orontes, between Hamath and Emesa, lay an old monastery dedicated to St. Maron. In the sixth century it was repaired by Justinian, ac- cording to Procopius {De cedificiis, v., ix.), and was the most prominent among the Syrian monasteries. The Maron after whom the monastery a. Origin was named is generally considered of the Name, identical with the hermit whose life Early Theodoret has described (Religiaea Accounts, histonaf xvi.), the monk and presby- ter of whom Chrysostom speaks so highly (Epist. xxxvi.), who probably lived about 400. But the great age and the celebrity of the monastery make it more probable that it took its name from some saint much older, perhaps from Mari, missionary to Babylon, who was buried in the monastery Deir Mar Man, near Seleucia, on the Tigris; or from Mari the Persian, mentioned by Ibas of Edessa (W. Wright, Hist, of Syriac Litera- turCj London, 1894, pp. 48-49, 59). However this may be, it is from the monastery that the Maron- ites themselves derive their name; some scholars, however, derive it from Maronea, a village thirty Roman miles east of Antioch; and others from Johannes Maron (see below). The name does not occur until the eighth century, when it is used by John of Damascus to designate a heretical sect. Exactly in the same manner it occurs later in the writings of Christian authors in Egypt (who wrote in Arabic), such as Eutychius (Ibn Batrik, beginning of the tenth century), Benassalus (Ibn el-Ass&l, thir- teenth century), and others (cf. E. Renaudot, Hist, patriarcharum Alexandrinorum, Paris, 1713, pp. 419 sqq.). Eutychius says: " At the time of the Emperor Mauricius there lived a monk Manm who taught that Christ had two natures, one will, and one activity (? operation). The most of his ad- herents, named Maronites after him, dwelt in Ham- ath, l^innesrin and 'Awasim. After his death, the citizens of Hamath built the cloister Deir Marun 189 Xaronites and openly professed his teaching/' Benassalus distinguishes Maronites from Melchites (orthodox Greeks) and from Franks (Latins), and reports that the Maronites went over to the religion of the Franks. William of Tyre (q.v.) states that a peo- ple dwelling in the neighborhood of Byblos, who for 500 3rears had followed the teaching of the heresiarch Maron, had in 1182 come into relations with the Patriarch Aimerich of Antioch, forsworn their heresy, accepted the orthodox faith, and re- ceived bishops of the Roman Catholic Church. These writers show a bias against the Maronites, and William of T3rre is in this matter dependent upon Eutychius, and, further, he does not seem to intend to imply that all Maronites went over to the Roman Catholic Church. Yet, that Maronites were not regarded as orthodox appears from efforts con- tinuing into the eighteenth century to make their teaching conform to the Roman system. The Biarouites, in asserting their early and continuous orthodoxy, appeal to the fact that in the acts of the sixth s3mod (680), which condemned the Mono- thelites, the Maronites are not mentioned. But other testimony which they adduce for their or- thodoxy is taken from later writers whose produc- tions are more or less suspicious both because of their late date and because of an admixture of legend in their accounts of Johannes Maron, which are derived from an Arabic source not earlier than the fourteenth or fifteenth century. The account given of Johannes Maron, whom the Maronites acknowledge as their first patriarch, is that he was bom at SirOm, near Antioch, was ed- ucated in Antioch and the monastery 3. The First of St. Maron. Later he studied in Patriarch, Constantinople, became monk in St. Johannes Maron, was ordained priest, and wrote Maron. against the heretics. He was intro- duced to the papal legate in Antioch, and by him made bishop of Botrus in 676. He then converted all the Monophysites and Monothe- lites in the Lebanon region to the Roman faith, or- dained priests and consecrated bishops, and gave the Maronites their political and military constitu- tion. When Theophanes, patriarch of Antioch, died, in the second year of the reign of Justinian II., Johannes happened, it is said, to be present in the city, and was unanimously elected patriarch. It is also reported that he journeyed to Rome, and was consecrated by Fope Honorius; that he built a new monastery near Botrus after the Greeks destroyed the old one, and that he died there in 707. But this story contains anachronistic elements, since Honorius lived nearly a century before that time. As no one but the biographer of Maro knows about a patriarch of Antioch of that name, the story of his patriarchate seems to be a fabrication. Renau- dot even goes so far as to deny the very existence of Maron; but there is no reason to doubt that he really was elected bishop of Lebanon, and exer- cised great influence there in steady opposition to the Greeks. The Maronites celebrate him on Mar. 2. A singular characteristic of this history of Jo- hannes Maron is that it erroneously identifies the Mardaites and the Maronites and ascribes to the latter the doughty deeds narrated of the former — a matter which has given rise to variant explana- tions of no historic value. Early reports give no insight into religious and ecclesiastical conditions prior to the seventh cen- tury. If in that century Maronites were Monothe- lites, they may have received the Monophysite doc- trine spread by Jacobus Baradsus (see Jacobites) in Syria. And if , as is reported, the monks of the monastery of Maron were made mar- 4. Re]atk>n tyrs because of their agreement with to Mono- the deliverances of the Council of thelitism Chalcedon, they could not have been and Mono- supported by their countrymen. The physitism. Maroni^ confess that heretical pas- sages have gotten into their litera- ture, but they assert that these were smuggled in by Monophysites and Monothelites. In their zeal for Rome they have burned many books of this character, and they boast of the correctness of their later literature, especially that printed in Rome I Their historians declare that at the beginning of the twelfth century a certain Thomas, archbishop of KafarTab, near Aleppo, preached among the Maron- ites the doctrine of the Monothelites and in conse- quence had a controversy with the Greek patriarch of Antioch. This may have been the schism re- ferred to by William of Tyre, ended by the agree- ment of Maronites and the Roman Church in 1182, and may have furnished the pretext for preaching the doctrine to the Maronites who lived in Cyprus, where the heresy lingered till the time of Pope Eugenius IV. The great conversion to Romanism in 1182 was not complete. An anti-Roman reaction set in and was punished by a papal interdict, from which the country was not absolved until 1215. Rome took great pains to maintain the union, 5. Relatwns as, for example, in 1445, in con- with Rome, sequence of the C!ouncil of Florence. A national s3mod was held at the com- mand of Clement VIII. in 1596, in the monastery of Kanobin, to which Girolamo Dandini, a Jesuit, went as papal legate, charged with the revision of all Maronite affairs. According to his report (Mta- stone apostolica al patriarca e MaroniH del Monte Ltbano, Cesena, 1656; Fr. transl. by Richard Simon, Voyage du Mont LSban^ Paris, 1685), the council re- sulted in submission to the Roman see, and an agree- ment with respect to doctrines. The differences, however, were neither few nor unimportant. The Maronites retained the celebration of the Lord's Supper under both kinds, the Syriac liturgy, the marriage of the priests, their own fast-days, and their own saints. A new council was held in 1736 in the monastery of Mary, at Luweiza, in the dis- trict of Kesrawan. The celebrated Maronite scholar J. S. Assemani was sent from Rome as papal legate; and the object was to secure among the Maronites acceptance of the canons of the Council of Trent. How incomplete the success of this mission was is shown by the remark of a Maronite monk: '' (The Maronites) recognize the pope as head (of the Church); outside of that they have nothing essen- tially Catholic.'' The principal concessions by the Maronites were that they accepted the filioque and kneeling at the consecration, and acknowledged the Karonites Karquette 190 councils of 787 (second Nicene), 869 (Constanti- nople), 1439 (Florence), and the Council of Trent; the Roman catechism (in Arabic) and the Gregorian calendar were introduced; the Tridentine exposi- tion of the doctrine of transubstantiation was es- tablished; the marriage of the clergy was confined to the lower degrees; the name of the pope was in- troduced in the prayers and the mass. Other pro- visions dealt with the preparation of the host, its reception by the clergy in both kinds, but by the laity in the form of a sop; the orders of the clei^ and their ordination, and the general constitution of the Church. While this synod settled the mod- cm form of the Maronite oi^anization, in many particulars there has been reversion to the earlier customs. In 1584 Gregory XIII. founded the Collegium Maronitarum in Rome, and from that institution issued a number of celebrated scholars — Geoi^us Amira, Gabriel Sionita, Abraham EccheUensis, the Assemanis, and others. An earlier Maronite scholar of note wasTheophilus, court astrologer to the Caliph al-Mahdi, who compiled a '' Chronicle " and trans- lated Homer into Syriac. But before the agreement with Rome there was little literary activity among the Maronites. Even afterward, the people re- mained backward in culture, in spite of schools es- tablished among them, and retained many of their early customs. Two printing-presses 6. Modem were established at Mar Hanna in 1795, Conditions, and at Kashia in 1802; but they awa- kened no interest in reading. For a long period the Maronites maintained a kind of supremacy over the Druses; but after 1840 their power became greatly weakened, feuds arose be- tween them and the Druses, by which the country was often fearfully devastated. As a consequence the Maronite Church has greatly suffered. The priests are poor, being supported only by free-will offerings and fees for masses. The monasteries participate also in the general poverty, and many have been destroyed. The clergy includes, besides the patriarch, archbishops and bishops, presbjrters, deacons, sub-deacons, readers and cantors. The temporal power is exercised by an emir, who is re- sponsible to the pasha of Saida. (K. KESSLERf.) The superior of the Syro-Maronite Church in the United States is the Rt. Rev. Joseph Yazbek, chor- bishop, and rector of the Maronite church of Bos- ton, which was dedicated in 1898. The 7. In the ceremony of the preconization of the United pastor of the church of Boston to the States. chor-bishopric took place there in 1900. The decree was conferred by the Mar- onite patriarch, and was approved by the Roman Catholic archbishop of Boston. The title of chor- bishop, it should be added, is equivalent to the title of a vicar in partibus. It gives the right to use the miter. The church of New York was organized in 1893. There are also churches in Philadelphia, St. Louis, Buffalo, Scranton, Pa., Youngstown, O., and Law- rence, Mass., about ten in all, with an equal number of priests. The sect claims a membership of about 35,000 in the United States. The Maronite priests in the United States, al- though appointed by the Maronite patriarch, are under the immediate protection and at the call oi the Roman Catholic bishops in whose dioceses their churches are located. A. A. Stamouu. Bibuoorapht: Sources for doctrine are their eodenastioal books: Miuale chaldaicum juxta riium . . . Maroni- toTum, Rome, 1502-94, 2d ed., 1604; their service for the Eucharist was printed at Koichaya in the Lebanon. 1816, 1856; Liber miniMtri misaeB juxta rUutn . . . Moroni' UiTum, Rome, 1506; Offida aandorum, 2 parts, Rome, 1656-66; Offldum feriale, Beirut. 1876. Historical sources are John of Damascus, in MPG, xciv. 485. 1432; the presbyter Timotheus, in MPG, Uxxv. 165; J. 8. Assemani. Bibliotheca orientalit, I 406 sqq., iii. 2, pp. 22 sqq., Rome, 1710; Faustus Nairon, Enoplia ftdei catho- liccB Romance hUtorioo-doomatica, ib. 1604; a collection of sources is in M. Le Quien, Oriena CAmttanus, iil 1-100, Paris, 1740. An excellent religious orientation of Chris- tian peoples in Syria is by H. H. Jessop, in History . . . qT the Sixth Seanon of the Evangelical AUianee, ed. P. Schaflf and 8. L Prime, pp. 634-642. New York. 1874. Consult further: Robinson, Reaearehea, vol. iiL; G. Guy, Sij'our ... & BeiroiU et dana U lAban, 2 vols., Paris, 1847; H. Petermann, Reiaen im Orient^ voL i., Leipeic. 1860; C. H. Churchill, Mount Lebanon, vol. iv., Druzea and MaroniUa, London, 1862; A. Pichler, Oeadtichte der kirchlichen Trennung, u. 533-557. Munich. 1865; KL, viii. 801-002; A de Piolant, Au paya dea Marwuiea, Paris, 1882; F. J. Bliss, in PEF. Qttarterly StatemenU for 1892 (valuable); J. Debs, Perpituelle Orthodoxie dea Mar- oniiea, Arras, 1806; F. Nau, Opuaculea Maronitea. (Euvree iniditea de J. Maron, Paris, 1890; J. Parisot, Rapport aur une miaaion acientiflque en Turquie d'Aaia, ib. 1899; K. Beth. Orientaliadte Chriatenheit, Berlin. 1002; F. Tyan. Soua Ua cbdrea du Liban; la naiionaliU Maronite, La Chapelle-Montligeon, 1005. On the synod of 1736 consult : 8. E. Assemani, BibUr- othectB Medicea, pp. 118 sqq., Florence, 1742; Nouveaux mfmoirea dea miaaiona de la compaonie de JUwa dana le Levant, viii. 353 sqq., Paris, 1745; while a summary of the Acts was given by C. F. Schnurrer, in De eccUaia Maronitica, TQbingen, 1810-11, cf. Archiv fOr Kirdien- geachichU. i (1814), 32-82. Consult also J. 8. Assemani. Synodua provincialia a . . . patri^vrcha Antiocheno, archi- epiacopia et epiacopia, necnon clero . . . Maronitarum, Rome. 1820. MAROT, ma"ro', CLiSmENT: French poet and Protestant leader; b. at Cahors (60 m. n. of Tou- louse) c. 1497; d. at Turin in Aug., 1544. In 1518 he entered the service of the Princess Margaret of Orl^ans-Angouldme, better known as Margaret of Navarre (q.v.), and thus came into contact with Prot- estant teachings. In 1525 he accompanied Francis I. to Italy, and was wounded and taken prisoner with him at Pavia. When he retiu'ned to France he began to attack the abuses of the Roman Cath- olic system, and was imprisoned. On his release in Nov., 1527, he openly declared his adhesion to Prot- estantism. In 1530 he published a collection of his early poems, some of which were by no means edi- fying, under the title L* Adolescence cUmentinc. Accused of heresy, he escaped by the protection of the king and his sister. Believing that Francis was inclined to favor the Evangelical doctrines, he wrote for him a poem on the fundamental principles of the New Testament (Sermon du ban pasteur et du maun vats). At this time he also began to translate the Psalms into verse. But in Oct., 1534, when the affaire des placards brought on a severe persecution of the Protestants, he fled to Ferrara, where he re- mained under the protection of Ren^, daughter of Louis XII. of France (see RenIie op France). In 1536 he renounced Protestantism at Lyons, went back to the court, and worked at his poetical venioD m Xaxonitea Marquette of the Psalms from the Latin version of Vatable, thus rendering a valuable service to the French Prot^tant churches, which were in need of a hymn-book. The first Calvinistic hymn-book (Strasbui^, 1539) con- tains eighteen pssJms, twelve of which are Marot's. In 1542 he published thirty psalms with a dedica- tion to the king; but the general adoption of them by the Protestants compelled him once more to seek safety in flight, reaching Geneva at the end of the year and remaining there a twelvemonth. Cal- vin induced him to translate twenty more psalms, which he published with the others in 1543, under the title Cinquante pseaumes. He was unable, how- ever, to submit to the ecclesiastical discipline of Geneva, and went to Turin. His version of the Psalms is accurate and renders admirably the beau- ties of the Hebrew text. Its success was remark- able. In 1562 the French Protestant hymn-book was completed by the addition of 101 psahns trans- lated by Beza to forty-nine of Marot's. Between 1562 and 1565 not less than sixty-two editions were printed; and it was ultimately translated into twenty-two languages. Eugene Choisy. Biblioorapht: The one edition of the (Euvrea to be con- sulted IB by G. Guiffrey, voU. ii.-iu., Paris. 1876-81. Consult: F. Bovet, Hist, du paautier den iglises rfform^a, Paris, 1872; O. Douen, ClSment Maroi ei le paautier hu- guenot, 2 vols., ib. 1878-79 (cf. T. Dufour. in Revue critique, Jan. 31 and Feb. 7, 1881); E. Doumergue, Jean Calvin, I 233 sqq., 585 sqq., Lausanne, 1809. Consult also: Julian. HymnoloffVt p. 714; Lichtenberger, ESR, viii. 734-737.
MARPRELATE TRACTS MARPRELATE TRACTS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARPRELATE TRACTS: A series of seven publications which appeared in England under the pseudonym of " Martin Marprelate, Gentleman," between Nov. or Dec, 1588, and July, 1589. They were violent attacks upon the Church, episcopacy, and certain bishops in particular, impudent, per- sonal, and scurrilous in passages, so that they were not approved even by the Puritans; but their keen and apt if somewhat broad and vulgar wit, their logical argument, and their evident sincerity made them efifective for the ends for which they were in- tended. Their success occasioned numerous imi- tations and more numerous and ponderous replies, giving rise altogether to ^' the greatest religious con- troversy of Elizabeth's reign." The tracts were printed surreptitiously, at first at East Moulsey (opposite Hampton Court), Surrey, afterward at hiding-places in Northamptonshire and Warwick- shire. Extraordinary but unsuccessful efforts were made by the authorities to discover the author. It was suspected at the time, and has been generally believed since, that they were written by the Welsh- man John Penry (q.v.). Dr. Dexter's argument for Henry Barrow is not conclusive. It was Penry beyond question who superintended the printing and distribution. He had more or less help and encouragement from John Udall (q.v.); Job Throck- morton, a country gentleman of Hasely, Warwick- shire; Robert Waldegrave, a London printer; Sir Richard Knightly, a Puritan squire of Fawsley, Northamptonshire; John Hales, of Coventry; and Robert Wigston, of Wolston, Warwickshire. The titles of the tracts are very long; abridged they are: (1) An Epistle; (2) An Epitome; (3) Cer- tain Mineral Conclusions; (4) Ha y' any Workefar Cooper f (5) The Protestation; (6) Theses MaHinr iancs or Martin Junior; (7) The Censure of Martin Junior, Nos. 1, 2, and 4, with An Admonition to the People of England by Thomas Cooper, bishop of Winchester, prepared in reply to the Epistle, and two other anti-Martin publications, were reprinted with introductions and notes by John Petheram under the title of Puritan Discipline Tracts (Lon- don, 1843-47). Udairs Diotrephes, the Epistle, and Cooper's Admonition were reprinted with introduc- tions by Edward Arber in the English Schdar^s Library (London, 1879-82). Biblioorapht: W. Maskell, A Hiatory c/ the Marprelaie Con- troverey, London, 1845; M. Dexter, Congregationaliam of the Last Three Hundred Year$, pp. 131-202, New York. 1880; E. Arber. An Introductory Sketch to the Martin Mar^ prelate Coniroverey, Bnglieh Scholar'a Library, no. 8, Lon- don, 1879; W. Law, Defence of Church PrincipUa, 2d ed.. ib. 1804; idem. Wholly for God the Chriatian Life, trith Introduction, ib. 1804; O. H. Curteis, Disaent in ite Relation to the Church of England, p. 76. ib. 1807; J. H. Overton, The Church in England, I 474-476. ib. 1807; W. H. Frere, The Engliah Church {1668-1626), pp. 249- 254, ib. 1004; W. Pierce. An Historical Introduction to the Marprelate Tracta; a Chapter in the Evolution cf religioua and civil Liberty in England, New York, 1000.
MARQUETTE, JACQUES MARQUETTE, JACQUES

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARQUETTE, JACQUES: Roman Catholic mis- sionaiy and explorer and discoverer of the Mis- sissippi; b. at Laon (87 m. n.e. of Paris), France, in 1637; d. in Michigan near the Marquette River May 18, 1675. He entered the Society of Jesus in 1654; became priest in 1666, and the same year went to Canada, taking up his residence among the Algonquin and Huron Indians and studying their languages; in 1668 he went to Lake Superior to Sault Sainte Marie, renewing there the abandoned mission first established in 1641, where he built a church and made many converts; later he moved to La Pointe du St. Esprit, and then in 1671 to Mackinaw, where he founded the mission of St. Ignatius; in 1673 he joined the expedition of Louis Joliet, keeping a diary which is of permanent inter- est {Voyage et dicouverte de quelques pays et nations de VAnUrique Septemlrionale, printed often, e.g., in M. Thevenot, Recueil de voyages, Paris, 1681 ; Eng. transl. in J. G. Shea, Discovery and Exploration of the Mississippi, New York, 1852) ; in 1674 he started to establish a mission, under orders, in Illinois, but was taken ill on the way, and did not reach Kas- kaskia until the following spring, where he accom- plished his object; the following year he set out for Mackinaw, being compelled by illness to leave Kas- kaskia, and died on the way. His grave was dis- covered at Point St. Ignace, Mich., in 1877. Bxbuoobapht: R. Q. Thwaites, Father Marqttette, New York, 1002; idem, in Jemii ReUUiona and Allied DoeumenUi, Cleveland, 1806 sqq.; J. Sparks, Library of American Bir ooraphy, vol. z., Boston, 1838; H. H. Hurlbut. Faiher MarqueUe at Mackinato and Chicagot Chicago, 1878; 8. Hedges, Father Marquette, Diecoverer (jf the MiuieBippi, New York, 1003.
MARROW CONTROVERSY, THE MARROW CONTROVERSY, THE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARROW CONTROVERSY, THE: A Scotch ecclesiastical dispute occasioned by the republica- tion in 1718 by James Hog of Caraock of The Mar- row of Modern Divinity, by E. F. (2 parts, London, 1645-49), possibly wrongly ascribed to Edward Fisher, an English Calvinist of the seven- teenth century noted for spirituality and learning (cf. DNB, xix. 55-56). The work consists of re- ligious dialogues of an original and sprightly kind, discusses the doctrine of the atonement, and aims to guide the reader safely between Antinomianism (q.v.) and Neonomianism. A copy of it was brought into Scotland by an English Puritan soldier, and years afterward foimd by Thomas Boston (q.v.), who was much pleased with it, and spoke of it to several; and so it was republished with a commend- atory preface by James Hog. The book displeased the Neonomians, and they were the leading men in the Church of Scotland. One of their number, Principal Haddow of St. Andrews, assailed it in his opening sermon at the Synod of Fife, Apr., 1719; and a ** committee for preserving the purity of doc- trine '' was chosen at the Assembly that year, the business of which was to discredit the book. This was attempted by garbled extracts. In their re- port in 1720 the committee condemned the book as Antinomian, and the Assembly approved. Then the friends of the book rallied to its defense. Twelve men, who were called " the Representers," formally called the attention of the Assembly to the anomaly that it had condemned, because taught in the book, propositions which were couched in Scripture lan- guage, and others which were expressly taught in their symbolical books. The Neonomians, how- ever, gained a moderate victory, and in the Assem- bly of 1722 the twelve Representers were solemnly rebuked; subsequently every effort was made by the Neonomians to prevent the settlement of min- isters holding the Marrow doctrines. No action was taken against the Representers, and the contro- versy in the church courts ended. But the irritar tion lasted, and ultimately led to the formation of the Secession Church (see Presbyterians). Bibuoorapht: W. M. Hetherinfi^ton, HisL of the Church of Scotland, chap, ix., pp. 342. 344-347, New York, 1881; C. A. Briggs, American Presbyierianism, pp. 254 sqq., ib. 1885.
GEORGE, MARQUIS DE MARSAY, GEORGE, MARQUIS DE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSAY, GEORGE, MARQUIS DE: Quietist and mystic; b. at Paris 1688; d. at Ambleden (an estate near Wolfenbattel), Brunswick, Feb. 3, 1753. He was a descendant of a noble family of Reformed faith, which had emigrated from France to Germany and Switzerland, and from childhood he was acquainted with such books of devotion as those of Thomas k Kempis and Jurieu. He served as an ensign in an Anglo-Hanoverian regiment in Belgium during the Spanish War of Succession. During a severe ill- ness he was urged by two friends to resign his com- mission and withdraw entirely from the world. The three retired in 1711 to Schwarzenau, in the county of Wittgenstein, where they lived as hermits, prac- tising self-castigation, observing silence so far as possible, and toiling diligently. Not receiving from this mode of life the edification which he sought, De Marsay withdrew from his companions and in 1712 entered into a marriage of absolute conti- nence with Clara Elisabeth von Callenberg. The pair lived in a small house near Gersdorf, suffer- ing the extremes of poverty and distressed by fears concerning their spiritual welfare. After 1713 De Marsay and his wife made repeated visits to his kinsmen in Geneva -in the hope of reconciling his mother, who was displeased with her son's course of life. In Switzerland they came in frequent con- tact with the ** awakened," and De Marsay learned of the writings of Madame Guyon, which were hence- forth to control him. Gradually withdrawing from ascetic extremes, De Marsay and his wife devoted themselves more to practical work, became par- tially reconciled with his family, and accepted a pension from his father's estate. Now all his former struggles seemed to him self-righteousness, and he regarded himself as a child with neither light nor certainty. Then began, according to his convic- tion, the renewal of the " center," or the foundation of his soul, through the spirit of God, although for many years his spiritual life knew neither rest nor Meantime serious controversies resulted from bia association vith Pietists of like tendencies. In 172S he conceived the plan of emigrating to Penn- sylvania, and in 1730 Zinzendorf sought to interest him in forming the separatists in Schwarzenau and Berleburg into a Moravian community, and also wished to send him to France to win the scattered and oppressed Reformed for his cause. For a time De Marsay and his wife were favorably impressed, but both later rejected the proposal. He now with- drew from mystic meetings and resumed a hermit's life in Schwarzenau and Berlebui^. After 1732 he resided for some years at the castle of Hayn near Berleburg as the spiritual adviser of the Von Fleisch- bein family. In this period fall a number ot his works. All these writings, of which the most im- portant are his FreiiniUige utvI chrisliiche Diakurst (3 parts, 1735-39; Eng. transl., Discouraen on Sub- jects Relating to Ihe SpirHual Life, Edinbui^h, 1749), Zeugnia eiitea Kindee von der Richtigkeit der Wcge des GeitUt (8 parts, 1736-41), and CkrisUtrhe Ge- danken Tiber verschiedener Materien der GoUseligkeU (1750), show the influenoe both of French mysti- cism and of the tbeosophy of Jakob BOlmie and Gottfried Arnold (qq. v.). After the death of his wife in 17'12, De Marsay lived for three years in Schwarzenau, and then resided in various places. Coming into contact with pietistic EvangeUcal pastors, through their influence he abandoned se[>- aratism, took part in public worship and the com- munion, and accepted the Evangelical doctrine of justification by faith. His importance is due to the fact that he introduced the quietistic mysticism of French Roman Catholicism into Germany, although he was one of the last representatives of his school. (K. Holl.) Bibuoorapbt: The main saurra far a life it the autabing' nphy. eaisCiDs Id MS. in the provincial «clesiuli«il arohivn at t^blent, reprtxlucal gubalanlbJty in De VhJ- Bnti. Sviltm dtr h-iheren HaVrundt. ii. 1A3 sqq., EHwrield. 1827. CoMult furtlior: H. Corrodi, KrititAt OtnAichlt do Chiluumiu, iit 45S sqq.. Zurich, I7S3; ZHT. 185S. pp. 346 nq.; M. Gobsl. GacMehU da chritaidten Ltbtn* in dtr Theiniseh-aatithaliKhtn narigelijirfixn Kirche. »i. 193 oqq., Cobleni. 1860: (i. Heppe. Oetchidili der i/uid- uIiHAcn Mi/ililcindrTkaUtaliidicn Kirdir, pp. SOe sqq., Berlin. 1S75; A. RitsdhI, GndtichU da PUtitma; \. 425. ii. 370 »qq.. Bonn, 1S80-84; R. A. Vauehan, Hovrt u-iA ISt Mi/ttia, iL 201-205, 8tb ed., Loadmi, n.(L
UARSDEH, SAMUEL MARSDEN, SAMUEL

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSDEN, SAMUEL: Church of England; b. at Horsforth (5 m. n.w. of Leeds) July 28. 1764; d. at Windsor (30 m. n.w. of Sydney), New South Wales, May 12, 1838. He was educated at the grammar-school in Hull, and then assisted his father in his shop in Leeds. He was converted and joined at first the Methodist Church, but afterward united himself to the Church of England, and entered St. John's College, Cambridge. He was ordained in 1793, and in 1794 sailed to Australia as chaplain to the penal colony at Paramatta, near Sydney. Ho established a farm there which eventually became one of the finest in Australia, and endeavored to train the convicts to habits of industry. In 1807 he returned to England to make a report on the condition of the colony, and tried to interest the Church Missionary Society in the Maoris of New Zealand, but in vain. He succeeded, however, in inducing W. Hall and J. King, two laymen, to re- turn to Australia with him, and in 1814, after he had fitted out a small vessel at his own expense, be and his two assistants sailed to New Zealand. The natives welcomed him gladly and he labored among them at intervals until his death, making in all seven visits to the islands, the last in 1837. He be- lieved that civilization should precede the Gospel, and therefore his chief efforts were in that direction. In New South Wales also he was very influential in the cause of civilization, establishing schools and a seminary. BiRLioaiiAFHT: J. B. Mantlim, Memoirs of At Life and Laboun of . . . Samwl Marsden. London. 1858; J. L. Nicholu, iVdrralin of a Vouaot to New Zrotand ... in . , . tSti-lS, . . . mA Kcv. S. hlartdn, ib. 1817; DNB, luvi. 205-206.
MARSEILLES, BISHOPRIC OF MARSEILLES, BISHOPRIC OF

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSEILLES, BISHOPRIC OF: An ancient episcopal see in the south of France, said by tradi- tion to ha^'e been founded by the Lazarus who was raised from the dead. He is supposed to have come hither with his sisters Mary and Martha in the year G3, to have been bishop here fifty years, and to have met a martyr's death. The first bishop known to authentic history is Oresius, who signed the de- crees of the Synod of Aries in 314. Proculus (381- 428) attempted to claim metropolitan rights, which were conceded to him personally but not to his suc- cessors by the Synod of Turin in 401. During his episcopate Semipelagianism made such progress in southern Gaul that its adherents were sometimes known as Massilians. The see continued to be of considerable importance. During a part of the episcopate of Paul de Sade (1404-34), the antipope, Peter de Luna (Benedict XIIL), resided here. "The bishopric, which had remained a suffragan see of Aries, was suppressed in 1801, and restored in 1821, but is now under the metropolitan jurisdiction of Aix. BlBLioflBAPHT: Gams. S^a tpiteoparum. pp. GT3-G74, Bupplement. pp, 38. i2 (for list o( bishopal: OaUia CAH*- liana, i. 031-704. appendix, pp. lOS-llS, Fuii. HIS; F.X. de Reliance de Caalelmomn, L-AntigTiiU dt rfglitt da 3f nruit/f et la Mueceanan dt ta Hfigvet. 3 vols.. MajBeilLen, 1747-51; A. Ricsrd, La 6vtgua de MartaUt, Paris, 1872.
HARSH, HERBERT MARSH, HERBERT

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSH, HERBERT: Bishop of Peterborough; b. at Faversham (44 m. e.s.e. of London), Kent, Dec. 10, 1767; d. at Peterborough May I, 1839. He was educated at the King's School, Canterbury, and St. John's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1779; M,A., 1782; B.D., 1792; D.D., 1808). In 1779 he became a fellow of his college. In 1785 he traveled on the continent and studied at Leipsic for some years with interruptions. In 1807 he was appointed Lady Margaret professor of divinity at Cambridge, where he instituted an innovation by delivering bis lectures in English instead of Latin. In Aug., 1816, he was made bishop of LlandafI, and in 1819 he was transferred to Peterborough. As bishop he intro- duced many reforms in the administration of his dioceses. Marsh was a zealous opponent both of Calvinism and of Roman Catholicism and wrote many controversial pamphlets. Some ot his more important works are: The Hiatory of the Polilicka qf Great Britain and J^rance (2 vols., Loiulon, 1800); A Course of Lectures, coniaining a Description . . , of Divinity {6 parts, 1809-22); A Comparative View 1^ the Churches of England and Rome (Cambridge, 1814); HorcB Pdaegica (only part 1 published, 1815); Leetarea on the Critieism arul Interpretation qfOte Bible (1828); and Lectures on the Authenticity and Cred^iUily of the New Testament, and on the Authority of the Old Tatament (London, 1840). He also translated tho Introduction to the New Testa- ment of J. D. Michaelis (4 vols,, Cambridge, 1793- 1801). Bini.rDOH.ipni: T. Baker, HUt. of rte C"««f« o/ Si. John, Carnlmdge, «t J, E. B. Mayor, u, 73fl-88B. Cambridne, Ret. H. Marth. lADdon ; DNB. 1 L an -315, j,^r
MARSHALL, JOHR TDRHES MARSHALL, JOHN TURNER

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSHALL, JOHN TURNER: English Baptist; b. at Farsley (5 m. w. ot Leeds), Yorkshire, May 13, 1850. He was educated at Rawdon College and Owens and Baptist Colleges, Manchester (B.A., London University, 1870). From 1877 to 1898 he was classical tutor in Manchester Baptist College, and since the latter year has been president of the same institution, while since 1898 be has also been lecturer on the history of Christian doctrine in Man- chester University, He was president of the Bap- tist Union, 1909-10. He is an able Aramaic scholar, and is applying this knowledge to the criticism of the Greek text of the Gospels in an interesting and instructive manner. In theology he is "Evangel- ical, with a frank outlook on all that is well grounded in Biblical criticism." He has written commenta- ries on Job and Ecclesiastes (Philadelphia, 1903) ■ and Job and his Comforters (London, 1905).
MARSHALL, STEPHEH MARSHALL, STEPHEN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSHALL, STEPHEN: Westminster divine; b. at Godmanchester in Huntingdonshire. England, of an unknown date; educated at Emmanuel Col- lege, Cambridge; became minister at Wethorsfield, and then at Finchingfield in Essex, where he was silenced for non-conformity. In 1640 he was made lecturer at St. Margaret's, Westminster. He was one of the chiefs in the Smectymnuan controversy (see Calaut, Edmund) with Bishop Halt in 1641; was made member of the Westminster Assembly of Divines in 1643. He was the greatest preacher of his times and the most popular speaker. He waa an active man, and a judicious adviser in all ecclesiastical affairs. He preached before Parlia- ment, the Lord Mayor, and the Assembly, more frequently than many others combined. He was the moat influential member of the Westminster Assembly in ecclesiastical affairs. He represented the English Parliament in Scotland in 1643; at- tended the commissioners sent to the king at New- castle for the accommodation of peace in 1646; at- tended the commissioners at the treaty of the Isle of Wight in 1647. He was a moderate and judicious Presbyterian under Cromwell's administration, and as an acknowledged chief was appointed one of the committee to draw up a catalogue of fundamentals aa a, basis of toleration, to be presented to the House o{ Commons in 1654, and became one of the Tryers. He died in November, 1655; and his remains were interred in Westminster Abbey, but were shame- fully dug up at the Restoration. Large numbers of his sermons on special occa- sions were published. These, notwithstanding the faults in method and style characteristic of the times, are models of eloquence and fervor. Among these may bo mentioned: A Peace-Offering to God, Sept. 7, 1641; Reformation and Desolation, Deo. 22, 1641; Meroz cursed, Feb. 23, 1641 (2); Song of Moses the Servant of God, and the Song of the Lamb. June 15, 1543; Sacred Panegnri.cka, 1644; Sermon of tho Baptizing of Infants, \&H; Right Un- derstanding of the Times, Dec. 30, 1646; Unity of the Saints with Christ the Head, April, 1652. The only systematic work he pubUshed was A Defence of Infant Baptism against John Tombes, London, 1646, 4to, pp. 256. C. A. Briggs.
UARSHMAH, JOSHUA MARSHMAN, JOSHUA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARSHMAN, JOSHUA: English Baptist mis- sionary; b. at Westbury Leigh (21 m. n.w. of Salis- bury), Wiltshire, Apr. 20, 1768; d. at Setampur (12 ra. n. of Calcutta), India, Dec. 5, 1837. He had almost no schooling as a boy, but was a weaver like his father till he was twenty-six yeare old. By diligent and persistent private study he Rtted him- self to take in 1794 the position of master of a school in Bristol, while he studied Latin, Greek, Hebrew, and Syriac at the Bristol Academy. He was led by reading about the labors of W. Carey in India to offer himself for that work, and in May, 1799, he sailed for India together with W. Ward, arriving at Serampur Oct. 13, 1799, and was soon afterward joined there by Carey. He was not allowed to enter British territory, so he and his companions remained in Serampur, which at that time was under Da- nish rule, and established their mission there. Marshman and his wife opened two boarding-schools for European children, which met with great suc- cess and with the income derived from them he maintained his mission. His relations with the Baptist Missionary Society in England soon became much strained and in 1826 he returned to England to settle matters, but not succeeding in his purpose in 1827 the Serampur mission was separated from the others. In 1823 Ward died, and in 1834 when Carey died Marshman was left alone. In 1818 he started a newspaper in Bengali, the Samachar- Durpun or " Mirror of News." Marshman was learned not only in Bengali and other Indian tongues, but had also made a deep study of Chinese. He not only translated parts ot the Bible into several languages, including Bengali, Telinga, and Chinese, but also wrote much original matter. Among his chief works may be mentioned: A Dissertation on the Characters and Sounds of the Chinese Language (Serampur, 1809); and Clavis Sinica (1814). He also translated the works of Confucius (1809) and with Carey the Ramagana (1806). 1. Lif, , ■t of Car, < lliiUiry of Vit , amporr, Miiadnn. 2 valB,, London, 1MB. nhridsed ed.. 1864. New Yorlt, 1S7D; DNB. Etvi. 356-256.
ANDRE MARTIGNY, JOSEPH ALEXANDRE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTIGNY, JOSEPH ALEXANDRE: French Roman Catholic; b. at Sauvemy (8 m. n. of Geneva) Apr. 22, 1808; d. at Bâgé-le- Châtel (60 m. w. of Geneva) Aug. 18, 1880. Or- dained priest in 1832, he served at a village near Belley, and was then archpriest of Bâgé-le-Châtel from 1849 to 1880, also titular canon of the cathe- dral of Belley. He was noted for his archeological researches, the results of which he embodied in his greatest work, the Dictionnaire dea ariiiqaities chre^ tiennea (Paris, 1865; 2d ed., 1877), now undergoing reconstruction as Dictionnaire d*archéologie chrétienne et liturgie (ed. F. Cabrol, 1903 sqq.).
MARTIN MARTIN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTIN: The name of five popes. Martin I: Pope 649-653. He came originally from Tubertinum (Todi) in Umbria. Before as- cending the papal throne as successor to The- odore I., in July, 649, he was apocrisiary, or papal envoy, in Constantinople. His ordination was solemnized without the approval of Emperor Constans II. Further, in Oct., 649, at the Lateran Synod, Martin condemned the Monothelite doc- trine, together with the imperial edict (Typos) for- bidding further controversy on the subject (see MoNOTHEUTEs). The emperor now ordered Olym- pius, exarch of Ravenna, to proceed to Rome and seize the pope; but for some reason or other Olym- pius failed to execute this commission. Probably he hoped for support from the pope in connection with his treasonable designs of founding an Italian kingdom independent of Byzantium. (5n the death of Olympius, the Exarch Kalliopa proceeded with greater energy. In the night of June 17-18, 653, he caused the pope to be seized in the Church of the Lateran, and carried captive to Constantinople. According to the usual acceptation, he was first de- tained a year or so on the Island of Naxos, and reached Constantinople not before Sept. 17, 654. But possibly (cf. E. Michael in ZKT, xvi. 1892, pp. 375-380) he reached there in the autumn of 653. In the face of a brutal arraignment Martin exhibited an extraordinary firmness of character. It ap- pears that he escaped the penalty of quartering, with which he was threatened, through the inter- cession of Patriarch Paul of Constantinople. On Mar. 26, 655 (or 654), Martin was conveyed to Cherson in the Crimea, where he died on Sept. 16 of the same year. The Greek Church venerates him as confessor on Apr. 11, the Church of Rome as martyr on Nov. 12. G. KrCger. Bibliography: The letters are collected in Mansi, ConcUia, X. 786-863, 1170-88, and in MPL, Ixxxvil 119-204, cf. Jaffd, Regeata, i. 230-234. The CommemonUio corum qua . . . (Ida 9unt . . . in . , . Martinum papam, is also in ManBi, x. 863-864. Consult: Liber pontificalU, ed. L. Duchesne, i. 336-340, Paris, 1886, ed. T. Mommsen, in MOH, Oeat, pont. Rom., i (1898), 181-184; J. Langen, OMchiehie der rOmiachen Kirche, vol. i., Bonn, 1886; F. Gregorovius, Hiat of the City of Rome, ii. 144-149, London, 1804i MaoD, Popet, L 386-405; Hefele. ConcUienge- echiekte, iii 212-239, Eng. transl., y. 07 aqq.; Boww; Popes, i. 446-450; MUman, LaHn ChrieUaniiy, il 276- 280; Platina. Popes, I 163-166; DCB, ill 848-857. Martin II. See Mabinus I. Martin IIL See Marintts II. Martin IV.: Pope 1281-1285. Simon de Brion, of a family in Touraine, had aheady held ecclesias- tical positions at Rouen, later at Tours, when he was appointed chancellor of France by Louis IX. in 1260 and created a cardinal by Urban IV. in 1261. As papal legate in France he conducted the negotiations with Charles of Anjou concerning the assumption of the Sicilian crown; and it was due to the influence of Charles that the conclave at Viterbo, after the death of Nicholas III., unani- mously elected Cardinal Simon pope on Feb. 22, 1281. In honor of Saint Martin of Tours, Simon adopted the name of Martin. His pontificate was entirely subservient to the policy of France. After his coronation at Orvieto Mar. 22, 1281 (for the Romans would not receive him within their walls), Martin bestowed on Charles of Anjou the office of a Roman senator, and sought at the same time, with the Sicilian king's assistance, to take posses- sion of the Romagna. The complete dependence of Martin IV. on Charles of Anjou became evident when the pope, in deference to the king's desires and aims toward the sovereignty of Greece, ful- minated excommimication against Emperor Michael Palsologus. In the strife that broke out between the Greek emperor and the king of Sicily, the pope supported the latter to the extent of a six years' loan of the Church tithes accruing from Sardinia. But scarcely had he taken this step when Charles of Anjou 's dominion over Sicily was terminated by the Sicilian vespers, Mar. 31, 1282. The consequent insurrection in Rome led to the deposition of Charles of Anjou as senator, and to the election of a tribime of the republic; and Martin, who sojourned at Orvieto, was obliged to make prompt acknowledgment of these decisions. Martin died Mar. 28, 1285. Carl Mirbt. Biblxoorapht: Sources are: Lee Regiatree de Martin IV., in Bibliothkque dee icolee franpaieee d'Athhiee el de Rome, 2 ser., vol. xvi, Paris, 1901 sqq.; F. F. Bdhmer, Regeata imperii, vi 1, ed. O. Redlich, Innsbruck, 1898; A. Pott- hast, Regeata pontificum Romanorum, pp. 1756-95, Berlin, 1874; Mitteilungen aue dem vatikaniachen Archive, vol. i., ed. F. Kaltenbrunner, vol. ii., ed. O. Redlich, Vienna. 1889-04; Martini Oppavienaia chronicon ponHficum et imperatorum, continuatio . . . , ed. L. Weiland in MGH, Script., XX (1868), 477 sqq.; and the early life to be found in L. A. Muratori, Rerum Italicarum acriptorea, iii. 1, pp. 608-610. 26 vols., Milan, 1723-51. Consult: F. Gre- gorovius, Hiat. of the City of Rome, v. 492-501, London. 1897; H. C. Lea, Hiat. of the Inquiaition, i. 89, 525. ii. 121, 248, iii 190, 196, New York. 1906; Hefele. ConcUienge- achichte, vi. 209 sqq.; Bower, Popea, iii 29-34; Milman, Latin Chriatianity, vi 143-171; PUUna, Popea, ii Hi- ll 4. A full list of scattered references is given in Hauck- Heriog. RE, xii 381. Martin V.: Pope 1417-31. Oddo Colonna was bom probably at Genazzano (26 m. e. of Rome) in 1368. He was educated at the University of Perugia and became prothonotary under Urban VI. In 1405 Innocent VII. made him cardinal deacon of St. George in Velabro. Under Gregory XIII. he left his Roman obedience, took part in the Council of Pisa and became an adherent of John XXIII. On Nov. 11, 1417, at the Council of Constance (q.v.), 918 St he was unanimously elected pope, after the deposi- tion of John XXIII., Gregory XII. and Benedict XIII. Thus the unity of the Church was restored after the forty years' schism (see Schism). Mar- tin was filled with the idea of a papal autocracy, a regeneration of ancient Roman imperialism con- sistently applied to the papacy. There was no means of harmonizing that autocratic ideal with the ideas of the reformers of the coimcil; but Martin had the prudence to avoid an open conflict. He never confessed his adherence to the decrees of the coimcil, and thwarted the plan of a imiform reform of the Church by the innovation of national con- cordats. He left Constance May 16, 1418, but was not able to enter Rome till Sept. 28, 1420. He foimd the States of the Church in the most desolate condition, but owing to his energy and tenacity they were soon restored in their former extent. In conformity with a decree of the Council of Con- stance that a new council be called within five years, he called a council at Pavia in 1423, which was im- mediately transposed to Siena. Here, as at Con- stance, antipapal tendency began to spread, and Martin found it advisable to dissolve the assembly, using the small attendance and the dissension of the powers as a pretext. He intended to satisfy the reformers by a bull issued on May 16, 1425, but the demand for a general council became more urgent. The future council was to be held at Basel; but Martin showed no indulgence, being a decided ODponent of conciliarism. He died suddenly at Rome Feb. 20, 1431. (B. Bess.) Biblioorapht: The early soiiroes for a life are collected in L. A. Muratori, • Rerum Italicarum •crivUrrea, iii. 2, pp. 857-868. 1121-22. 25 vols.. Milan. 1723-51. Martin's bulls are in Mansi. Concilia, vol. xxviii. Consult A. von Reumont, OeBchichte der Stadt Rom, ii. 1162 sqq.. iii. 56 sqq., Beiiin. 1868-70; B. Jungmann, Diuertaiionet 90- lectcB, vol. vi.. Regensburg. 1886; Funk, in TQ, Ixx (1888), 451-465; F. Bemet, in Reviie de9 qtieationa hiatorigtiea, U (1892). 373-423; H. C. Lea. Hi»t. of the InquitiHon of the Middle Agee, passim, vols, i.-iii.. New York. 1906; Pastor, Popes, i. 208-282; Oreighton. Papacy, ii- 100-163; Bower, Popes, iii. 201-218; Milman, Latin Christianity, vii. 513-535; Platina. Popes, ii. 200-213; and much of the literature under (}onstance. Council or. A list of scattered notices may be consulted in Hauok-Heriog, RE, xiL 382-383.
MARTIN OF BRAG A MARTIN OF BRAGA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTIN OF BRAGA: Spanish bishop of the sixth century; b. in Pannonia about 510; d. about 580. Knowledge of his life is based on a few scat- tered notices in his own works and in those of his contemporaries Gregory of Tours and Venantius Fortunatus, with a little help from Isidore of Se- ville. He became a monk, acquired, for his time, great learning, especially in Greek, and visited the East, including the Holy Land. Falling in with some Spanish pilgrims, he was determined by them to go to Galicia and devote himself to the conver- sion of the partly Arian, partly half-pagan popula- tion. He arrived in Spain about 550 and was soon made a bishop, according to Gregory, although he may have spent some time in founding monasteries, especially that of Dumio, over which he presided as abbot and later as bishop. In the latter capacity he was present at the Synod of Braga in May, 561. Later he became archbishop of Braga or Bracara, and presided as such over the second (incorrectly called third) synod there in 572. As a missionary, an ecclesiastical organizer, and an intermediary of Christian culture between East and West, he was one of the most remarkable and influential men of the latter half of the sixth century. The position which he held is evidenced not only by the work done by him in the two synods of Bracara, but by the frequent requests of King Miro for his counsel and by the visits of Spanish and foreign bishops for the same end. Martin's most important work is his CoUectio orir erUalium canonum sive Capiiula Martini (Mansi, Concilia f ix. 845 sqq.), a systematic arrangement of Eastern (and a few Western) canons, with a view to giving a more correct and intelligible version of the Greek canons, as a guide to the legislation of his own day and country. The Epistola ad Boni" fatium de trina mersiane (CoUectio maxima concU- iorum HispanioB, ii. 506, Rome, 1693) answers the question of a Spanish bishop whether baptism was administered in his province with not only a three- fold immersion but a threefold repetition of the formula, which would seem to carry a suspicion of Arianism, by saying that the formula was used only once, but asserting the orthodoxy of the three- fold immersion. The small treatise De pascka (Gal- landi, Bibliotheca veterum patrum^ xii. 287 sqq., 14 vols., Venice, 1765-81) defends the practise of ma- king Easter a movable feast, and mentions it as an old custom of the Gallican Church to celebrate it on Mar. 25, the traditional date of the actual resur- rection. Ethical treatises extant include Formtda vitcB honestcBf De differerUiia quatuor virttUum and De ira (all in Gallandi, xii. ut sup.), of which the first two enter the province of philosophic morality, with Seneca for their model; in fact, they have been more than once printed as works of Seneca. The Formtda gives a picture of the Christian life, adapted especially for the laity, on the moderate lines of the four cardinal virtues. His ascetic works include a collection of SerUeniice patrum ^gyptiorum {MPL, Ixxiv. 381 sqq.), translated by Martin from the Greek, and a similar compilation from the old mo- nastic traditions of the Egyptian desert, Verba aeniorum (MPL, Ixxiii. 1025 sqq.). Mention must also be made of a sermon, De corrections rustieorum (MPLj Ixxii. 21-52; first complete ed. by Caspari, ut inf.), which has considerable historical interest. It was written to correct the tendency of the rural population to pagan superstitions. The gods of the hep.then, he says, are but demons, of whom there are a number in rivers, and fountains, and for- ests, venerated by ignorant rustics, who also em- ploy superstitious practises like augury and magic. God sent his Son " to lead them back from the error of the devil to the worship of the true God; and after he had taught, he was pleased to die for the human race." The Christian is to win the king- dom of God by good works; otherwise he will fall into damnation by evil works. In baptism he has renounced the devil and promised faith in God. Superstition is the abandonment of this faith and the breach of this compact. No sign is permit- ted to the Christian except the sign of the cross, no incantation except the creed and the Lord's Prayer. No one should doubt the mercy of God, but do penance; and true penanoe is " that a maa Ihrtlii «f looM THE NEW fiCHAPP-HERZOG shall do DO more the evils that he has dooe, but seek remisBJoQ of hia past ama." There are also interesting renmrka on bapttsm and its ceremonies, and on tlie observance of Sunday. Gregory men- tions veDSea written by this Martin on hia nameaake of Toura, which are extant in the three abort poet- ical iuKCriptiona published by Sinnond, Migne, and □there. (R. Sgedgrg}. Bibliography; C. P. Casnari. Marlin van Bracomt Schrift Dt comctinne nalUorum. CliruiliaDia, 1B83: ASB. Sluch, iii. 86-90; P. B. Gwns. Kirc/umgctrhichU Don Spanitn, IL 471 aql'. Itegenaburti. 1ST4: O. B&rdanbewer. FaOola- Bit, pp. fi7S tm., Freibunt, 1»0I; Ccillier. .lutouri •acrit, s. 360-352. we, 8S&-8S6, Bei-gD2; DCB. iii. S45-«4S.
MARTIH OF TOUBS, SAINT MARTIN OF TOURS, SAINT

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTIN OF TOURS, SAINT: Bishop of Tours; b. at Saburia (perhaps the modern Silrvdr in Hun- gary, SO EQ. a. of Vienna) \a 316 or 317; d. at Candes in Gaul Nov. 11 of one of the years 397-401. He came of a Roman family of pagan faith, and was educated at Pavia; he early came under the influ- ence of Christianity, was a catechumen at ten years of age, and was baptized at eighteen. From hia fifteenth to his twentieth year he aerved aa a aol- dier in Gaul. Within a few years after leaving miLtary service, Martin went to Hilary of Poitiers and was made an exorcist. Soon after, on return- ing homo, be suffered acourging at the hands of the Ariai^a on account of his orthodoxy and thus gained the title of coTifeasor. Hia orthodoxy reaujled later (356) in his expulsion from Milan. After living OS a hermit for a time, he returned to Hilary in Gaul, and about 370 gathered a company of monks near Poiticra, probably the first monastic establishment of the West. In 371 or 372, he waa elected bishop of Tours, and established a second convent at what is now Marmoutier, where he built a church and gathered eighty monka around him. Martin acquired renown aa a miracle- worker, and his lealous Evangehcal activity met great aucccsa in spreading tho Chriatian faith into the surround- ing country. On the occasion of an interview about 384 with the Emperor Maxiraus, Martin interceded unsuc- ceaafuUy in behalf of the followers of Priacillian (q.v.), not out of sympathy with them but because ot his strong sense of justice. Martin was pro- fessedly a man of practical Ufe and held a simple faith resting upon trinitarian symbolism, the wor- ship of relics and the revelations of good and evil spirits. While his predilections for monastic aa- ceticism blinded him to the requirements of the commonly accepted rules of life, he at the same time advocated a goxpel of service, in sharp con- trast with the quiet life of contemplation followed by the Oriental hermits. As the molder of the popular faith of the Prankish people, Martin has become their patron saint and has made Tours o, popular goal of pilgrimage. To his name waa given a prominent place in the saint worship of the Middle Ages and it entered largely into the epic and legend- ary lore of both the French and the German lan- guage. [The most famous atory concerning him is that while yet a catechumen and a young soldier he waa stationed at Amiens, and there on an uncom- monly severe day of midwinter encountered a poor man without clothes. Martin himself bad oa only his single mihtary cloak and his arms. He cut hia cloak in two with his sword and gave half to the beggar. In recognition of this deed Christ appeared to him the next night clad in the halt cloak he had given, and he heard Christ say to the attendant angels, " Martin gave me this cloakl "] (C. A. Bebnodlu.) Bibliographyiv: The early lila by Sulpioius Sevenu. ed. Halm, is in CBEL. vol. i.; s Mft account, dating from nbout 47S *.D., is vol. xvi. ot CSEL. and ia kIm in MGH. Aact. ant., iv. I (1881), 293-370; the worlUmt over of tboe by Gregory.ot Toura. ed. B. Krasoh. ii in MGH., SnipL rer. Mcror.. i (1885), BS4-W2. A luve list of literntuni is given in Potlhut, Wcoamser, pp. 1159-61. ■ Touri. SchiShsosmi, pay, UUlair, dt S. Martin . . 1855: J. U. Retnkeni, Marlin F. Chmonird, Sainl itartin ct *an monottfn de Liguei, Poilietii. 1873; J. Rabory, VU de S. Martin, apStrt da Gaula. Ablwville, IS94; the liven by A- Lecoy de la Muche. Psris, 1895, and H. Bw, ib., 1897; DCB. iit 838- 84G. Tn the« UH to t>e added the oDticei in J. H. New- mao. Hittarial Skffcha. vol. iii.. "Unrtin and Man- mud," 186-210, Lundon, 1873; A. Uhrienan. Studt* lur la dvHitaUan Jrantait, vol L, Parit, 1899; and C. A. Bei- nuulli, Dir Htiliux' d'r iltrovinBer. TQbingen, 1900: abo J. G. BuUioC and F. ThioUier, La Miuian it It adU dt S. Marlin d'apria la ligtnda populairti, Paris. 1892.
BIARTIN, WILLIAM ALEXANDER PARSONS MARTIN, WILLIAM ALEXANDER PARSONS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTIN, WILLIAM ALEXANDER PARSONS: Presbyterian; b. at Livonia, Ind., Apr. 10, 1827. He was educated at Indiana State University (B.A., 1846) and the Theological Seminary at New Al- bany, Ind., from which he was graduated in 1849. In 1850 he went to China, where he was a mission- ary at Ning-po (1850-59) and Peking (1863-67). He was captured by Chinese pirates in 1855. In 1858 he acted as interpreter to the United States minister, William B. Reed, in negotiating the treaty of Tientsin, and in the following year accompanied John E. Ward, United States minister, to Peking and Yeddo, Japan. In 1866 he also visited the colony of Chinese Jews at Ho-nan. From 1867 to 1894 he was president and professor of interna- tional law in Tung Wen College, Peking, and dur- ing this period was adviser in international law to the Chinese government in several disputes, nota- bly in the conflict with France in 1884-85. He was president of the Imperial University of China from 1897 to 1902 and was in Peking during the siege of the city by the foreign allies (1900). From 1902 to 1905 he was president of the University of Wu-chang, and since 1905 has been engaged in literary work. Theologically he is progressively orthodox. In addition to numerous independent works in Chinese and Chinese translations of stan- dard works on international law, his standard work on Christian apologetics, in Chinese, and besides his activity as editor of the Chinese ** Peking Scien- tific Magazine" (1875-78) and "Science Monthly" (1897-98), he has written: The Chinese: Their Edur cation, Philosophy , and Letters (London, 1881) { Essays on the History^ Philosophy, and Religion of the Chinese (Shanghai, 1894); Chinese Legends and other Poems (1894); A Cycle of Cathay; or, China South and North, with personal Reminiscences (Chi- cago, 1896); The Lore of Cathay; or. Intellect of China (1901); The Analytical Reader: A short Method for Learning to Read and Write Chinese (Shanghai, 1897); The Siege in Peking (Chicago, 1900); and Awakening of China (New York, 1907). He has likewise contributed extensively on Chinese subjects to various learned and literary periodicals.
MARTINMAS MARTINMAS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTINMAS: A festival celebrated on Nov. 11, in honor of St. Martin of Tours. In Germany the festival is called Martinalia. In England and Scot- land in olden days a cow or ox fattened to be killed about Martinmas was called a " mart."
MARTYN, HENRT MARTYN, HENRY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTYN, HENRY: English missionary; b. at Truro (10 m. n.e. of Falmouth), Cornwall, Feb. 18, 1781; d. at Tokat (58 m. n.w. of Sivas), Asia Minor, Oct. 16, 1812. His father, who had been a miner, rose to a place of comparative ease as chief clerk in a store, and was able to send his son to the grammar-school, which he attended from 1788 till 1797, when he entered St. John's College, Cambridge (B.A., 1801; M.A., 1804; B.D., 1805), and became senior wrangler in 1801. In 1802 he was chosen fellow of St. John's College, taking the first prize in Latin prose composition. His college subse- quently elected him twice public examiner. In 1802 Martyn formed the resolution of devoting his life to missionary labors. To this state of mind he had been brought, in part, by the perusal of the biog- raphy and diary of David Brainerd. He offered himself to the Society for Missions to Africa and the East; but, suffering from pecuniary losses which gave him some anxiety about the support of a sister, he ultimately went to India as a chaplain of the East India Company. He had served from 1803 as the curate of Charles Simeon at Cambridge; and July 17, 1805, he sailed for his new home. He arrived at Calcutta in April, 1806. The impression made upon his mind by idolatiy was most painful. He wrote of seeing natives bow before a hideous image: ** I shivered as if standing, as it were, in the neighborhood of hell." He did not go to his station, Dinapur, till October, remaining in the mean time at Calcutta. His tolerant Christian spirit was displayed in the cordial friendship which sprang up between himself and the Serampore missionaries. In 1806 Carey wrote, ** A young clergyman, Mr. Martyn, is lately arrived, who is possessed of a truly missionary spirit. . • . We take sweet counsel together, and go to the house of God as friends " (Marshman's Life of Carey, i. p. 246). In Apr., 1809, Martyn was transferred to Cawnpur. In addition to his labors among the soldiers and Eng- lish residents, he preached to the natives, and pre- pared translations in the vernacular. Endowed with rare linguistic talents, he speedily became fluent in the Hindustani; and his preaching was so attractive that, at the time failing health obliged him to quit Cawnpur, he had as many as eight hundred in his audiences. Martyn's most permanent influence was exerted through his translations. He had by Feb. 24, 1807, completed a translation of a part of the Book of Common Prayer into the vernacular (Calcutta, 1814), and in March, 1808, he completed a Hindu- stani version of the New Testament (Serampore, 1814). At the ui^ency of his friends, he also imder- took the supervision of a Persian version of the New Testament. In this task he was less successful, and his version was referred back to him for revision. Never strong, his health gave way in 1810; so that he determined to take a trip to England in the hope of restoring it, when the rejection of his Persian version induced him to take a journey to Persia, for recreation and the revision of the version. Starting HMrtvB Kuulhu THE NEW SCHATP-HERZOO in Jan., ISll, Martyn reached Shirai, where he not only finiahed the Persiaji New Teatameat (St. Peteraburg, 1815; revision, Calcutta, 1816), but nmde a Persian version of the Psolma (London, 1824). His learning and skill in disputing with the Mohanuaedans awakened a sensation in the city and aroused the profcssorof Mohammedan law toengagc iaapublic dispute with him. The profeasor followed the discussion up with a tract in defense of Moham- medanism, to which Martyn replied in defense of Christianity. Anxious to present a copy of the New Testament to the Shah of Persia, Martyn directed his steps to Tabriz to secure a letter of iatroduclion from the British minister, Sir Gore Ouscley. On this journey his body was rocked with fever and chills, and he barely escaped with his life. In Tabrix he likewise engaged in aniniat«d discussion with the Mohammedaii-s, risking his life by the fear- less confession of Christ as the Son oE God. He failed to put his Testament into the hands of the Persian monarch, but left it with Sir Gore, who did it for him, and afterward saw it through the press. Martyn then turned his horse's head toward Con- stantinople, fifteen himdred tniles away. Fever and ague were racking his system, but with unflag- ging patience the sufferer pushed on. He got no further than Tokat. His body rests in the Armenian cemetery there. In addition to the translations mentioned above there have appeared: SennoTtg of //enryMariyn{Catcutta, 1822); Controversial Tracts on Mohammedanism and Christianity (Cambridge, 1824); aiid his Journals and Ldters (ed, S. Wilbcr- force, 2 vols., London, 1837). D. S. Scbaff. Bibliography: Liveg hHYe been nrittnn by J. Sargent (Life and Utlrri). Luoilon, ISIS, new ed., 188fi; Mary Seeby (in IjHer BvanBclical FaOirra). ib. IBTB; C. D. BflU, ib. 1880; J. Puce. New Yotk. 1S90; G. Smith, London, 1892.
MARTYR, WILLIAM CAHLOS MARTYR, WILLIAM CARLOS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTYR, WILLIAM CARLOS: Presbyterian; b. in New York City Dec. 15, 1841. He wa.s edu- cated at Union Theological Seminary, from which he was graduated in 1869. lie was ordained to the ministry of his denomination in the same year, and held successive pastorates at the Pilgrim Church, St. Louis, Mo. {18B9-71), Portsmouth, N. H. (1871- 1876), Thirty-fourth Street Reformed Dutch Church, New York City (1876-83); Bloomingdale Reformed Butch Church, New York City (1883-90); First Reformed Dutch Church, Newark, N. J. (1890-92); and Sixth Presbyterian Church, Chicago, 111. (1892- 1894). Since 1894 he has been engaged in literature and lecturing, and from 1897 to 1903 was director of the Abbey Press, New York City. In addition to editing The American Reformers Seriu (New York, 1890-96), he has written John Milton (New York, 1866); Life of Martin iMher OSm); History of the English Puritans (1867); Hintory of the Huffuenots (18681; The Dutch Re/ormalion (I85S); The Pilgrim Father! of New England (1870) ; WendeU PhiUips (1890); WiUiam E. Dodge (1891); John B. Gough, the Apostle of Cold Water (1893); Christian Citizenskip (1897); and Sour Saints and Sioeel Sinners (1898).
MARTYRS AHD COHFESSORS MARTYRS AND CONFESSORS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MARTYRS AND CONFESSORS: Names applied in the early Church to those who gave up their lives for their Christian faith, or underwent great suffer- ings short of death for the same cause. The name " martyr "(Gk. martyr, " witness" ) is applied in the New Testament both to those who were eye-wit- nessM of the life and resurrection of Jesus and to those who sealed their testimony with their blood (Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13, xvii. 6, ct. vi. 9, me. 4). Such witnesses under persecution were never lack- ing from the time of the stoning of Stephen and the slaying of James; and down to the middle of the third century there was not a decade, scarcely a year, without its martyrs. Throughout the early literature runs the scarlet thread; numerous pas- sages might be cited to show how joyfully the dis- ciples met their death, although it was expressly forbidden to seek it. The full account of the martyrs of Lyons given in Eusebius (ffis(. ecci., V., i.-iii.) shows the attitude of the Church. God gives the martyrs strength, suffers in them, and by them overcomes the adversary; in them, the athletes of Christ and of his beauteous bride, is a sweet savor as of ointment. As a proof of their humility it is mentioned that they did not claim the name of martyrs, but called themselves only confessors, still needing the grace of perfection. The right of inter- cession for sinnerB ia thus early recognized, here and elsewhere (cf. Eusebius, Hist, eccl., V., xviii. 7; Tertullian, Ad martyres, i.). TertuUian speaks of it as their prerogative to attain glorification imme- diately after death. The number of the martyrs has been disputed; Dodwell was the first to work out a smaller total than that previously deduced from the legends and the early acts (see Act*. Mahtyhdm). By degrees the treatment of ihose who had fallen away under the fear ot torture became an urgent question (see Lapheo), with which was connected that of the intercessory privilege of the confessors; Cyprian's letters {Epist,, xv. 22, ii. 23, 27) show how strongly this claim was urged, and he was obliged to oppose the extension ot the practise. The origin of the Donatbt schism was the uncompromising procedure of Ciccilian against the party which exaggerated the duty of suffering martyrdom and the honor paid to the Carthaginian martyrs. Evi- dences begin to appear of superstitious veneration paid to the mariyrs (Optatus, i. 16; Eusebius, Hiat eccl., VIII., vi.); the possession of their relics was a cause of eager rivalry, and these assumed the position almost of tutelary deities in the eyes even ot such men as Basil and Gregory Nazianzen, Martyrdom was from the beginning designated as a " baptism of blood," supplying the place ot that by water, and even, according to Cyprian (.4d Fortunatum,iv.), " greater in grace, more exalted in power, more precious in honor." On the annivei^ saries of the martyrs' deaths, considered as their birthdays into a higher life, special oblations were brought as early as TertuUion'a day (De corona, RELIOIOm ENCYCLOMDU *«^« them and of (.heir II., XX.; 1 the later iii.), and Cyprian prascribes the Bpecial observ- ances to be practised (Efiist., xii. 2, xxxiz. 3). WTien, with the proclamation of Chrbtianity as the Stat« religion, martyrdom became a thing of the past, and st the some time the influence of pagan BUperetition waa felt in the Church, the honor paid to the martyrs increased greatly. PrndentJus and FortunatUB celebrated their deedzt in verse; altars were erected over their places of sepulture, and great confidence was placed j ■ ■ ■ nith God — though even now a Jovitiian to protest against exaggerated devotion ti a Vigilantiua to oppose the veneratioi relics (Jerome, Advergua Jovtniamim, Adftrsus Vigiiantium, i.). Martyrs were not lacking, however, ages of the Church. In Persia, Armenia, Arabia, and elsewhere the Christians were the objects of pagan persecution shortly after Constantine's con- version, and later in other parts of the world they suffered at the hands of the Arian Germans and of the followers of Mohammed, while the dominant Church learned to apply the same treatment to heretics. The Donatists had already used this as a proof that the Catholic was not the true Church. The persecuting spirit pervades the Middle Ages and marks with blood the story of the Woidensea, the Btrict Franciscans, the Apostolic Brethren, the Lollajds, and the disciples of the martyred Hubs. After the Reformation Luther soon had occasion to write hjTnna in celebration of its martST^, and the Anabaptists liave left us a number of lh<!ir9 to attest the joy with which they endured persecution. The Reformed Church of France was a martyr-church. In the mission fields, especially in Japan and China, many Christians of the Roman obedience sealed their testimony with their blood; and on the Dvangclical side the blood of the martyrs has proved, in Tertullian's phrase, " the seed of the Church " in Madagascar and more recently in Uganda, China, and elsewhere. The Evangelical church canonizes no martyrs, and believes it to be as great a thing to live for Christ as to die for him; but it, too, cherishes the examples of those who have been, in the hterol sense, " faithful unto death." (N. Bonwbibck.) BiBLiDompnT: QuilB edenunla li(*ra(un' ii given under Acta Marttbum. Actt* Banctordh; fl-HNm, and tue VcKKBATioH or S*iNTs. TbB cuiianig BQcl t*r]y liler«- lure are vsll indicated in Binabam. On'iri'iu. XIII,, iii. 2-3. it S, XIV., iii. 14. XVI.. Ui. 4, XVIlt. iv, 10, XX,. vii. Consult lurlhcr; AnaUda BoUandiana, Pbrb, Brug- Kl*. ud GenevB. IS82 Kiq.: Gua, in ZHT, 18S0; H. Dclehave, L'AmfJiilMMrt FlacUn el M mtironi dam la Uzta hatpno-ajAuputi, Bnuwls. ISST; E. Amdlineau, La Ada da martara dt Viglia copit, Paria. 1900; H. Acti^lin, ID Abhandtu7»imdr'OoUirm'rOatUiilu4t. 1000; F.Kattcn- biuch, in ZNTW. iv {1003), HI iqq.: F. Augur, in TU. iivtti (190S); A, Linnenmayer, Dit Bctamp/ana dci Chriitcnluma dutch den romixJien Stool, Munich, 1905. MAHTYHS, THE FORTY! Forty soldiers who Buffered martyrdom at Sebaate {the modern Sivas, 165 m. s.w. of Trebizond) in the beginning of the Licinian persecution, probably in 320. Remaining true to their faith, as Is stated by Basil the Great, Ephraem, Gregory of Nyssa, and Gaudentius of Brescia, they were exposed naked on the ice through- out a night in the coldest winter. All Ixosa to death except one who recanted, and he died from a warm bath given him to counteract the effects of his exposure. When the pagan guard learned of this, he became a convert to Christianity, and suffered martyrdom by freezing, thus completing the num- ber forty. The corpses were burned and the ashca thrown into the water. The bter Ada (ASB., Mar., ii. 1&-21) records the names of the forty martyrs and gives the details of their sufferings with many embellishments, but the essential portion of the account, including the names, is undoubtedly historically true. Their day is appointed for Mar. 9 or 10. (O, ZflcKLEst.) HARUTEAS, ma-rQ'thits: The name of two bishops. 1. Bishop of Maipherkat; d. about 420. Maruthas was sent twice by the Emperor Theo- dosius II. as ambassador to Jezdegerd I. Ebedjesu mentions among his works a book on martyrdoms, church poetry, and a translation of the canons of Niciea (on which cf, Synodiam Orientale, ed. J. B, Chabot, Paris, 1903, p, 259) and has his name among the members of that synod. The " Mar- tyrs' Anthem " has been translated by Maclean (Eagt Sifrian DaHy Offices, London, 1894, pp. 12-23). His most important work, if it be his, is the " History of the Persian Martyrs " under Sapor II., Jezdegerd I., and perhaps Behnam V., 341-379 a.d. (ed. 8. E. Asseinani, Acta Sandomm Martynim, Rome, 1748; and by P. Bedjan, Ada Martyrum et SancUrmm, ii., Paris, 1891, 67-396. Germ, tranal. P, P. Zingerle, MonumerUa SipTaca, vol. i., Innsbruck, 1S36). Kmosko doubts whether the work is his; he ascribes to him only Uie Greek translation, which was used already by Sozomen (Hist, reel., II., ix.-xiii.; Eng. transl., NPNF. 2 ser., ii, 204-267) for the lives of Simeon bar Sabae, Pusai (Pusices), Tarbula and Akebsima (Acepsimas). There are also ascribed to him the " Acta of the Council of Seleucia " of the year 410 (ed. J. I^my, Louvain, 1868). His com- memoration is on the sixth Friday of Moses. His brother Julian is said to have surrounded with a wall the cloister of Mar Babai on Mount Izla, which contained one thousand monks. G. Nebtlb. BiBLi{HiB,i>'SI: SauroBS Brs SocraUs. HUt. nxl.. vi. IS. vii. 8, Eng. lian>!., NP\F. 2 »r.. iL H8-l*8, 16S-167; 8o- lODien, Hill. eeel.. viii. 16. Eng. truut,, NPNF. 2 ear., ii. 400; Bu- HebrsiH, Chnmican, il. iS. Coniull: 1. B. Aiseinuii. BibtioOitai aritntalit. ii, 45, 3 voIb.. Rams. 1710- 1728; W. Wright, Short Hi*!, o/ Si/rvu LUtrature, p. 44, Loodon, ISM; R, Duvsl. La LitUmturt ivrioffue. Paria, 1800. 2d ed., pp. 132-133, 428: A. Hamack. in TU, t^x.. pan 2, 1806. a. Bishop of Takrit; d, 649. He is not to be confounded with Maruthas of Maipherkat (ut sup.). He was bom in the diocese of Beth Nuhadre, Persia, studied for some time at Edessa, became bishop of Takrit and the first niaphrian, or primate, of the Jacobites (see Jacobites). His life has been written by his successor Dencha. He composed a liturgy (in the Afigsoie of the Maroniles, Rome, 1594, p. 172; E. Renaudot, LHur^arvm OrierUaliinn coi- hciio, ii., Paris, 1716, 261); o commentary on the Gospels (two extracts in G. M5singer, Monvmenia Syriaea, ii., Innsbruck, 1878, 32), homilies and hymns. E. Nestle, BfRijoanArHT: Coruult the litenlun under 1, noting la Wright, p. 137. ud in Diml, p, 374.
MASON, FRANCIS MASON, FRANCIS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MASON, FRANCIS: Baptist missionary; b. at York, England, Apr. 2, 1799; d. at Rangoon, Burma, Mar. 3, 1874. He was educated at home by a retired naval officer and in 1818 came to the United States, where he worked at the shoemaker's trade until 1824. In 1827 he entered the Newton Theological Seminary and in 1830 was sent to Burma by the Baptist Missionary Union. There he became the successor of G. D. Boardman in his work among the Karens. He learned not only the Karen language in all its dialects, but also many other Eastern tongues. He translated the Bible into two of the Karen dialects, the New Testament into a third, also several religious works, and edited the Morning Star^ a Karen monthly. He wrote: The Karens or Memoir of Ko Thah-Byu (Tavoy, 1842); Synopsis of the Grammar of the Karen Lan- ffitage (1846); Natural Productions of Burmah (Mauhnain, 1850); Flora Burmanica (Tavoy, 1851); Tenasserim, or the Fauna, Flora, Minerals, and Nations of British Burmah and Pegu (1852; 2d edition, enlarged, Rangoon, 1860); Pali Grammar (Toungoo, 1868); and Story of a Working Man's Life (an autobiography; New York, 1870); he also translated Kachchayano's Pali Grammar (Calcutta, 1848).
MASON, JOHN MITCHELL MASON, JOHN MITCHELL

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MASON, JOHN MITCHELL: Associate Re- formed divine and educator; b. in New York Mar. 19, 1770; d. there Dec. 26, 1829. He was graduated from Columbia College in 1789; studied theology with his father for two years, then went to Edinburgh for further study in 1791; was pastor of the Cedar St. Church, New York (his father's), 1793-1810; founded a new church, subsequently located in Murray St., New York, 1810; was provost of Columbia College, 1811-16; president of Dickin- son College, Carlisle, Pa., 1821-24. In 1822 he transferred his ecclesiastical relations to the Presby- terian Church. He became eminent in his denominar tion through his services to the cause of education of the ministry and by his advocacy of a more fre- quent communion service. In the latter connection his pamphlet Letters on Frequent Communion (New York, 1798) was noteworthy; in the former his services in calling the attention of his coworkers to the necessity of providing a supply of ministers educated in America for the American churches led to his being appointed in 1802 on a commission to draft a plan for a theological seminary, and finally to his appointment as first professor of the institution in 1804. It was opened, apparently in his home in New York city, November 1, 1805. The course of study lasted five years. He established The Christianas Magazine in 1807 and himself wrote most of what appeared in its pages, the substance being a friendly controversy with Bishop Hobart on episcopacy. He was also one of the founders of the American Bible Society. Dr. Mason was eminent as a preacher, speaking without notes and with great eloquence; and he was often called upon as orator on national and patriotic occasions. His writings were collected by his son Ebenezer (4 vols., New York, 1832, new ed. enlarged, 1849). Birlioorapht: J. Van V«cht«n, Memoirs of John MiUheU ^fo^wn, 2 vols.. Now York, 1856; W. B. Sprague, Annala of the American PulpU, iv. 1-26, ib. 1868.
THE NEW SCHAFF-HERZOG 826 MASON, LOWELL MASON, LOWELL

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MASON, LOWELL: Musical composer and edu- cator; b. in Medfield, Mass., Jan. 8, 1792; d. in Orange, N. J., Aug. 11, 1872. He early developed a remarkable talent in musical matters, and in 1812 began to give public instruction in that branch in Savannah, Ga.; in 1827 he removed to Boston, Mass., whence his activities spread through aU New Eng- land, exciting popular interest and educating taste for music. By his instrumentality the Boston Academy of Music was established, and an enormous impetus given to musical education. In 1837 he visited Europe for purposes of study. He was especially devoted to the bettering of the musical services of the churches, and to that end paid atten- tion to the training of church choirs. He was inde- fatigable also in the preparation of handbooks and manuals for use in churches, Sunday-schools and singing-classes. His collections, from his first (Boston Handel and Haydn Society^a Collection of Church Music, Boston, 1821) to his last {The Song Oarden, 1866), number more than forty. He also composed many hymn tunes which are still in use. In 1856 the University of the City of New York made him a ** doctor in music,'' the first degree of the kind given in the United States. Bxbuoorapht: American Annual EnevdopcBdia^ xii. 495- 600, New York, 1873 (contains a very full lijst of Mason's works); G. Grove, Dictionary of Mttsic and Muaician§, ii. 225. London. 1880; J. D. Champlin and W. F. Apthorp, Cyclopedia ofMvutxc and Musician*, ii. 532-533, New York, 1803. MASORAH, mOs'o-ra: The Jewish tradition regarding the textual readings of the Pentateuch in particular and of the Old Testament in general, meaning by this the consonantal text. Content After the return from the Exile the of the Law of Moses was the central point of Masorah* the common life of the people, and an absorbing care for the textual basis was the natural consequence. Instruction in the Law began in early youth, and in the synagogues pas- sages were read from this part of Scripture, to which there came to be added also selections from the prophets. Very early there were formulated exact directions regarding the copying of the Scriptures, especially for the making of synagogue rolls. Soon there were devised also checks in order to control in the matter of accuracy. The verses, words, and letters of the entire Old Testament and also of parts of it were coimted, and note was taken of the number of times single words occurred in the whole or in parts of the volume. Thus the tradition that there are in the Old Testament 23,203 verses is as old as the persecution under Hadrian. Moreover, peculiarities were noted and arranged in groups, as in cases where marginal readings were preferred (see Keri and Kethibh). In cases where these singularities were supposed to have particular significance, note was made of them so that omission or change became difficult or impossible, and some- times an explanation of the phenomenon was given. Examples of these are the suspended " nun " in the name " Manasseh,'' Judges xviii. 30, and the two methods (scripiio plena and defediva) of s|>elling the proper name Ephron in Gen. xxiii. 16, of which fanciful explanations were given. There is no indication in the Talmuds or in the older Midrashim that materials of this sort were committed to writing, but it is presumed that they were transmitted orally, at least until the seventh century. The division of the Law into paragraphs (in Palestine so as to be read through in three years, in Babylonia in one year) and into Oral Trans- verses was known at this early date, mission; indicated by the 290 open and 379 Textual closed sections. It appears that after Variations, the pronunciation lumded down by tradition was indicated in the manu- scripts, the notes of peculiarities and the results of the examination of the text b^an to be written on the maigin of the manuscripts or at the end of the volume or of the individual books, sometimes, how- ever, on separate manuscripts. The different de- velopment which Judaism underwent at home and abroad (in Palestine and Babylonia) produced va- riations and diversities in the texts, and thus a diversity of " authority " has been produced. Con- cerning these the Masorah is not whoUy consistent, and the older manuscripts show great varieties of reading. The general agreement amongVnost codices of the Old Testament is due to a leveling process under the influence of the Masoretes. The origin of the three systems of punctuation known to exist has not with certainty been discovered. Masoretic studies were long prosecuted in Ti- berias, a fact that is registered in marginal refer- ences on the codices to the '' men of Tiberias," where in particular the family of Aaron ben Moses ben Asher was active from the end of the eighth century; and the Masoretic punctuation must have taken shape there, at least in its essentials. Many names of noted Masoretes are known, Eminent among them the contemporary of Masoretes Aaron ben Moses ben Asher, Moses and Texts, ben David ben Naphthali, and some- thing more than the name of Moses Mo^^eh and Rabbi Pin^ias. A manuscript of singular notoriety is also known by name — ^the Ma^azora rabba, cited as early as Ben Naphthali; and of other codices citations are extant which are still of value. The points in which Ben Naphthali differed from Ben Asher are preserved in lists and in numerous maiginal notes. But the most celebrated of all the Masoretes is Aaron ben Moses ben Asher (flourished at Tiberias early in the tenth century), who is quoted as the highest authority upon the text; and it has been claimed that a codex from his hand, supplied with punctuation and Masorah, is extant at Aleppo. Modem textual criticism seeks particu- larly to employ the means left by Aaron ben Asher. After him come the so-called Nakdanim or punc- tuators, eminent among whom are Moses, Samson (both called Nakdan), and Jekuthiel ben Judah ha-Kohcn. Later copyists and grammarians cite them and their model codices with frequency. Of the Masoretic handbooks named and cited since the middle of the twelfth century the most important is that called Oklah weoklah {Ochlah weochlah), though an older work is the tract Sopherim. Men- tion should also be made of the codices from Yemen which combine grammar with Masorah. Jacob ben Hsyyim ibn Adonijah undertook to d87 collect and arrange all the material accessible to him in manuscripts, the complexity of which task only the most expert can appreciate. Masorah The results are employed in the second Parva, of Daniel Bomberg's Bibles (4 vols., Magna, and Venice, 1524-25), and the text of the Maiginalis. Masorah given there, practically repro- duced as it is in the later rabbinic Bibles, must in spite of its incompleteness and gaps be considered the textua receptua of the Masorah. The Masorah is distinguished into Masorah parva and magna (together called Masorah marginalis). In rabbinic Bibles text and Targum are printed in parallel colunms, between which stands the Masorah parva, which concerns the Keri and gives the niun- ber of occurrences of a form. Above and below the text stands the Masorah magna, which contains references to the parva and general matters such as concordances of words which have certain peculi- arities. At the end of the fourth volume is the Masorah finalis, a kind of lexicon in alphabetical order containing also references to the Masorah marginalis and statements of differences between Ben Asher and Ben Naphthali and between Oriental and Occidental readings. This is practically the arrangement of the manuscripts, though there are differences both of content and of order. That the eastern or Babylonian Jews differed in their text from the western or Palestinian Jews was known in early times only through Jacob ben IJayyim's list of 216 variants. It is now known that variations exist in the Pentateuch and concern vowels and accents, that they show differences from the Masor- etic tradition, and that the Orientals were not in entire agreement with each other. See Bible Text, I., 1-2. (H. L. Strack.) Biblxoorapht: References to the earlier literature are given in Hauck-Hersog, RE, xii. 303 sqq. On the intro- duction to the Masorah the best single work is C. D. Ginsburg, Introduction to the M{U9oretieo<!ritical Edition of the Hebrew Bible, pp. 1^68. London. 1807. Helpful studies are: A. Geiger, in JUdieche Zeitechrift fUr Wie- •enachMft und Leben, ui (1864-65). 78-118; E. le Savour- euz. Btudee hietoriquee et ex^itiquee eiur I'A. 7.. pp. 101- 224. Paris. 1887; I. Harris, in JQR, i (1880), 128-142. 223-267; W. Bacher, in Winter and Wttnsche. Die jOdir •che Litteratur, ii, 121-132, Treves, 1804; idem, in JQR, iii (1801). 785-700. EUas Levita's work. Sepher maeaoreth ha-mtueoreth was published. Venice. 1536, Basel, 1530. cf. C. D. Ginsbtirg, The Maeeoreth hormaaeoreth of Eliae Levita, , , , in Hebrew with Eng. tranal. and . . . Notes, London, 1867; idem. The Maaeorah Compiled from MS3. alj^uibetically and lexicaUy Arranged, vols. L-iii., London. 1880^. On the Syrian punctuation consult: J. P. Martin, Hxatoire de la poncttuUion ou de la Maaeore ehea lea Syriena, Paris. 1875; A. Merx. Hiat, artia fframmaticca apud Syroa, Leipsic. 1882; G. Diettrich. Die Maaaorah der datlichen und weaUichen Syrer, London, 1800. On punctuation in general consxilt M. Schwab. Dea pointa- voyellea dana lea languea ahnitiquea, Paris, 1870. On the supralinear system consult: F. PraBtorius, in ZDMO, liii (1800), 181-106; G. Margoliouth. in PSBA, 1803, pp. 164-205. On a third system read: C. Levias, in Amer- ican Journal for Semitic Language and Literature, xv (1808-00). 157-164; and P. Kahle, in ZATW, 1001. pp. 273-317. On the accents: A. BQchler, Unterauehung kw Eniatehung und Entwickelung der hAr&iachen Accente, Vienna, 1801; W. Wickes, Treatiae on the Accentuation of the . . . Poetical Booka of the O. T., . . . and of the . . . Proae Booka, 2 vols.. Oxford. 1881-87; F. Pnetorius, Ueber die Herkunft der hebr&iachen Accente, Berlin, 1001; P. Kahle, in ZDMO, 1001. pp. 167-104. For discussion of points touched on in the text con- sult: Zuns, Zur Oe^ichte und Litteratur, pp. 105-122. Berlin, 1845 (on the punctuators); S. Pinsker, Einleitung in daa babyUmiachnh^&iache Punktationaayatem, Vienna, 1863. and H. L. Strack, in G. A. Kohut. Semitic Studiea, pp. 560-572, Berlin, 1807 (on the eastern Masorah); S. FrensdorfF, Daa Buch OcMah W'ochlah, Hanover; C. D. Ginsburg, Jacob ben Chajim ibn AdonijaKa Introduction to the Rabbinic Bible, Htbrew and EnglWi, with Explana- tory Notea, London, 1867; L. Ldw, Oraphiache RequiaiUn und Erzeugniaae bei den Juden, p. 71, Leipsic, 1870 (on the care exercised on the text); the tract Sopherim was ed- ited by Joel Mailer, Leipsic, 1878; H. T. de Graaf, De JoodadiewetgeUerdenin Tti)eriaa 70-400 A.D., Groningen. 1002 (on Jewish learning in Tiberias); P. Kahle. Der maaoretiache Text dea A. T.*a nadi der UAerlieferung der babyUmiKhen Juden, Leipsic. 1002. MASORETIC TEXT. See Bible Text, I. I. The Doctrine. 1. The Name " Mara." Etymology and Meaning (f 1). 2. New Testament and Early CJatholio Ideas. The New Testament (5 1). Further Development (( 2). The Sources (f 3). 3. Patristic Teachings. Cyprian and Origen ((1). Ambrose and Augustine (( 2). Gregory the Great (( 3). The East (f 4). Chrysostom (( 5). 4. Medieval Theories.
XV. MASS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MASS: De monogamia, x., xii.; De prcucriptione hareticorum, xxxvi., xii.; Ad Soapulam, iv.; De oratione, 2. The iii., xi., xviil., xxix.; Ad uxoren% ii. 0), Sources. Csrprian {Epiat., xii. 2, xxxiv. 1; Ad De- tnetrium,xx.; De oratione domini, y'm., xxxi.X and — 150 years later — Augustine {Confeaaionea, ix. 13; Ser- monea, clix., clxxii., ccxxvii.; cf. G. Rietschel, Liturffik, i. 299-300. Berlin, 1900). The early mass of Milan maybe reconstructed from notices in Ambrose (for the passages collected, cf. J. Pamelius. Liturgica LMtinorum, i. 266 sqq., Ck>loRne, 1571), supplemented by the works mentioned be- low in the bibliography. The value of the De aacramenHa, ascribed to Ambrose, is impaired by grave doubts as to its genuineness. Probst {Liturgie, pp. 232 sqq., MOnster, 1893) and Morin {Revue b^nfdictine, xi. 344 sqq., 1894) think it is a secondary writing based on Ambrose, Rietnchel (ut sup., p. 305. note 5) that it is lloman, Ceriani (Notitia, pp. 62-63, 65, Milan, 1897) and Magistretti {Liturgia, p. 85, Milan, 1899) that it is Gallican. Duchesne {Originea, p. 169. Paris, 1898) that it was composed in a North Italian city, per- haps Ravenna, about 400. For Ganl, besides scanty notices in IrenoBua {Hatr., iv. 2. 18) and a little fiiller information in Hilary of Poitiers (d. 367; Ad Conalantium, i. 2; Fragmenta, viii.; Contra Conatanlium, xxvii.; De trinitaie, iii. 7) and SulpiciuA Severus (d. 410 or 420; Vita S. Martini, ix.; Chron., ii. 39), the chief sources are: (1) Eleven masses published by Mone (see bibliography); the manuscript is probably of the seventh century, but the masses are older; Roman influence is not evident. (2) Two letters doubts fully ascribed to (jermanus of Paris (d. 576; in MPL, Ixxii. 89 sqq.); the first, which is purely Gallican and belongs to the sixth century, permits reconstruction of the mass in its essential features (cf. the Hauck-Herzog RE, xii. 709-710). (3) The so-called Miaaale Gothicum, probably from Autun; the manuscript is of the late seventh or early eighth cen- tury; apart from inserted Roman prayers, the structure of the mass is Gallican and the book gives the liturgy of the sixth or seventh century. (4) The so-called Miaaale Gal- licanum vetua, of the seventh or early eighth century, be- longing perhaps to the diocese of Besangon; it is probably a composite of two different mass-books (cf. Delisle In M6- moirea de VInatitute de France, 1886. i. 73 sqq.; F. Katten- buDch. Apoatoliachea Symbol, ii. 774, 776, note 28, I^ipsic, 1900); Roman influences are very strong. (5) The so- called Saeramentarium Gallicanum (Miaaale Veaontienae or Bobbienae), of the seventh century; it has been assigned to Bobbio and Luxeuil, probably belongs to Gaul, and Roman influence is strong. (6) The Lectionary of Luxeuil {MPL, Ixxii. 171 sqq.), purely Gallican, and containing the lessons for the entire year; it is doubtful if it was used in Luxeuil. (7) The so-called Miaaale Francorum, of the eariy eighth century or end of the seventh; Roman influence is so strong that Duchesne (ut sup., 128) and Ebner {Miaaale Romanum, p. 364, Freiburg. 1896) class it among Roman mass-books, but it originated and was used in the Prankish realm. (8) The Saeramentary of the abbey of St. Remigiua at Reims, written 70S-8OO; the original was burned in 1774, but an incomplete copy is in the Biblioth^ue Nationale in Paris (published by Chevalier in the seventh part of the Biblio- tMque liturgique, pp. 305-367. Paris, 1900); it is essentially Roman. The earliest sources for the liturgy in Spain are the acts of certain councils (Gerundia, 517, canon i., of. H. T. Bruns, Canonea apoHolorum et conciliorunh ii« 18, Berlin, 1839; Valencia, 524. i., in Bruns. ii. 24, cf. the First Toledo. 398. ii., iv., in Bruns, i. 204; Braga, 563. in Bruns, ii. 33; Third Toledo, 589, ii.. in Bruns. i. 213; Fourth To- ledo, 633. X.. xii., xiv., in Bruns, i. 225-226, 227, 228). Isi- dore of Seville (d. 636; De offlciia eccUncuUcis, i. 6, 13-18, ii. 5, 7 — on the genuineness of the chapter De acoluthU, cf. T. Kliefoth, LiturgiBche Abhandlunoen, ii. 289, Schwerin, 1859; — EtytnoloffixB, VI., xix. 4; Epiat, i. ad Leudefrvdum^ ii. €ui Redemptum), and the so-called MiBtale mixtum, Go- Heum, or MozarcMcum. The liturgy published at the in- stance of Cardinal Ximenes in 1500 (see Mocarabic Lrr- Y7RGY) contains, it is true, much that is Roman and Gal- ilean, but the original Spanish basis can be separated with some certainty; there are unpublished old Spanish masses still extant in manuscript (cf. Rietschel, ut sup., i. 320). For the sources of the Celtic-Anglo-Saxon and Neapolitan litiugies, see the bibliography below; they are scanty and the Roman coloring is so strong that the original forms can not be recovered. 8. The Snpplantinflr of the non-Boman Llturffies by the Boman: Two factors worked together to bring about general conformity to the Roman rit- ual— the repute and might of Rome in all things ecclesiastical, and, even more strongly, the desire to make an end of the infinite variety 1. AiHoa, ^ cultic forms. The popes did not Spain, set themselves strenuously to impose Milan, Roman usages on other districts, least and Ghreat of all Gregory I.; and the impulse to Britain, introduce the cult and order of Rome came from the extra-Roman lands themselves. The process doubtless began spon- taneously and proceeded at first unnoticed. Africa as a matter of course went with Rome. Elsewhere the first definite fact in the history appears in 538, when Bishop Profuturus of Braga, metropolitan of the kingdom of the Suevi, asked Pope Silverius for advice concerning liturgical questions. Vigilius, successor of Silverius, sent the baptismal liturgy, the canon of the mass, and the Easter prayers to show how things were done in Rome. At a coun- cil in Braga in 563 this papal letter was read and it was ordered to conduct the mass after the Ro- man model (cf. H. T. Bruns, Canones apostolorum et conciliorum, ii. 34, Berlin, 1839). But the West Goths established their church in the Spanish pen- insula and jealously guarded its independence against Rome, and synods and other assemblies still tried to effect uniformity in worship (e.g., the Fourth Synod of Toledo, 633, canon ii.; Eleventh Provincial Synod of Toledo, 675, iii.; cf. Bruns, ut sup., i. 221, 309). The canon of the Missale ndxtum (see above, 2, § 2) shows that Rome did not remain wholly without influence, and the Frankish-Germanic Church also made itself felt. Alexander II. introduced the Roman ritual into Aragon (1068), and Gregory VII. induced a synod at Burgos in 1085 to declare the Roman liturgy valid for all Spain. Only Toledo, the former center of the West Gothic Church, retained the old Span- ish liturgy till 1285, and Cardinal Ximenes obtained yj for six churches of Toledo (to which a chapel in Salamanca was afterward added) papal permis- sion to use the old native liturgy, though with many Roman modifications (see Mozarabic Lituhgt); the permission is still valid. Milan probably admitted Roman influence early and all known Milanese liturgies have only the Roman canon. It still had its own (though much romanized) mass as late as the ninth century, which passed for Ambrosian (Walafrid Strabo in MPL, cxiv. 944, cxlvii. 683), and it still retains certain peculiarities. The Ro- man liturgy was doubtless carried to England by Augustine; but the Iro-Scottish missionaries who converted the greater number of the Anglo-Saxons (see Anolo-Saxonb, Conversion of the) natur- ally brought with them their own ritual. Theodore J of Tarsus (q.v.), a Greek, appointed archbishop of Canterbiuy in 668 and the real foimder of the Eng- lish Church, was not strenuous for Roman forms; but others about him were differently minded, and the Coimcil of Clovesho in 747 prescribed the Ro- man ritual for all England (Haddan and Stubbs, CounciUf iii. 367). Nevertheless mass-books up to the Norman Conquest (the Leofric Missal, Missal of Robert of Jumidges, Missal of St. Augustine's Ab- bey of Canterbury, ed. M. L. Rule, Cambridge, 1896) show many non-Roman features, and usage was not uniform. The like is true for Ireland. Adamnan (q.v.) induced the Synod of Tara in 692 to decree that the native usages should be given up, but not until the twelfth century were Roman forms energetically introduced by Malachy of Armagh (see Malacht O'Morgair, Saint) and Gilbert of Limerick, and, finally, by the Synod of Cashel in 1172. In Scotland the break with the old liturgy was made in the eleventh century (see Celtic Church in Britain and Ireland). It is probable that Roman mass-books were brought to Gaul in the time of Csesarius of Aries (q.v.) and through him (cf. F. J. Mone, Latein- ische und Griechische Messen, pp. 112 sqq., Frank- fort, 1850; B&umer in Historisches Jahriuch, xiv. 1893, p. 205); but the result at first 2. France was merely the substitution of certain and prayers for those formerly in use. The C^e^many. structure of the mass was not altered thereby, although the new prayers often did not fit the places in which they were in- serted and thus prepared the way for more funda- mental changes, which first become evident about the middle of the seventh century. In the time of Gregory I. (d. 604) there was a very manifest dif- ference between the Gallican and the Roman masses (Epist., Ivi.a, in MGH, Epist.y ii. 1895, p. 331) and Gregory does not appear as a zealous partizan of the latter. During the sixth century the Roman sacramcntary made its way to Gaul and was often copied, and its influence comes to light in the Gal- lican missals and sacramentaries of the seventh or eighth century — ^an influence which reached much farther in some places than in others (cf. the Sacra- mentarium Gelamanum^ which presents certain Gal- lican peculiarities with the Roman structure, and the SacramerUarium GaUicanum^ in which the pref- ace and the mass of the catechumens are essentially Gallican in structure, with some prayers wholly Roman, and the mass of the faithful entirely Ro- man). The monasteries were probably the chief promoters of changes. In the seventh oentiiry they 230 were steadily adopting the Benedictine rule, which had a minute ordering of the hours after Roman models. Thereby the interest of the monks was directed to the Roman mass-liturgy, and the mixed services may have been held first in the monastery chapels. Boniface (q.v.) stood strongly for the Roman liturgy without being able to carry his re- forms through in details. What Pepin did for the Roman ritual in his realm (apart from the intro- duction of the music) is uncertain, but Charlemagne held the Roman forms in the highest esteem and accounted it a sacred duty to introduce them and thereby to make an end of the prevailing confusion in the liturgy. At his request Pope Adrian I. sent him between 784 and 791 a copy of the sacramen- tary then in use in Rome; but it proved disap- pointing because of the many departures from the pre-Gregorian form. A compromise was attempted by providing a new mass-book with select prayers and other liturgical forms taken mostly from the pre-Gregorian mass-book (manuscripts of this sort enumerated in A. Ebner, MUsale Ramanumy pp. 383-384, Freiburg, 1896). The selection was prob- y ably made by Alcuin, and Amalarius of Metz ad- vocated the Roman liturgy (cf. his De ecdesiasticis officils, MPLy cv. 986 sqq.). In time the Roman canon attained general acceptance; but the entire Roman ritual did not become established in either France or Germany during the Middle Ages, nor was a general imiformity reached. During the entire period the mass-liturgy in Frankish-German territory was constantly changing, and, whatever the theory may have been, the practise was far re- moved from a slavish following of Rome. There was a vigorous liturgical life north of the Alps, hav- ing its center in the monasteries, which even re- acted on the later Roman development. 4. Tbe Development of the Boman Mass after GhreflTory I.: The mass of Rome in the time of In- nocent III. (d. 1216) is known from that pope's writing De aacro altaris mysierio {MPLy ccxvii. 773 sqq.). No great changes have taken place in the six hundred years since Gregory I.; 1. Certain certain additions have been inade, Additions, some of them brought in from outside and some devised in Rome. The most noteworthy are a rather elaborate preparation of the priest in the sacristy, the insertion of the credo after the Gospel in what was formerly the mass of the catechumens, and ceremonial amplifications — washing of hands, burning of incense, etc. — to fill the gap left by the transposition of the kiss of peace and the commemoration into the canon. The most striking characteristic is the endeavor to treat the holy elements as something supcrearthly. That the doctrine of the sacrificial character of the mass influenced the development can not be asserted; but the tendency to restrict the active participa- tion of the congregation is much stronger than it is north of the Alps. After Innocent the prepara- tion was simplified, and the old ofiFcrtory prayers in shorter form and the epiklesis were restored after the offertory — ^a conformity to German usage. A superstitious practise, the reading of the prologue to John's Gospel, found entrance. This prologue was much used as an amulet during the Middle Ages, and a synod at Seligenstadt in 1022 con- demned the reading of it in the mass. Neverthe- less the custom spread and Pope Pius V. in 1570 officially sanctioned it in the conclusion after the last salutation. It thus appears that the develop- ment after the year 600 brought far fewer and much less important changes than did the first five cen- turies. Moreover, the changes for the most part were a concession on the part of Rome to extra- Roman usage. That the result is an artistic unity, a well-ordered liturgical structure, can hardly be asserted. ' The present Roman missal dates from 1634, all earlier efforts to secure uniformity in the mass of the Church having proved fruitless. The Council of Trent in its session of Dec. 4, 1563, left the issu- ing of a conunon mass-book to the pope, a commis- sion entrusted with the task not 8. The having completed its work. In con- Boman sequence the missal of Pius V. appeared MisMl. on July 14, 1570, with the decree that it alone should be used wherever the Roman rite was followed and there was no local mass-book 200 years old. But differences crept in, and in 1604 Clement VIII. issued a new book thor- oughly revised by a commission. Urban VIII. did the like, and the final revision appeared Sept. 2, 1634. This pope made the present division of the entire mass into forty-one rubrics, the first eighteen being coimted to the ordinary and the last twenty- three to the canon. The Congregation of Rites, established by Sixtus V. in 1587, safeguards the purity of the ritual (see Curia). The missal falls into three main divisions: (1) The " Proper of Masses of the Season " {Propnum miasarum de tempore) contains (a) the services for each day from the First Sunday in Advent to Holy Saturday; (b) the " Ordinary of the Mass " {Ordo misaa); (c) the prefaces for the entire year; (d) the " Canon of the Mass " (Canon miaaa); and (e) the services from E^ter to the end of the church year. (2) The " Proper of Masses of the Saints " {Proprium mis' aarum de aandia) gives the services for saints' days and for festivals of mysteries and important events (such as the Transfiguration, the Invention and Elevation of the Cross, etc.), arranged according to months of the civil year. (3) The " Common of Saints " (Commune aandorum) contains the masses for those saints' days which have no mass of their own; it is divided into masses of the apostles, mar- tyrs, confessors, virgins, and women. A sort of supplement gives the mass for church consecra- tions and their anniversaries, the votive masses in honor of mysteries and for various occasions, the orationea diveracB, i.e., prayers for different occa- sions, and finally the masses for the dead. [The modem missal begins with a table of mova- ble feasts and the calendar. Then follow the " Gen- eral Rubrics of the Mass," the " Rite to be Followed in the Celebration of the Mass," and " Defects which may Occur in the Celebration of the Mass," ex- plaining the various kinds of masses, the compo- nent parts, the hours of celebration, the kind and color of vestments, the conduct of the priest, and the like. The " Preparation for the Mass," a brief devotional manual, and a collection of prayers and 240 thankBgiving, to be used as occasion oflfers, come next. Then follow the " Proper of the Season," the " Proper of SainU," the " Common of Saints," etc., as above. An appendix adds *' Masses for Certain Places in the United States of America.] 6. The Withholding of the Cup: The Council of Constance in its thirteenth session (June 15, 1415) declared it the law of the Church that the laity should partake of but one element in the commu- nion. The Coimcil of Trent in its twenty-first ses- sion (chap, iii., canons i.-iii.) approved the earlier decree. The practise was no innovation and the action at Constance merely gave official sanction to a custom of long standing, which had its roots in the earliest times. The belief that the bread was the more important of the two elements may ap- pear even in the New Testament, where bread is mentioned more frer^uently than the cup (cf. Luke xxiv. 30). It is more clearly evident in the ancient custom of celebrating the Supper with bread and water instead of wine (Chrysostom, Horn, in Matt., IxxxiH. 4; Horn, in Gen., xxix. 3). To this was added the horror which believers felt if a crumb of the consecrated bread or a drop of the blessed wine fell on the floor (Tertullian, De corona, iii.; Canones Hippolyti, ccix.; Origen, Horn, in Exod., xiii. 3; Trullan Council of 692, canon ci.; Caesarius of Aries, MPL, xxxix. 2319). Consequently very early the Supper was celebrated with bread alone {Ada Jo- annia, ed. T. Zahn, p. 244, Erlangen, 1880). Pope Gelasius I. (492-490) declared against the practise in Calabria {MPL, lix. 141). When it became cus- tomary for the communicant to receive the host, not in his o\ni hand, but in open mouth from the hand of the priest, he was freed from all responsi- bility so far as the one element was concerned. It was natural to seek for a like immunity in case of the other. A means to the end desired was found by dipping the host in the wine and using a spoon (intinction). The ciLstom originated in the East, where it is still followed (see Eastern Church, III., § 5); the earliest c\idence of it in the West belongs to the seventh century. Tliat it originated from the laity is probable, and it is certain that the clergy did not always approve of it (synods at Braga, 675, canon i.; Clermont, 1095, xxviii.; London, 1175, xvi.). Paschal 11. calls it a " hu- man and new-fangled institution " (Epist. ccclv., MPL, clxiii. 442). It spread rapidly in England. Another means to the same end was the use of tubes (fistula, cannce, etc.; see Fistula), whick ap- pear from the ninth century. It was not a very far step for the people to renounce the wine altogether, which happened first in the twelfth century and, so far as is known, in England. It is thus a misuse of terms to speak of *' withholding " or ** withdraw- ing" the cup; there was a voluntary renunciation, though scarcity of wine in some places may have helped to establish the practise. Later the priests interpreted their partaking of both elements as a prerogative and privilege of their order, though the scholastic theology developed the doctrine that Christ is received whole and entire in each of the elements. 6. Kinds of Masses. The Roman Church clas- sifies masses according to two systems, depending on the time of oelebratioD and the degjree of sdem- nity. From the first point of view masses are either (1) masses of the season (de tempore), Le., masses on Sundays and festivals; (2) masses on saints' days (mtstcs de aancfit); (3) votive masses (missa toftrcr, Le., said by choice — voium — of the priest); or (4) masses for the dead (misfct pro de- /unctis) or requiem masses. The votive masses subdi\'ide into (a) those connected with a special exigency or wish conceming the entire Church, single dioceses or congregations (e.g., in times of war and pestilence, in droughts, at church conse- crations, for the king, for the sick, at coronations, conclaves, etc.), or individuals (at weddings, birth- days, anniversaries, etc.); and (b) those in honor of certain mysteries (the Trinity, the Holy Spirit, angels, etc.). The proper character of a mass ap- pears in the collects, the antiphons, the lessons, the secrets, etc. This feature is old; the Sacramen' tarium Letmianum contains the most varied kind of collects, secrets, and prefaces and postcommu- nions. From the second point of view masses are either (1) public or solemn {mutecB pMicce vd soUmnes; high masses) or (2) private (mtssa pri- rata). A public or solemn mass is characterised by a larger number (frequentia) of ministrants; that is, deacon, subdeacon, and certain subordinate attendants are present. Incense is burned, the number of altar-lights is greater than on other oc- casions, and the mass is sung. Such masses are held in parish churches on Simdays and festivab, in collegiate and cathedral churches daily. But since in smaller churches the necessary nimiber of clergy is lacking, a substitute for the missa eoUmnis is provided in the missa cantata [or media, which \& sung without deacon or subdeacon and the cere- monies proper to high mass]; it is, however, often designated as high mass. A congregation must attend either a missa solcmnis or cantata^ as both are " public." The private mass, on the contrary, may be held without the congregation and there- fore dispenses with the singing and larger number of ministrants. Only the celebrant and one minis- trant are required and the latter in certain cases may be a layman. Since the mass is read it is also called missa lecta. Evidently any particular mass may belong to both of the main classifications. A missa de tempore may also be solemnia publica or cantata publica; a missa I'otiva may be private; and a requiem mass may be either solemn or pri- vate. (P. Drews.) Other names which are gi\^n to masses are: pontifical, designating a solemn mass celebrated by a bishop with his insignia; papal, celebrated by the pope on certain great feasts with special rites; low, a mass without music, the priest saying and not singing the mass; capitular, the high mass on Sundays or festivals in collegiate churches; con- ventual or canonical, the daily mass of cathedral and collegiate churches celebrated solemnly and with music after tierce in memory of the founders. A missa adv^ntitia or manualis (a " chance " mass, one which " comes to hand ") is a mass said for the intention of a f)erson who gives an alms, opp>08ed to a missa legata, said for a special intention in conse- quence of a legacy or foundation. The so-calkd s of ihe preaanotified ia . , but u n office 1 the with a tlie word, the elements used having been conse- crated at a previous occasion (whence the name, missa jmaanclifiadonim [f/tTrawrforum]) . It ia said in the Greek Church throughout Lent, except SaU urdays, Sundays, and the Feoat of the Annudcia- lion, and in the Romaa Church on Good Friday (see HoLV Week). What waa knon-n as a dry mass (misso sicca), without consecration or com- munion, was common in the Middle Ages in pres- ence of the sick, at sta. and on other occasioiw when a real mass could not be saiil. 7. KodamProoednrelntheMass: The high mass on Sundays is usually preceded by a rite called the AfjxTges; the celebrant goes down the middle aisle, or at least to the sanctuary gates, sprinkling the people with holy water wlule the choir sings the anthem Airpergei me hysaopo (Ps. li. 7). The cele- brant then changes his cope for the sacrificial vest- ment, the chasuble (see Vestmento ANn Insignia, Ecct£SiA8TicAL), and recites the introductory prayers of the mass proper while the choir sings the ninefold Ki/rie eldson, followed (except in Ad- vent and Lent and at requiem masses) by the Gloria in erceUis. Neit come the collect, epistle, and goapel, changing with each day; the epistle ia sung by the subdeacon at the south end of the altar, as being addressed originally to the faithful, while the deacon sings the gospel, originally proclaimed to an unbelieving world, toward the north, sym- bolically the quarter of darkness. Lights are car- ried at the gos[)cl to typify Christ, the light of the world; and the priest kisses the book at the end in token of reverence for the words of the master. The sermon usually comes next, being in most instances an exposition of the gospel for the liuy. The Nicene creed ia then sung, all kneeling at the words " And waa incamalfl . . . and was made man," in honor of the incarnation. The following section ia called the offertory; the priest solemnly offers on the altar first the bread to be consecrated, then the wine mixed with a little wat«r as representing the two- told nature of Christ. Next comes the preface, varying with the feast or mystery commemorated, and leading up to the Sajiclua. By the time the choir has finished this, the celebrant has already begun the most solemn part of the mass, which be recites in a low, almost inaudible voice— a relic of the days of persecution when the most sacred mys- teries had to be kept secret from the heathen worlil. The bell, which has already been rung three times at the Sanetus, is rung once at the beginning of this part (called the canon or pmyer of consecration) and three times at the consecration of each of the elements. Aft^r the canon the priest sings the Lord's Prayer to a very ancient melody, the final clause coming in as a response by the choir and congregation. The next noticeable ceremony ia the " kiss of peace " which in modem usage is re- duced to the celebrant's placing his hands on the deacon's shoulders and inclining the head slightly toward him; this ceremonial embrace of Christian brotherhood is then conveyed by the deacon to the Bubdeacon and by him to any other clergy who happen lo be present. Presently follows the con- VlL— 16 of the sacrifice in the priest's commu- nion, preceded by a prayer of himiility at which the bell is again rung. As a rule the priest communi- cates alone at a high mass, the time for general communion, owing to the strict requirement of fasting, being early in the morning. After the ab- lutions, or cleansing of the sacred vessels, the post- communion prayers are said, and the priest gives the blessing (omitted in mx^sscs for the dead). Then, at the north end of the altar, he recites the second gospel, usually John i. 14, while the choir sings a prayer for the state (in monarchical countries for the sovereign) or for the pope. Incense is used at the introit or beginning of the mass, at the gospel, at the Sii'nctua, and at the consecration. The color of the vestments differs with the day or season. White is used on feasts of Christ, the Virgin Mary and other villus not martyrs, and confessors; red in Whitsuntide and on feasts of martyrs, typifying the fire of the Holy Spirit or the blood of the martyrs; violet in Advent and Lent; black on Good Friday and at masses for the dead; and on ordinary days green, the color of nature or of hope. BiBUOontPHT: On I.: F. 8. Rcni, />i« CucAicAM da JWcw BpfcT-Biariff$. 2 voU.. Freuing, 1001-02; BinKbam. OHffinM. Xlir., i. 4-e, XV., iv. 4: 1. J. I. voq Domuger, Dit EuAarUlie in dm erwim drri Jahrhundcrien. Maini, 1826; J. W. F. HaHing. Din LAn der OlieMltn Kird\c ruM OpftT in LOm und CuUhi dtr CHruttn, EtIuikfu. IS£11 J. N. DiepolJer. Dot Watn dcs rvehariiHicheit Opfert unJ der , . , Thtotoo^n dtr dm tetiten JaJirhundtrlen, AugV' buTK, ISTT; J. M. Rsgon, La Mtatt, Pbtib. 1SS2; C. Ro- hault lie Fleury, La liStne: ttuda ordi^hfiigutM *ur tet Tittitcht OpferliandtanB. Freiburg, ISSS; F. KKttenbiuch. VtTBlridiiJidt Cmi/mioMifcnni/e, i. 4H sqq., Freiburg, lSe2; D. Rock. Hicnrffia: or Uie Holj/ Sarrifla of lltt Mom. 2 voli., London. 1893; J. M. A. Vacant, llitt. dt Puria, ISM; O. J. Reiotael, Solemn Man nl Rcme in lAt Ninth Cintun/, London, 1896; N. Gibr. Din heiliatn Sakro' mtnU drr kalhntUchn Kinhi. 2 vols.. Freiburg. 1897; iiitta. Dot hiiliei UiHop/iT, dagmaHMrh, lilurBiiJi urJ atkinadi erklBrl, »ih ed.. ib. 10O7. Eng. truijiJ. oF axlh «1., Tlie Halu SaiTiJlet o! CAi .Ua», degmaiitaUy. [ifur- inai»n and avrlirally txplaimd. St. LquIi, 190S; C. H. U. Wrigbt. Thu Sfmirx of the Maa ia Ot Greek and Romaa CAurdAu, London, 1S9S; A. Frani, Die Meite im de<U- itfien MiUelaller. Freiburg. 1902: W. G6timBiin, Dat eficharigtivha Opjer tvidt der Lrhre der &Ueren Schotaetikt FreiburK, IM)2; A. Baunutnrk. Die Mem in Moram- land. KempMn. 1906; A. Devine, Thi OrdinaiTi if U' Man. hietorirallu. filurpimUu and exeoelicoUjI exploimd. Now Vorli. 1907: The Romm Bremar^. A TraneUuien bf JiAn:Vriirttieaii^BufF,E<liiiburBh. 1908. IncidenMl lopicJ art discuiwd in J. H. Matthews, The Man and if Fnlklorr. London, ID03; J. Hunkey. Tvo iMiding Dodrinel af th* CaOialie Church; Analurie of the Man. Alcbison, 1004; S. D. Hesdlun, The Mraning of the Mate. London. iOOS. Oa lb? name consuLI: Rottmnnner. In 7^, 1880, pp. 631 enq.; Kellner. in TQ. 1901. pp. 4:.'7 sqq, IL On the liturgiEsl side on immenBe lilpralun i* opmed up in the three secllonB of Ibe BritiJh .IfiutuM Cali^ogut devoted to Lilurnies- Information upon the J. Weale. Biblioaraphia lUvraira, Calalagui niuiIiuM ridti Lalini. London. 18SS; unJ in A. Ebner. Quellen und FoTMchuTieen fur Oenehithle und Kunttaeechichte det Mi*' •air Rotnanum in MittelaUrr. Freibuig. IBOQ. The most iinporlant cuJlectionB are: J. Pameliiu, Li^rffica Latin- orun. 2 parts. Coloicne, 1S71, reinsued under Ihe till* RilMole palrum Lalituirum wive lituraicon Lalinuwi, ib. 1675; L. JIuralori, Lilurgia Romano rebu. 2 voia.. Venice, 1748. Naples, 1770; J. Mnhillon, Mueeum Italicum. Paris. in87-Rn, 2d ed.. 1724; R. Mnrt(-nc, D» on(igui« rrrletia rihbui. 3 vols., Kouen. 1700-02 and ofttin; Cabrol and Leeleru), Maaumtnia ecduiic lHurgica, voL i.. port 1, 242 Patfis, 1002. Special editions of the different eaoraxnen- taries are: of the Saeramentarium Leonianum, by C. L. Feltoe, Gambridget 1806; of the SturamerUarium Oe- kutianum, by H. A. Wilaon, Oxford, 1804; the Saeramen- tttrium Orefforianum ia in MPL, Ixxviii. 25 sqq. For Gal- lican Uturgiee consult: J. M. Thomaaius (G. M. Tomasi), CodieM aaeramenL nongerUia annit vetuMtioreB^ Rome, 1680 (first to contain the MiaaaU Qotkicum^ FTancorumt and OaUicanum vttu»)\ F. J. Mone, LateiniMche und orio' cAiscAtf AIe99en aua dem £.-^, Jahrhundert, Frankfort, 1850; J. M. Neale, and G. H. Forbes, The Ancient Litur- gie* of the OiUlican Church now first Collected, Burntis- land, 1855 (contains the MiamHe Oothicum and Gallicanum and the Saeramentarium OcUlicanum, also the Mieeale Rid^enovenK); U. Chevalier, S<tcrameniaire et martyrologe de Vabbave de S. Remy, Paris, lOCX). Spanish liturgies: the Miaaale mixtum {Mouirabicum)^ ed. P. Hagenbach, first appeared Toledo, 1500, new ed. by Axevedo, Rome, 1755, MPL, Ixxxv., latest ed., Toledo, 1875. The Milan liturgy was printed Milan, 1400; other editions are: J. Pamelius, Liturgica Latino, i. 203-306, Ck>logne, 1571, reproduced in F. Probst, AbendlAndiache Meeee, pp. 14 sqq.. Monster, 1806; ed. of C. Borromeo, Milan, 1560, and often; cf. E. Mart^ne, De antiquie eccleeice ritiinie, i. 173-176, Bassano, 1787; M. Gerbert, Monumenta Vetera liturgiea Alemannia, vol. i., St. Bias, 1777; Berold, EccU- aicB Ambroaiance Mediolanenaia kalendarium, ed. M. Magis- tretti, Milan, 1804; A. Geriani, NoliticB lUerariae Ambro' eiancB ante eeculum xi. medium, pp. 2 sqq., Milan, 1805; M. Magistretti, Pontiftcale in ueum eccleeice Mediolani, ib. 1807. The Neapolitan and Capuan lectionary was edited by Morin in his Anecdota Maredaolana, i (1803), 426- 435, 436-444. On the Celtic and Anglo-Saxon Liturgy con- sult: F. E. Warren, The Liturgy and Ritual of the Celtic Church, Oxford, 1881; on the Stowe Missal, MacCarthy, in Tranaactione of the Royal Iriah Academy, xxvii. 7 (1886); M. L. Rule, The Mieaal of St, Auguetine'e Abbey, Canter- bury, 1806. For the medieval explanations of the liturgy, important historically, MPL is the great source. Individual ex- positions are found as follows: Isidor of Seville, MPL, Ixxxiii. 738 sqq.; Rabanus Maurus, ib., evil. 321 sqq.; Walafrid Strabo, ib., cxiv. 010 sqq.; Amalarius of Meti, ib., CY. 086; Bemo of Reichenau, ib., cxlii. 1055 sqq.; Pseudo-AIcuin, ib., ci. 1173 sqq.; Micrologus, ib., cli. 074 ■qq. (for a detailed description of the celebration of the mass north of the Alps in the 11th century drawn from the Microhgue, cf. Hauck-Herxog, RE, xii. 717-718); Hildebert of Tours, ib., clxxi. 1158; Rupert of Deutz, ib., dxx. 13 sqq.; Honorius of Autun, ib., dxxii. 543 sqq., 737 sqq.; Innocent III., ib., ccxvii. 763 sqq. A collec- tion of expositions was made by M. Hittorpius, De divinia catholiccB eccleaice ojfficiia et myateriia, Ck>logne, 1568, ed. G. Ferrarius. Rome, 1501, 3d ed., Paris, 1610. Noteworthy investigations are: T. Kliefoth, Liturgiache Al^umdlungen, vols, ii., iii., v.. vi., Schwerin, 1850; H. A. K5stlin, Geachichte dee chriatlichen GoUeadienatea, pp. 01 sqq., Freiburg, 1887; F. Probst, Liturgie dee 4- Jahrhun- derta und deren Reform, Manster, 1803; M. Magistretti, La Liturgia della chieaa Milaneae nel aecolo iv., Milan, 1800; L. Duchesne, Origenea du culte chrftien, Paris, 1002. The literature on the subject treated in II., 5, is collected in J. Smend, Kelchveraagung und Kelchapendung in der abendl&ndiachen Kirche, Gdttingen. 1808; cf. Fimk, in KirchengeachichtluJien Abhandlungen und Unteratichungen, i (1807). 203-308. and Zeitachrift fUr praktiaehe Theologie, xxi (1800), 82 sqq. Much of the material cited under LmiROics will be found pertinent and helpful.
B, 1877. MATEEH, CALVIH WILSOH MATEER, CALVIN WILSON

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATEER, CALVIN WILSON: Presbyterian missionary; b. in Cumberland Co., near Mechanics- burg, Pa., Jan. 9, 1836; d. at Tsingtau, Shantung Province, China, Sept. 28, 1903. He was graduated at the head of his class in Jefferson College, 1857; was principal of Beaver, Pa., Academy, 1857-59; studied in the Western Theological Seminary (Pres- byterian), Allegheny, Pa., in 1859-61, and waa graduated with the class of 1861. He had already been accepted aa a missionary by the Old School Presbyterian Board of Foreign Missions, but lack of funds preventing the board from sending bim out at once he was stated supply of the Presbyterian church at Delaware, O., from 1861 till 1863, when, in company with Hunter Corbett (b. at Leather- wood, Pa., December 8, 1835; graduated at Jeffer- son College, 1860; studied in Western Theological Seminary 1S60-62, graduated at Princeton Theo- logical Seminary 1863, since 1866 missionary at Chefoo, moderator of the General Assembly in 1906), he sailed for China. The voyage was long and the bearing of the captain insulting. He ex- changed the ship at Shanghai for a steamer and got into a storm and was wrecked near Chetoo, which hoppily was their destination, and after a night of suffering they safely arrived there. He waa settled at Teng Cbow, the port of Shantung, a province as large aa the State of Pennsylvania, and remained there tilt 1904, when he went to live at Wci-Hsien. In 1864 he laid the foundation of a school out of which there was formally organised in 1878 a col- MaterialiBm 844 lege, known as The Shantung Union College, which was removed to Wei-Hsien in 1904. He was its president till 1895. He also had a church at Teng Chow down to 1906. He was a missionary of the grand type, devoted to his work, a master of the language of the people he lived among and for whom he lived, and willing to be spent in their service, for he was home on fur- lough only three times. He was an extraordinarily versatile man, learning easily whatever he studied and able to impart his knowledge or turn it to prac- tical account. Thus he was very skilful in the use of tools, understood machinery, even the latest ap- plication of electricity, and made much of the ap- paratus used in the college. In 1870 he was super- intendent of the American Presbyterian Mission Press in Shanghai. At the same time he was a bom teacher, writing text-books in mathematics and the famous '* Lessons in Mandarin " which are widely used. Besides administering a college and preach- ing regularly and eloquently both in Chinese and English he was chairman of the committee for the revision of the Mandarin translation of the Bible, Mandarin being the dialect of Shantimg. The New Testament was taken in hand in 1890 and finished in 1906, when the Old Testament was at once taken up but only the book of Genesis and part of the Psalms had been revised at his death. This labor was his last. He had been doing it at Chefoo, where he was spending the sunmier. As he had been suf- fering from dysentery he concluded that it would be better on his way back to Wei-Hsien to stop at the German hospital at Tsingtau for treatnoent. This he did, but his disease had passed beyond cure. He was twice married, but had no children. His first wife was Miss Julia A. Brown of Delaware, O., whom he married in 1863 and who died in 1898. She was a most efficient coadjutor in educational work. His second wife was Miss Ada Haven, at the time of her marriage in 1900 a missionary of the American Board at Peking. She was equally helpful in his literary work. MATERIALISM. Origin in Greek Philosophy (§1). Monitstic Materialism (§ 2). Dualistic Materialism (§3). Mechanical and Organic Materialism (§ 4). Mechanical View in Modem Philosophy (§ 5). Weakness of the Theory (§ 6). By the term materialism is usually meant the metaphysical view that the basis of everything that exists is matter, or that nothing except matter exists. Materialism seems to have been histor- ically earlier than its opposite, spirit- I. Origin ualism (see Ideausm), or than the in Greek dualism which recognizes both matter Philosophy, and spirit (see Descartes, Ren^). Thus, in the oldest Greek philosophy is found the assumption that everything originated from a primary matter, and that all phenomena are but transformations of this, and shall one day re- turn to it again, after which new changes will begin, and so on ad infinitum. The concept of spirit, as an object of interior perception, and still more of spirit as a cosmic principle, came later. And even where^ as with Anaxagoras, spirit appears as the creator of the world, it may be taken as materiaOy conceived. Plato is the first to reach the concept of an absolutely immaterial cosmic principle. With him the spiritual or intelligible world is of a higher order than the world of phenomena cognizable by the senses, which comes into being through the op- eration of the former. While all true materialism is in a sense monistic, recognizing but a single prin- ciple as the essence of the world, this essence may differentiate itself into a finer and a coarser matter, and one of these may influence the other. Greek philosophy begins with a strictly monistic material- ism; Thales recognizes water, Anaximenes fire, as the source of all things. But in Heraclitus, al- though all phenomena are transformations of the principle of fire, and although the Logos which brings harmony out of all is not a second principle but inunanent in matter, yet fire itself is opposed, as a finer and more spiritual element, to two coarser ones, water and earth, developed indeed out of itself. This dualistic view was more fully worked out later by the Stoics. Speaking generally, the materialism of modem times, descending from Hobbes and winning adher- ents at first more in France than in England or Ger- many, has been monistic, in so far as all spiritual processes are conceived merely as 2. Monistic functions of matter. This view was Materialism, set forth by Lamettrie (1709-61), whose best-known work is L' Homme machine (Leyden, 1748; new ed., Paris, 1865), and by Holbach in the Syathne de la nature (see Deism, II., S 3). The great Encydopfyiie (see Encyclo- pedists) was to a large extent a product of mate- rialism, although Positivism (q.v.), which is often confused with it, contributes its share. Germany produced many monistic materialists in the nine- teenth century. The most heated controversy broke out about the middle of that century owing to the publication of a lecture by the physiologist Rudolf Wagner, Ueber Menschenschapfung und Sedensubsiam (GSttingen, 1854), to which Karl Voigt replied in his once famous satirical pamphlet Kohlerglaube und Wissenschaft (ib. 1854). To the further spread of materialistic views the principal contributors were Jakob Moleschott, especially in his Der Kreislauf des Lebens (5th ed., Mainz, 1876- 1885), and Ludwig Biichner with his popular trea- tise Kraft und Stoff (1855; 21st ed., Leipsic, 1904; Eng. transl., Force and Matter, London, 1864). Buchner did more for the spread of this view than Ludwig Feuerbach (q.v.), who is often classed as a materialist, or than David Fried rich Strauss (q.v.), who in Der alte und der neue Glavhe (Leipsic, 1872; Eng. transl., The Old Faith and the New, London and New York, 1873) leans strongly toward mat^ rialism without being able wholly to free himself from Hegelian pantheism. Systems more or less akin to materialism have been set forth in more re- cent times by Heinrich Czolbe and Eugen Duhring, without winning any wide following; and a com- paratively moderate essay in the same direction is found in Du Bois-Reymond's well-known lecture Ueber die Gremen des Naturerkennena (Leipsic, 1872) and his book Die sieben Weltrdted (ib. 1882). Less moderate is the much-discussed work of £mst d45 Hateei^ Materialimi Iliickel, Die WeUrdUd (Bonn, 1899). All these recent materialistic theories are monistic, and usu- ally more or less connected with the doctrine of evo- lution. Monistic also is the atomistic materialism, however much its supporters have attempted to give it a dualistic coloring, as may be seen in the teaching of Democritus and of his successors the Epicureans. In the seventeenth century the Epicurean atom- ism was revived by Pierre Gassendi (q.v.), who led the way to a mechanical-physical conception of the world and thus to modem materialism. 3. Dualistic But whereas Gassendi was unable to Materialism, include the Deity in his materialistic conception of the universe, placing God rather above this world of phenomena in which only secondary causes are operative, long before his day the Stoics had made their noteworthy attempt to include God as a factor in the material world, thus leading up to a dualistic materialism. Be- cause they emphasized so strongly an ethical ideal- ism which amounts to rigorism, they have been a good deal neglected by historians of materialism; and yet they were thorough-going and logical ma- terialists. All reality to them is corporeal; the Godhead exists, therefore it must be corporeal, i.e., material, and so must the soul, and even the vir- tues and affections of the soul. It is true they often speak of two principles, thus apparently following Plato or Aristotle; but a closer scrutiny of their views shows that the active formative principle is considered as definitely material. The four ele- ments are not eternal, nor do they spring from dif- ferent sources, but all come from the one primal matter, which the Stoics, here following Heraclitus, regard as fire. This fire, the artificer of the world, pervades the whole universe and is called God. They also call the Deity anima mundi, the world- soul, or Logos; but their Logos is material, not spiritual. In the evolution of the world, the Logos, as spermatikos, seminal, is contrasted with the other two coarser elements. It comprehends the single logoi spermatikaif which are also thought of as ma- terial substances. But the kind of materialism which conmiended itself to the Stoics by its logical character found no adherents after the last real Stoic had occupied the imperial throne (see Sto- icism). Christian philosophy gave a certain place to ratumes seminales, but regarded them as rather spiritual than material; there are traces of Stoic materialism in some of the Fathers, but Platonic metaphysics gained the upper hand, as being more in harmony with Christian spiritual ideas. In the Renaissance and later times Stoic philosophy has had more influence than is generally supposed; but its natural system has had but few and unimportant followers, and monism has generally triumphed in the region of materialism. But besides the distinction already treated be- tween monistic and dualistic materialism, there is another of still deeper significance between organic and mechanical materialism. The latter rejects all teleological considerations, while the former is at least patient of them. The oldest Greek philo- sophers, materialists as they were, regarded matter as possessing life, if not a soul. Heraclitus may be tftken as a type of the older organic materialism, regarding matter as eternally in motion, and moved by certain laws, not from without but according to reason. But his Logos is not a con- 4. Mechan- scious, still less a self-conscious agent, ical and and is thus distinguished from the all- Organic knowing, intelligent nou8 of Anax- Materialism. agoras, which had no slight influence on the Platonic and Aristotelian doo- trine of God. The principal representatives of organic as of dualistic materialism were the Stoics, with their decided teleological tendency. In their view the end of all things, of course, is the return into the primary fire; but in the existing world the formative principle is rationaL Everything is logically ordained by a provident intelligence. The mechanical materialism of the present day is still based upon the atomistic theory, as laid down by Leucippus and Democritus. The eternal move- ment of the atoms is not conditioned by any defi- nite cause, and proceeds in no definite order; casu- ally, yet still by necessity, atoms came together from various sides, from one part and another of infinite space, and this brought about a rotary mo- tion out of which the imiverse ultimately came into being. Since the soul b composed of atoms, its processes also must be purely mechanical. Democ- ritus even considered the perception of the senses to be mechanical, emanations of atoms detaching themselves from objects and affecting the senses. His atomistic system is a strictly logical and scien- tific one, not depending upon any invisible powers such as the nous of Anaxagoras or the love and hate of Empedocles. Sense-perception, indeed, with him is deceptive — a dim knowledge, contrasted with the true, which is to be gained by reason; al- though according to his whole teaching thought must be based upon sense-perception and can not be independent of it. Epicurus, while as a rule following Democritus, introduced a peculiar varia- tion in teaching, not a primary motion or rotation of atoms, but a mode of motion by which they fell through their own weight and declined a little from a straight line through a sort of self-determination. This declension explains their meeting and perma- nent combinations, as well as the upward and side- long motions through which worlds came into be- ing. This element of arbitrary determination helps Epicurus to explain the freedom of the will, which he accepts in a certain sense, but it damages the strict logical consequence of a materialism that denies any freedom or arbitrary determination. In modern times, without knowing anything of Epicurus, Galileo revived the Democritean me- chanical conception of the universe, denying, in opposition to the scholastic-Aristo- 5. Mechan- telian philosophy, any real coming ical View in into existence or perishing, and re- Modem ferring all changes to shifting of parts, Philosophy, to quantitative not qualitative rela- tions. The mechanical view of nature, if not of the universe, was dominant at the begin- ning of modem philosophy with the most appar- ently opposite thinkers, with Ren6 Descartes (q.v.) as well as with Thomas Hobbes (q.v.), who, re- garding philosophy as the science of bodies, con- sidered an incorporeal substance as an absurdity
MATHER MATHER

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATHER: The name of a family of much prominence in the early history of New England. 1. Richard Mather, the ancestor of the family in America, was born at Lowton (14 m. w. of Man- chester), parish of Win wick, Lancashire, 1596; d. at Dorchester, Mass., Apr. 22, 1669. He was sent to the Winwick grammar-school, and at fifteen was chosen teacher of a school at Toxteth Park. Here he became acquainted with a branch of the Aspin- wall family, by whom he was led to devote himself to the ministry, and went to Brasenose, Oxford, to prepare for the same. But the people at Toxteth were so unwilling to wait for him, that he left the university before taking his degrees and late in 1618, when only twenty-two, preached his first sermon at Toxteth Park. The Bishop of Chester ordained him; and in Sept., 1624, he married Katherine, daughter of Edmond Holt of Bury. Becoming an earnest Puritan and being for a time suspended, he left — traveling in disguise to Bristol — for New Ehig- land. May 23, 1635, landing at Boston, after being very nearly shipwrecked, Aug. 17 following. The First Church at Dorchester having emigrated with its pastor, Warham, to Connecticut, Mr. Mather gathered a new (the present First) church there Aug. 23, 1636; he was chosen its teacher and so remained until his death. For his second wife he married the widow of John Cotton (q.v.). By his first wife he left six sons, of whom four — Samuel, Nathaniel, Eleazer, and Increase — ^followed their father's profession. Richard Mather was one of the ablest and most influential among the early ministers of New Eng- land, a powerful preacher, and a specially wise counselor; he was seized with his mortal illness while moderating that ecclesiastical council in Bos- ton out of whose deliberations the Old South Church was born. He was skilled in the New England plan of church government, wTOte three or four of the best early tracts in its exposition and defense, and was the chief composer of the * 'Cambridge Platform." 2. Samuel Mather, eldest son of Richard Mather, w^as bom at Much Woolton (4 m. s.e. of Liverpool), Lancashire, May 13, 1626; d. in Dublin Oct. 29, 1671. He came to New England with his father in 1635, was graduated at Harvard in 1643, and became fellow; he is said to have been the first fellow who was a Harvard graduate. He returned to England in 1650 and was made a chaplain of Magdalen College, Oxford. He resigned in 1653 to attend the parliamentary commissioners to Scot- land. He became an M.A. of Trinity College, Dub- lin, in 1654, and was one of its senior fellows. He was ordained at Dublin Dec. 5, 1656. At the Res- toration he was suspended (Oct., 1660) and then became perpetual curate of Burtonwood, Warring- ton, Lancashire, whence he was ejected by the Act of Uniformity of 1662. Returning to Dublin he preached there for several years, at first in his own house. He was imprisoned Sept. 20, 1664, for preacb- ing at a private conventicle but was soon released. He declined a call to return to Boston, U. S. A. 3. Nathaniel Mather, third son of Richard Mather, was born at Much Woolton, Lancashire, Mar. 20, 1630; d. in London July 26, 1697. He came to New England with his father in 1635 and was graduated M.A. at Harvard in 1647. He then returned to England and preached at Harberton and at Barnstaple, Devonshire, until ejected by the Act of 1662, when he went to Rotterdam. Here he remained as minister of the English Church until the death of his brother Samuel, when he succeeded him in Dublin. In 1688 he took charge of the Lime Street Church, London, and in 1694 became one of the Merchants' Lecturers at Pinner's Hall. He is interred in Bunhill Fields, London. 4. Eleazer Mather, fifth son of Richard Mather, was born at Dorchester, Mass., May 13, 1637; d. at Northampton, Mass., July 24, 1669. He was graduated at Harvard in 1656. In 1658 be went to Kather Katheson d48 Northampton, gathered the first church there, was ordained in June, 1661, and labored successfully as pastor till his early death. 5. Increase Mather, sixth and youngest son of Richard Mather, was born at Dorchester, Mass., June 21, 1639; d. in Boston Aug. 23, 1723. He was graduated at Harvard in 1656 in the same class with his brother Eleazer, though on account of physical weakness for a time he was a pupil of John Norton. On his nineteenth birthday he preached at Dorchester, and, twelve days later, sailed for England. He took his M.A. at Trinity College, Dublin, and, after preaching in various places, re- turned to New England in 1661, intending to go back to England when times should be more favor- able. He was ordained in New England, however, May 27, 1664, over the Second Church of Boston and remained there till his death. For seventeen years (1685-1701) of this pastorate he was also president of Harvard College; and in 1688 he went to England as special agent of the Massachusetts Colony, where — " his expenses in the mean time greatly exceeding his compensation, and he pledg- ing all his property for money which he borrowed to support himself while he was working for his country " — he remained in this public service about four years. It is related of Increase Mather that it was his habit to study sixteen hours out of the twenty- four. It is matter of record that he was not merely acceptable, but highly honored, for nearly sixty years, in one of the two most important pulpits on this side of the sea; and he left behind him publi- cations of various sorts to the number of 160. It is in no way strange, therefore, that he should have been almost unanimously held to be the foremost minister of his day in this new country, and that he should have exercised an influence as vast as, in the main, it was salutary. In 1662 he married Maria, daughter of John Cotton, by whom he had three sons and seven daughters. His sons^-Cotton, Nathaniel, and Samuel — were graduated at Harvard in 1678, 1685, and 1690 respectively. 6. Cotton Mather, eldest son of Increase Mather, was born in Boston Feb. 12, 1663; d. there Feb. 13, 1728. He became the most renowned of the lineage, although, conceding his omnivorous scholar- ship and exceptional labors, it may be doubted whether he were even the peer of his father or grand- father in intellectual ability. He took his B.A. at Harvard (1678) when less than fifteen years and six months old; taught for a time; overcame an impediment of speech which had threatened to in- terfere with his success in the family profession; acted as his father's assistant at the Second Church, Boston; and was ordained, as joint pastor with him, May 13, 1685 — a place which he surrendered only at his death. During nearly three and forty years he was indefatigable as a preacher, systematic and thorough as a pastor, eminent as a philanthro- pist— at great personal risk successfully introducing and defending the inoculative prevention of small- pox— and amazing as an author; being known to have printed 382 separate works, of which several were elaborate volumes, and one a stately folio of 800 pa^es; whilei to his sore and amazed grief, the great work of his life (in his own esteem), his BtbUa Americana, failed of publication. It renuuns in manuscript to this day. It was Cotton Matbsr's misf ortime that the weak and whimsical side of his multiform greatness most impressed itself on i^any of his generation, and that, for sharing with other good and eminent men of his day in the witchcraft delusion, he has most unfairly been singled out for a specialty of censure and contumely which in no degree fairly belongs to him. He was no more guilty for not being, as to that, in advance of his age, than were Richard Baxter and Sir Matthew Hale in England, or Judgje Sewall, or Gov. Stoughton, or Sir William Phips, or scores of others in New England. He married three times. 7. Samuel Mather, fourth son of Cotton Mather (by his second wife) and the only one of his sons who lived to manhood, was born in Boston Oct. 30, 1706; d. there June 27, 1785. He was grad- uated at Harvard in 1723, before he was seventeen; and four years after his father's death, June 21, 1732, was ordained colleague with Rev. Joshua Gee over that same Boston church which his father and grandfather had served for sixty-four years before him. Of considerable learning and fair abilities, he did not, however, fill the ancient place; and in less than ten years was dismissed, and, with a not very large following, labored with a new church (whidi did not survive him) until his death. He, too, was an author, of less than a score of books, however, only one of which, An Apology for the Liberties c§ the Churches of New England (Boston, 1738), de- serves, or has, remembrance. None of his three sons studied for the ministry. It may be doubted whether history can parallel this family, of which eleven members were trained for the sacred office in four generations, of whom the seven who wrought in New England expended about 250 years of ministerial labor upon it, besides publishing more tlian 500 different works, and some of them exerting a popular influence never surpassed, and seldom equalled. For its distinguished serv- ices in each of its four generations, in reducing to rigid system, illustrating, defending, and chroni- cling the way of the churches of New England, if it had done nothing else, this Mather group would deserve, as it will receive, perpetual remembrance. (Henry M. DEXTERf.) Morton Dexter. Bibliography: An excellent edition of Cotton Math^s Magnalia Chriati Americana (a source for the earlier members of the family), with memoir and transl. of Hebr., Grk. and Lat. quotations, appeared 2 vols., Hartford, 1855. Other early sources are indicated in the series of notices in DNB. xxxviii. 27-31. Consult: John Mather, Genealogy of the Mather Family, Hartford, 1848; C. Rob- bins, Hiat. of old North Church in Boston, Boston, 1852; W. B. Sprai^e. Annals of the American Pulpit, i. 75-80, 151-160. 189-195. 371-375. New York, 1859; B. Wendell, Cotton Mather, in Makers of America Series, ib. 1801; A. P. Marvin, Life and Times of Cotton Mather, Boston, 1892; W. Walker, Influence of the Mathers in New Eng- land Religious Development, New York, 1892; idem, HisL of the Congregational Churches in the U. S., passim, ib. 1894 (cf. Index); idem. New England Leaders, ib. 1901; A. E. Dunning, Congregationalists in America, ib. 1894; L. W. Bacon, The Congregationalists, ib. 1904; J. P. Quincy, Cotton Mather and the Supernormal in New Eng- land Hist., in Proceedings of the MaasachitsetU Historical Society, 2d aer., vol, zz^ 1Q07« d4d Mather Matheaon MATHESinS, JOHANNES: German Reformer; b. at Rochlitz (16 m. n.n.w. of Chemnitz) June 24, 1504; d. at Joachimsthal (14 m. n.n.e. of Elbogen), Bohemia, Oct. 7, 1565. He was the first biographer of Luther, the Reformer of Joachimsthal, and one of the most powerful preachers among the Reformers of the second period (1504-65). He studied at Wit- tenberg, which he gratefully praised as his spiritual home, always regarding himself as a member of the church and school there. In 1532 he became the seventh rector of the Latin school at Joachimsthal, the then new city of northwestern Bohemia which had achieved prosperity by its silver mines and had adopted Lutheramsm. In 1540
MATHESON, GEORGE MATHESON, GEORGE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATHESON, GEORGE: Church of Scotland; b. in Glasgow Mar. 27, 1842; d. at North Berwick (19 m. e.s.e. of Edinburgh) Aug. 28, 1906. Al- though his eyesight gradually failed him until in his eighteenth year he had become blind, he fin- ished his school and university course at Glasgow with high honors (B.A., 1861; M.A., 1862; B.D., 1866) and was licensed to preach in 1866. During the next year he was assistant to John Ross Mao- duff (q.v.) of the Sandyford Church, Glasgow; from 1868 till 1886 minister of Innellan (35 m. down the Clyde from Glasgow); and from 1886 till his retire- ment in 1899 minister of St. Bernard's, Edinburgh. Being in easy circumstances he was always able to employ secretaries who read to him and wrote for him, and having an extraordinarily retentive mem- ory and strong literary bent he produced many books which display much reflection and, consider- ing his restrictions, no little learning. He was very broad-minded and saw good in creeds which he re- jected. His preaching was of a high order. In consequence of his standing as preacher and author he was the recipient of many honors — D.D. of Edin- burgh University, 1879; call to succeed John Gum- ming (q.v.) as pastor of Crown Court Church, Lon- don, 1880; Baird lecturer, 1881; preacher before the queen at Balmoral Oct. 25, 1885; Gifford lec- turer, 1899 (declined) ; fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, 1890; LL.D., Aberdeen, 1902. His books may be divided into three classes: first, those of a philosophical character: Aids to the Study of German Theology (Edinburgh, 1874; 3d ed., 1876), issued at first anonymously, a sympathetic study of German theology from Kant to Dorner with a view to relieving it of the charge of " atheism "; Growth of the Spirit of Christianity from the First Century to the Dawn of the Lutheran Era (2 vols., 1877), in which he showed his reading in compara- tive religion, a favorite study, and his acceptance of Hegelian principles as guiding lines in the pre- sentation of church history, but it is not a church history in the ordinary sense; Natural Elements of Reveaied Theology (1881), his Baird lectures, in which he again utilized his attainments in compara- tive religion to commend Christianity; Can the old Faith Live with the New f or^ the Problem of Evohp- tion and Revelation (1885; 3d ed., 1889), an attempt to show that even if evolution be true, and he was non-conunittal on that point (though afterward he came to the conclusion that it was not true), belief in it is compatible with belief in Christian doctrines; he presented the same idea in more popular form in The Psalmist and the Scientist^ or. Modem Value of the Religums Sentiment (London, 1886; 3d ed., 1892); The Distinctive Messages of the Old Religions (1892; 2d ed., 1893), an attempt to state that for which each of these religions stood. The second class of books was those which are more directly THE NEW 8CHAFF-HER200 and avowedly preiwhers' espoaitions: The SpirUwil DeittojmjCTil of St. Paid (1800; 4lh ed., 1897), a study of ihe thirteen epiatica of Paul, but not of the literature on them; The Lady EccUiia, on Avlobi- ograpky (1896; 2d ed„ 1896), nn allegory; Side- ligktif from PalmOS (1897; 3d ed., 1903); Studieiof the Portrait of Christ (2 vols., 1S99-I900; vol. I., 10th ed„ 1907, vol. II.. 6th ed., 1907), a very inter- esting study of tlw life of Chriat as an aid to faith and not as a contribution to Hcholarship, generally considered his best piece of work; The Repreaen- tative Men of the BibU (2 series, 1902-03; first series, Adam to Job, 6lh cd., 1907; second series, Ishmael to Daniel, 3d ed.. 1907); The Representa- tive Men of the New TeatameM (1905); and The Repreaenlalive Women of the Bible (1906). But it ia Ukely that he wilt be longer useful aa author of a third class of books, the devotional, for these have hod a very wide sale and reached many who were not attracted by his other books: My Aspiration* (1882); Moments on tlie Moanl (188-1); Voice* of the SpirU (1888); Seardiings in the Silence (1895); Words by the Wayside (1896); Tima qf RetiremcTd (1901); Leoues/or Quid Hours (1004); Resle by the fliwr (1006); Meisaga of Hope (1908); Thoughts for Life's Journey (1908); and Day unto Dai/ (1908), prayers. He wrote also poetry: SoCT-cd Songs (1890; 3d ed., 1904); and one hymn (not in this collection), "O Love that wilt not let mo go," will be sung long after all his other compositions are forgotten. It was written at the Innellon manse in 6ve minutes on the evening of June 6, 1882, and otdy changed in a single word, " truce" tor " climbed " in the third Btanza. But four other hymns which are in this colleo- tion have been incorporated into several hymn-books. Bibliography: t3.MacaAill^a,T\eLifc(^faronKifalht*on, LondDD, 1907.
MATHEWS, GEORGE DDHCAH MATHEWS, GEORGE DUNCAN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATHEWS, GEORGE DUNCAN: Irish Presby- terian; b. at Kilkenny (73 m, s.s.e. of Dublin), County Kilkenny, Apr. 25, 1828. He was edu- cated at Trinity College. Dublin {B.A., 1848). after which he held successive pastorates at the United Presbyterian Church in Stranraer, Scotland (18W- 1868), Westminster Presbyterian Church, New York City (1868-78), and at the Canadian Presbyterian Church, Quebec (IS78-88). He was also professot of dogmatic theology in Morrin College, Quebec, from 1880 to his retirement from active life in 18S8. He was .\tncrican secretary of the General Presby- teriati Alliance in New York in I8r»-S8, and sinee the latter year has been general secretary of the General Presbyterian Alliance at London. He wu also a member of the Council of Public Inelructioo for the Province of Quebec from 1880 to 1888, and in theological position is a liberal conservative. In addition to minor contributions, he was editor of The Christian Worker in 1870-74, and associate editor of Catholic Presbylerianism in 1879-83 and of The Quarterly Register (the official organ of the General Presbyterian Alliance) in 1880-88, of which he has been general editor since the latter year. Be likewise edited the Proceedings of the General Pres- byterian AUiance tor 1884, 1892, 1896, 1899, 1904, and 1909,
MATHEWS, SHAILER MATHEWS, SHAILER

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATHEWS, SHAILER: Baptist; b. at Port- land, Me., May 26, 18G3. He was educated at Colby University, Waterville, Me. (A.B., 1884), Newton Theological Institution, from which be was graduated in 1887, and the University of Berlin (1890-91). He was associate professor of rhetoric at Colby University in 1887-89 and professor of his- tory and political economy in the same institution in 1SS9-94, as well as lecturer in New-Testament litera- ture in Newton Theological Institution in IS88-S9, after which he was associate professor of New-Tes- tament history and interpretation at the divinity- school of the University of Chicago from 1894 to 1897 and professor from 1897 to 1904. Since the latter year he has bcenprofcssorof systematic theol- ogy in the same seminary, was junior dean of the divinity school 1894-1907, and dean since 1907. In addition to his work aa editor of The World To- day since 1903 and of tho series of New Testament Handbooks, aa well as associate editor of The Biblieal World and The American Journal of Theology, he has written: Select Media:ral Documents (New York, 1891); The Social Teaehins of Jesus {18S7); A His- tory of New Testament Times in Palestine (1899); Construdire Studies in the Life of Christ (in collabo- ration with E. D. Burton, Chicago, 1901); The French Revolidion (New York, 1901); Principle* and Ideals for the Sunday Scliool (in collaboration with E. D, Burton, Chicago, 1903); The Messianic Hope in llie New Testament (1905); and The Church and the CImnging Order (New York, 1907). MATHIED, mQ'lt"0', FRASCOIS DESIRE: Caiv dinol; b. at Einviilu {Ah m. n. of Lun^viile), Prance, May 28, 1839; d. iu London Oct. 26, 1908. He was ordained to the priesthood in 1863, after hav HEUGIOm ENCYCLOPEDIA ing been professor at the Petit Sirainaire of Pont-4- Mouaaon from 1859, and tor ten years was confessor of the Dominican nuns at Nancy. In 1804 he was consecrated bishop of Angers, and two years lal«r was eothroned archbishop of Toulouse. He was creat«d cardinal priest of Santa Sobiiia in ISDO. He wrote L'Ancien t^gtme dans la prooince de JjOrraine et Banoia d'apris da docuTaerUa infdiU (Paris, 1S70) and Le Concordat dc 1801, eel origines, aon histoire (1903).
BORH MATILDA (MECHTILDIS), SAINT, OF HACKEBORN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATILDA (MECHTILDIS), SAINT, OF HACKEBORN: Benedictine nun of Helfta (Hclpode), near Eisleben; b. 1241; d. about 1310. She be- longed to the family of the lords of Hackeborn. and was the younger sister of Gertrude, who for forty years stood at the head of the monastery of Helfta (see Gertrcde). The revelations which she claimed to have here were written down by her sister nuns. The contents of these revelations are visions in which questions were put to (^ist and Mary, to which answers ware received. For the most part they are questions of the inner life and are sometimes fine and profound. In keeping with the time the holy virgin is worshiped to excess, yet there is a remarkable passage (i. IS, pp. 54 sqq.} in which Mary with all creatures accuse Matilda, but Christ alone has mercy upon her and absolves her. Another passage (ii. 14, p. 148) has secured her a place in the Catalogue lesCiMm verUatia of Flaciua (p. 923 of the editio princeps) because it is shown there how all her imperfection is made perfect by the perfection of the Son of God. It is an undenied truth, though often practically obscured, that in the theology of the Western Church of the Middle Ages all salvation comes finally through the di- vine mercy in Christ, and in mysticism this is cften expressed in the moat vivid manner; of this Matilda is a witness. {S. M. Deutbch.) Biblioobapqt: Sancia Afcehihildin liher apwialis ffnih<B, in AfrrlafionH Orrlnidinna ac Medahildiana. cara . . . So- Utmrruium O. S. il, rwnocionnii. u. 1-421. Parin, 1877; J. Muller, Lfben und Offeiibarunovn der hffiti^jtn MeA- ItiUd und drr SrJiwtmtcT Mcchlhild, RegeuBbure. 1881; W. Preger. Gachichlr der druUcAen Myitik im JfitlefuJCcr. L79!K ;, 1874. MATILDA (MECHTILDIS) OF MAGDEBURG: Beguine, afterward nun at Helfta (Hrlpedc), near Eisleben; b. 1212 or a year or two later; d. at Helfta c. 1280. In her twelfth year she was " sa- luted by the Holy Spirit," and tlienceforth her apiritual life developed uninterrupte<lly (Morel, iv. 2, p. 91). At the age of twenty-three she went to Magdeburg and lived there thirty years as Beguine. In her lonely hfe she had extraordinary experiences which she later wrot« down in Low German and thus originated the first six parts of her bock; the seventh part she added afterward at Helfta, whither she retired when advanced in years and where she hved for twelve years, highly revered (cf. Lift, spec, jml., ii. 42, v. 7). Her work waa translated into High German by Henry of NOrdlingcn (q.v.) about 1345 (cf. P. Strauch, Heinrick von Ndrdlingen, pp. 246-247, Freiburg, 18S2). The first sue parts had already been translated into Latin with a wholly different arrangement and in this form are found in the Revelalionea Gerlnidina ae MechtkHdianiE. Matilda is distinguished from most female mystics by her pronounced individuality. Her spiritual experiences were remarkable and she stands in a firm position from which she can clearly distin- guish between the external and internal. Further- more, she is a real poetess, a true spiritual minne- singer. Her description of Mary and the birth of Jeaua (Morel, v. 23) is beautiful, her prayers {v. 35, vii. 41-^0) are devout and solemn, and she knows well how to express her thoughts in short sentences. As a faithful daughter of the Qiurch she feels its shortcomings and is not sparing with her censure. To her censures she adds predictions, in which the hlfluence of the writings of Joachim of Fiore (q.v.) is perceptible. But the greater part of her book deals with the inner life, and here Matilda betrays a depth and fulness of understanding which makes its study both attractive and fruitful. On the whole it is one of the most interesting works of mysticism, and a true treasure of medieval German literature. (S. M. DEOTSca.) Bibuochapht; Die Offenbarangtn der SchaeileT JlfecAttiW non .Vaffdeburg. odrr dot fiiatindi Lichl dir GoOhrit, ed. G. Morel, licsciubuig. ISQI; Santtn Meehlkildit lOta- ijuxialii [mihii anil Sororit Merhlhiidie lux dinnitaiU flucne in cerda vetitalii, is Rtrelatumci Qtrtnidiana ae MedMildiana. euro . . . SoUmentium O. S. M. twm- ucADTum. ii. I-4ZI BDd 435-707. Poria sad Poitiers. 1877; W. Preflcr, GeiehuAlt der deultchen ili/ilik im MiOtlalUr, i. 70-71. 91 nqq., Leipsic. 1874^ C. Grailh. £>u dnXicAa Ml/itik im Frediorrardim, pp. 207-277, Freiburg, tSfll; J. Mullcr. Leben vnd Offenbarungen der hextiffen MeAlkiid und der SchaeiUr MethlhUd. R^eiuburg, 1881.
MATILDA, COUHTESS OF TUSCANY MATILDA, COUNTESS OF TUSCANY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATILDA, COUNTESS OF TUSCANY: Sup- porter of the papacy; b. 1046; d. in the monastery of Bondeno de' Roncori July 24, 1115. A daugh- ter of Count Boniface of Tuscany and Beatrice of Lorraine, she inherited from her parents, while still a mere child, very extensive possessions in northern and central Italy, through which lay the roads from Germany and France to Rome. They were there- fore strategically important in the wars between emperor and pope. Her parentage was German, and her ancestors were adherents of the German emperors; but the treacherous manner in which Henry 111. treated her father induced the latter to support the papal position; and during the reigna of Nicholas II., Alexander II., Gregory VII., Vic- tor III., Urban II.. and Paschulis II., the Countess Matilda followed their course and waa the main- stay of the papacy. Specially intimate were her relations with Gregory VII., whom she sheltered more than once againat Henry IV. She continued the war against the emperor, even after Gregory's death. She was twice married, first to Godfrey of Lorraine, then to Duke Guelf of Bavaria; but her first marriage seems never to have been completAl, and from her second husband ahe was divorced. Her enormous wealth, bequeathed to the papal chair, formed part of the so-called " Patrimonium Petri " (see Papal States). BiBLionRAPitr; Tbe Vila by the monk Doniioce (Dom- niiQDe) !■ in best form ed., with two Epitoma, 1>. C, Bpllunana in UGH, Scripl.. lii I18M). 348-4W; or Hp- aralsly, e<i. F. Davoli, R*ggio-Eniili«. 1S8S. An eiMl- leal list of litetaturs is found in Pallhast. XVtmceiKr, p. 1488. ConnuJI: L. Tosti. La CdtiWjm Afatilde. Flonmw. 18511, now ad., Rorae, 1886; A. pjuiaeabgcs, ^ludim ntr liatixiB Matthew 262 Oetthiehte der nerxogin MaHlde von Canona, GOttingen, 1872; the bioKraphies by Mm. M. E. Huddy. London, 1005, and Mitw Nora Duff, ib., 1000: and the literature under Papal States, and under the artades on the popee named in the text.
MATINS MATINS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATINS: The office which, with its comple- ment Lauds (q.v.), forms the nocturnal part of the Breviary (q.v.), and in length amounts to about one-half of that for the whole day. On ordinary week-days and simple feasts it has only one divi- sion or nocturn; on Sundays and all feasts above the rank of simple, it has three, corresponding to the ancient Roman division of the night into three watches. After the silent recitation of the Lord's Prayer, Hail Mary, and Creed, it begins with the introductory versicles and responses, and Ps. xcv., interspersed with repetitions of the invitatory, a versicle referring to the day or season; then a hymn, varjring with the day, and the psalms, twelve on ordinary week-days, on festivals three to each nocturn. Each psalm or group of psalms has its Antiphon (q.v.) to bring out a special meaning for the day. The psalms are followed by the lessons, each with a short responsory. Those of the first (or on week-days the only) nocturn are taken from the Old Testament; those of the second from the lives of the saints or the writings of the Fathers; those of the third from some patristic exposition of the Gospel for the day. After the last lesson the place of the responsory is taken on Sundays (ex- cept in Advent and from Septuagesima to Easter), festivals, and week-days in the Paschal season, by the Te Deum, Before the Reformation, matins, like vespers, was frequently a public service attended by the laity, so that some account was early taken of it in the reorganization of worship. In the Deutscher Kirchenamtf probably as early as 1523, there is a reformed vernacular office based upon it. Luther wished to retain matins and vespers, and saw no need of making radical changes in them, since they were mainly taken from Scripture. He wished to shorten matins, and to read the whole Psalter and the rest of the Bible consecutively, adding exposi- tion on Sundays. In the Formula Missce of 1523 and tho Deutsche Mcsse of 1526, he sets forth his arrangement at some length. It was not at all uni- versally followed, especially in South Germany. The Reformed Churches knew nothing of it, and even where it was retained among the Lutherans there was no imiformity. In some places it was recited daily, in others on Sundays, and in others again only on great festivals; and the order of the serv- ice varied. In the nature of the case it was to be expected that this ancient service should gradually disappear; the last traces of it in Germany were retained on the three great festivals, especially Christmas; but none of the modern Agenda make any attempt to reproduce it. [In the Church of England Prayer-book (see Common Prayer, Book or) the vernacular office entitled " Morning Prayer," and colloquially designated as matins to this day, is a fusion of various features of the an- cient matins, lauds, and prime.] (P. Drews.) Bibuoorapht: Bingham, Origines, XIIL, iz. 10; A. J. Binterim, DenkwUrdigMUn, iv, 1, pp, 857 ■qq*. Mains, 1827; W. Pahner, Orioinet liturgiea, i, 213. Oxford, 1832; F. Armknecht, Die alte MtUutin- und VeBperardnunQ i» der evanoeliBchrlutheriathen Kirche, Gdttingen. 1850; T. Kliefoth. lAturgische Abhandlungen, vi. 186 aqq.. m 438 sqq., 489 aqq.. viii. 164 sqq.. HaOe. 1850-61; F. X. Kraufl, Real-EncyklopQdie de$ ehri$iliehen AUeii^tmu, fi. 630 sqq.. Freiburg, 1886; V. Thalhofer, Handbudi dar katholUchen lAturgik, u. 368. 434 aqq^ 460. Fraibmi. 1893; KL, viii. 1042 aqq.; and much of the Utentun under BaEViAaT.
HATTHEW PARIS MATTHEW PARIS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATTHEW PARIS: English chronicler; b. in or near St. Albans not much before 1200; d. there, probably in June, 1259. [The origin of the desig- nation " Paris " is questionable. It has been at- tributed to a supposed (but doubtful) sojourn in the city of Paris during his studies: the claim is aUo made that it was his family name. The latter supposition is difficult (though not impossible), as the period is early for surnames.J He was educated in the abbey school, and became (Jan. 21, 1217) a monk in this famous monastery, which, founded in 1077, had become a great center of light and learn- ing, and since the time of Abbot Simon (Ile7-S3) bad paid special attention to literary and partic- ularly historical production by its monks. Matthew was placet! in chai^ of the scriptorium or writing- room in 1236 and retained this office until his death. He frequently visited London, Canterbury, and Winchester, gaining some knowledge of the great world outride his cloister, and made one visit to Norway (1248) to reform the abliey of Niderhoim near Trondhjem, He rightly regarded the writing of history, for which he had not only special facili- ties but special talent, as his life-work. Hia fame tests principaOy on his Chmnira majora. written in the usual form of annals. Up to 1285 it is a recasting and enlai^ment of the Flares hUtor- lorum of Roger of Wendover, from that data to 1259 entirely independent. He wrote also a history of the abbey of St, Albana in the form of biographies of the abbots; Liier addilamtrUorum, a collection of documents to serve as a supplement to the Chronica; lives of the two Offas, kings of Mercia, of Stephen Langton and Eklmund Rich, archbishops of Canterbury, and of St. Richard of Chichester. The Chronicle is distinguished by many virtues: an insatiable desire for accurate information, keen realization of the difference between essentials and non-essentials, a. broad view of Christianity, outspoken boldness even when deahng with kings and popes, clearness and beauty of style. He is an admirable representative of the English public opinion of his day. Matthew was unusually privQeged in having frequent opportuni- ties of intercourse not only with courtiers but with kings, who valued him highly and took a deep inter- est in his work. But hia opportunities would have counted for little if he had not possesaed a mind that knew how to search further for any piece of information of value in any part of the civilitcd world, and to make prompt and systematic use of the knowledge thus gained. He ranks as the first great English historian. (H. BOhuer.) Bibuoobiipbt: The HiiloHa Xnploruiii. ed. F. Madden, ii DO. 44 in Rollt Striet, 3 vols., London. ISOS-DO: and the Chnmica majora. ed. H. R. Luard, a no. 57 of the aame, 7 vols., ib. 1872-84 (the prefaces to those works an of oopecial value); the Liber additametUorum a in Luard, ui nip.. Tol. vi.; excerpts from Matlhew'g wnrke. ed. F. Liebormann. am in «(?H. Scrip!., irviil ((888), 74-466; the Chronica in Eng. tranal. is in BoAn'i ^nriquarian LJArxrv. 3 vote., London. 1852-E4. (Jontnill: T.D.IIardy, DmcripUva Calatoipit of MaUriali, Do. 28 in RolU Serial, vol. iii., prefaoe. London. 1871; A. Je«aop. Studiti bu a Aicluai. pp. 1-es. ib. 1893 Ibd appreciation): H. Plebn, Drr pBlititehe Characlir MatOimii Pariricntit, Leipaie, 1897; GroH. Saaroa, pp. 299-300; DtIB, xhii. 203-213, ef. ixsv. 292. MATTHEW, THOMAS; Pseudonym for John RogeiB (q.v.); see also Bible Vehbionb, B, IV., J 4. HATTHEW, TOBEE (TOBIAS): Anglican prel- ate and statesman; b. in Bristol 1546; d. at Cawood Castle (0 m. s. of York) March 29. 1628. He was graduated from Oxford {B.A., 1563-64; M. A., 1566; B.D., 1573; D.D., 1574); was chosen public orator of the univeraity, 1569; appointed canon of Christ Church, 1570; archdeacon of Bath, and prebendary of Teynton Regis in the cathedral of Salisbury, 1572; the same year he was made president of St. John's College; dean of Christ Church, 1576; vice-chancellor of the university, 1579; dean of Durham, 15S3; vicar of Bishop's Wearmouth, 1590; bishop of Durham, 1595; archbishop of York, 1606. Matthew was in his day a noted orator, a preacher of high repute, faithful even to punctiliousness in the performance of the duties of his bishopric, a diligent guardian of the royal and national interests in the northern counties, and a man of quiet humor and earnest piety. His only pubUcation seems to have been a Concio apologetica adversv^ Campianum, which was circulated in manuscript form some time prior to hia death and printed only after his death (London, 1638).
MATTHIAS MATTHIAS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MATTHIAS: According to Acts i. 23, one of the witnesses of the ministry, death, and resur- rection of Jesus. He was therefore received among the Twelve, but no traditions have been preserved regarding his activity, although the early Church con- sidered him one of the seventy disciples. The third and fourth centuries possessed a heretical Gospel of Matthias (see Apocrypha, B, I., 28). (A. Hauck.)
MAULBRONN MAULBRONN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAULBRONN : A little town of Wurttemberg, 23 m. n.w. of Stuttgart, noteworthy as the seat of a former Cistercian monastery and as the place where a Protestant conference was held in 1564 and a formula drawn up in 1576. The monastery was founded about 1138 by Walter of The Lomersheim at a distance of an hour Monastery, and a half from the present village, whence it was transferred by Bishop Gunther of Speyer, between Aug., 1146, and May, 1147, to the valley of the Salzach, w^here it still forms one of the best-preserved monasteries in Germany. Its daughter abbeys were Bronnbach (1151) and Schonthal (1157). At the beginning of the Reformation it was a center of the monks who remained faithful to the Roman Catholic Church; but in 1557 it received a Protestant abbot, although for a short time during the Thirty Years' War it again came under Roman Catholic control. It is now the seat of a famous theological seminary. The Colloquy of Maulbronn arose from the intro- duction of Calvinism into the Palatinate by the Elector Frederick III., and especially from the formulation of the Heidelberg Catechism in 1563 (see Heidelberg Catechism; and Philippists). The neighboring Lutheran princes, seek- Thc Collo- ing both to unite Protestantism and to quy of maintain pure doctrine, proposed to Maulbronn. Frederick (Oct. 4, 1563) to hold a confer- ence of the rival schools in the presence of the princes. Though at first reluctant, Frederick finally consented to a secret " friendly colloquy" to be held at Maulbronn immediately after Easter, the theme to be the meaning of the words of institution. The conference, attended by Frederick and Duke Christopher of Wurttemberg, with an imposing array of theologians and officials on either side, was accordingly held in ten sessions on Apr. 10-15, 1564. Eight of these were consumed in a debate on the ubiquity of the body of Christ, without reaching any conclusion whatsoever; and the remaining sessions were devoted to an equally useless attempt to reach harmony in Eucharistic doctrine. The princes, hard pressed by affairs of state, put an end to the fruitless debates, and on Apr. 17 the protocols were compared and signed, the two princes exchanging written statements of their several l)eliefs. Despite the bond of secrecy, the affair leaked out through letters in which the Calvinists bojistcd that they had triumphed over the Lutherans. The result was a series of publications of the transactions of the conference. These were, on the Lutheran side, J. Brenz, Wahrhaff tiger und griincUlicher Berichi vandem GesprOck zwischen dea ChtafHrsien Pfalb- gra/en und des Hertzogm zu Wwrthemberg Theologoi von des Herm Nachtmahl zu MatUbronn gehaUen (Frankfort, 1564; Lat. ed., 1564); ProtocoU des Gesprechs . . . dern Original gleichforrnig, one Zuaab und Abbruch (TQbingen, 1565); Erkldrung der WurUembergischen Theologen Bekanndtnuss , . . der wahrhaff tigen Gegenwdrtigkeit ... im heUigen Abendmahl (1565); and LeUie Antwort der Wirttem- bergischen Theologen wider die Heydelbergische (1566). On the Calvinistic side appeared ProtocoU, das trf. Acta Oder Handlungen des Gesprechs ewischen den Pf&Uzischen und Wirtembergischen Theologen . . . Hem, der Wirtembergischen Theologen von gemddtem Gesprech desselben Jares aussgangener Bericht, sanU der PfdUzischen Theologen wahrhafftigem und bester^ digem Gegenbericht (Heidelberg, 1565; Lat. ed., 1*566); Solida refutatio sophismatum et cavillationum quibus Wurtenbergid totam controversiam incrustave- runt (1565); and Bestendige Antwort der P/dUzi' schen Theologen auf der Wirtembergischen Theologen Erklarung und Bekenntniss (1566). The ensuing controversy involved the theologians of Wittenberg and elsewhere, who decided against the Calvinistic position. Duke Christopher, however, alarmed by the growth of Calvinism in Germany, appealed in addition to the Evangelical princes, and it was only through the energetic intervention of the Elector Frederick at the Diet of Augsburg in 1566 that the threatened storm was averted. Far more peaceable was the conference held at Maulbronn in 1576, at which theologians from Wurttemberg, Baden, and Henneberg drew up the "Maulbronn formula," one of the The bases of the "Formula of Concord" " Maulbronn (q. v.) . In conformity with the desire of Formula." the Elector August of Saxony to secure doctrinal unity among the Evangelical churches of Germany, a preliminary dociunent was drafted at Stuttgart on Nov. 14, 1575, which formed the basis of the formula adopted at Maulbronn on Jan. 19, 1576 (first printed by T. Pressel in Jahr- biicherfur deutsche Theologie, 1866, 640-711). This was sent to August, who, about the same time, received the Swabo-Saxon formula of Duke Julius of Brunswick. At the Conference of Torgau, opened May 28, 1576, the latter was made the basis of discussion, though with the incorporation of all the essentials of the Maulbronn formula, the result being the *' Book of Torgau." In September of the same year a second conference of theologians from Wurttemberg, Baden, and Henneberg was held at Maulbronn, at which the "Book of Torgau" was ratified in all essentials. (E. Nestle.) Bibliography: On the monastery, besides the literature under Cistercians, consult: F. Eisenlohr, Mittelalier- liche Bauwerke im siXdweatlichen Deutsehland, Carlsruhe, 1853-57; J. and P. Hartmann, Wegweiser durch da9 Klo9- ter Maulbronn, Stuttgart, 1875; E. Paulus, Die CxMUr- zienserabtei MatUbronn, Stuttgart, 1889; E. Bassler, Kleiner Fiihrer durch dae Kloater Maulbronn, Maiilbronn, 1902; A. Metder, Zur Klosterardage der Zisterzienser und tur Bau- Oeschichte Maulbronna, Stuttgart, 1909. On the Maulbronn (Colloquy consult: G. J. Planck, Geschichte . . . unaers proteatantiechen Lehrhegriffe, v. 2, pp. 487 sqq.. 6 vols., Leipsic, 1791-1800; H. L. J. Heppe, Geachichte dea deutachen ProteatantiemiM, ii. 71 sqq., Frank- fort, 1865-66; A. Kluckhohn, Friedrich der Fromme, pp. 166 sqq., Ndrdlingen, 1876-79.
REUGIOUS ENCYCLOPEDIA MAOBDY THDRSDAY MAUNDY THURSDAY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAUNDY THURSDAY: The day before Easter, also called Holy Thursday. The word " maundy " is derived from the Latin mandatum (commandment), referring to John xiii. 34, and the day commemo- rates the institution of the Lord's Supper and the washing of the disciples' feet. See Holy Week, | 4.
MADRICE OF SAXOHY MAURICE OF SAXONY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAURICE OF SAXONY: Elector of Saxony; b. at Freiberg Mar. 21, 1521; d. at Sievershausen (Ifi m. e. of Hanover) July 11, 1553. He succeeded his father as duke of Saxony in 1541, and obtained the electoral dignity after the battle of Muhlberg, 1547. Though he had embraced the Reformation, and, together with his father, signed the Schmalkald Articles, he refused to join the League, probably becau.'te be considered the organization too weak, and his own position in it too subordinate, to form the basis for his ambitious schemes; and at the Diet of Regensburg (q^v.), where he and Duke Eric of Brunswick were the only Protestant princes present, ho made a secret alliance with the Emperor Charles V. Accordingly, when the war broke out, he marched his troops into the territory of his cousin, the elector of Saxony, and conquered the country. But as soon as the elector, who stood in Upper Germany with a well-appointed army, heard of this treachery, he hastened back to Saxony, and not only reconquered his own land, but also expelled Maurice from his dukedom. The emperor came to his rescue; and at the Diet of Augsburg (Feb. 24, I51S) he was solemnly invested with a large portion of his cousin's territory and the electoral dignity. He rejected the Augsburg Interim; but the Leipsic Interim, which he suljstituted after conferring with Melanchthon, Btigenhagen, and others, proved as vn.— 17 hateful to his subjects. Realizing that the Reforma- tion would not be kept apart from politics as a purely religious issue, he decided to place himself at the head of the movement, driven onward, no doubt, also by indignation at the emperor's failh- leasneas toward his father-in-law, Philip of Hesse, and by fear of the intrigues recently set on foot to supersede King Ferdinand, the emperor's brother, and fasten the succession on Don Philip, the emper- or's son, but a Spaniard. Concealing his plans with great adroitness, he gathered a great army, formed an alliance with France, and suddenly fell upon the emperor at Innsbruck, and compelled him to Hy for his life across the Alps. By the mediation of King Ferdinand, the Treaty of Passau was brought about (1552), and full rchgious liberty was granted to the Protestants. Maurice now completely r^ gained the confldence of his coreligionists; but he had only a short time to avail himself of the great opportunities thereby offered him. In a feud with the margrave of Brandenburg he was severely wounded, and died a few days after. See Imterih; and AUOBB0BG, RBnaiotjB Peace of. Bibliography: F. A, van LAnffenn, MotxU, Henoff uruf ChuTfUrtl lu 5acAi«<. 2 parto, L«ipsii% 1841: E. Uruiden- burg. Maria von Sachtm, Lcipse, ISS8. Canault further: O. Winckelmann. Der Khmalkaiduichen Bund. ISSOSt, SlrMbiiTK. 1892; J. Jsnasen. Hi*t. of Ou German People, vi. 30S aqq.. St. Luuia, 1003.
SOS MAURICE, JOHN FREDERICK DENISON

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAURICE, JOHN FREDERICK DENISON: Church of England theologian, metaphy- sician, and educator; b. at Normanston near Lowes- loft (20 m. B.W. of Norwich), Suffolk, Aug. 29, 1805; d. in London Apr. 1, 1872. He entered Cambridge in 1823, but left in 1S27 without taking a degree because he was unable to subscribe; but went to Oxford in 1830, and was ordained to the ministry of the Church of England in 1834. He was chaplain of Guy's Hospital, 1836-46,- became professor of English literature and history at King's College, London, 1840; was Boyle lecturer. 1846-47, and Warburton lecturer, 1846; became chaplain of Lincoln's Inn. 1846; assisted in the founding of Queen's College, 1848, and of the College for Work- ing Men, London, 1854, of which tatter he became principal; was appointed to St, Peter's, Vere Street, London, 1860; became Knightbridge professor of casuistry, moral theology, and moral philosophy at Cambridge, 1866, retaining charge of St, Peter's till 1869; was appointed to St, Edward's, Cambridge, 1870, and was Cambridge preacher at Whitehall, 1871-72. Maurice came of Unitarian parentage, and his early career was somcwliat handicapped by the scruples and limitations involved. But under the influence of the writings of Coleridge he worked hia way to an Evangelical position, though the changes in his personal attitude made him ever unwilling to attach himself to any party in the Church. The result was that throughout his life the independence of his thought, sometimes ex- pressed fMjlemically, as well as his dissent from the extremes of the two wings in the Church, brought upon him much of discomfort through the many attacks to which he was subjected. He had a natural aptitude for metaphysics, and in the devel- opment of his theology his popularity v.ag often Kanrioe XazimuB Con&SBor 258 hindered by the profundity of his statements. He was one of the men who profoundly influenced thought both in England and in America. Tlus he did not less by the fact that he was a voluminous writer than by his sincerity and earnestness, being always ready to resign a position rather than to be deemed insincere in holding it, and by his essen- tially irenic disposition. His industry was remark- able, as is attested by the number of his works (cf. G. J. Gray, Bibliography of the Writings of F. D, Maurice^ London, 1885). The most important of these are: The Kingdom of Christ, or Hints to a Quaker Respecting the Principle, Constitution, and Ordinances of the Catholic Church (3 vols., London, 1837, 3d ed., 1883); The Epistle to the Hebrews (Warburtonian Lectures; 1846); The Religions of the World and their Relations to Christianity (Boyle Lectures; Cambridge, 1847); The Old Testament, Nineteen Sermons (London, 1851 ; 2d ed. issued as Patriarchs ami Lawgivers of the Old Testament, Cambridge, 1855); Theological Essays (London, 1853) ; The Prophets and Kings of the Old Testament (Cambridge, 1853); Ecclesiastical History of the First arul Second Centuries (1854); Claims of the Bible and of Science (on the Colenso controversy; 1863); The Gospel of the Kingdom of Heaven; a Course of Lectures on the Gospel of Luke (1864); The Conscience; Lectures on Casuistry (London, 1868); Moral and Metaphysical Philosophy (2 vols., 1871-72); and The Friendship of Books, and Other Lectures, ed. T. Hughes (1874). Matthew Arnold's remark that Maurice was always beating the bush bu'. never started the hare is accepted as just by many who think that Maurice has been much ovc rrated, and that his " profimdity " is frequently allied with obscurity. Bibliography: Life of Frederick Deniaon Maurice^ chiefly told in his own Letters, ed. by hit Son, Frederick Maurice, London, 1884; C. Fox, Memories of Old Friends, vol. ii. paHHirn, ib. 1882; C. G. F. Maflterman, Frederick Denison Maurice, ib. 1907; DNB. xxxvii. 97-106.
JULIUS VERUS MAXIMINUS THRAX, CAIUS JULIUS VERUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAXIMINUS THRAX, CAIUS JULIUS VERUS: Roman emperor, 235-238; b. of Gothic and Alan parentage in Thrace, probably in 173; d. at Aquileia (the modern Aquileja, 21 m. w.n.w. of Triest) June 17, 238. The first barbarian to occupy the throne of the Caesars, he was in early life a cowherd and later a cavalryman. Eight feet in height, and powerful and brave in proportion, he gained the favor of Alexander Severus, who made him a senator and the head of a legion, as well as a trainer of the recruits among his compatriots. In the campaign against the Germans, the soldiers proclaimed Maximinus emperor. In terror of the troops, the senate confirmed their choice, but the new emperor never came to Rome, preferring to remain with his soldiers and conquer the Germans, after which he went to Pannonia. But the brutality of his rule, accentuated by his suspicious nature and his knowledge of his lack of culture, resulted in a cruelty and oppression which led to his assassina- tion. Shortly after his accession to the throne, Mazi- 259 Manrioe ICazixxiuB Oonfesoor minus issued an edict against all the Christian clergy, but it was practically disregarded, Sulpicius Severus mentioning only the occasional application of torture during this reign. In Rome the bishop Pontianus and the priest Hippolytus were banished, while Origen, who was a special object of the emper- or's hatred on accoimt of his relations with the household of Alexander Severus, found refuge in the home of Juliana, a Christian woman. In Pon- tus and Cappadocia the persecution was more severe, but there it was inspired rather by popular anger at the Christians because of an earthquake, than by the imperial decree. Although the perse- cution of Maximinus was in itself unimportant, it was the first systematic, general attack upon the new faith. He was the first to recognize the impor- tance of the Christian hierarchy and to seek to annihilate it, thus furnishing a precedent for Vale- rian and Diocletian. His precise motive is difiicult to determine; he gave no worship to the Greco- Roman deities, and possibly the persecution was due simply to the desire of Maximinus to strengthen his position so far as possible, and to prevent any Chris- tian rebellion against himself. (G. UHLHORNt.) Bibliography: The subject is covered from the secular side in the works on the history of Rome of the period, and on the Christian side in those on the history of the Church of that time. See also literature under Perbe- cunoNB OP Christianb in the Roman Empire. Refer- ence may be made here to Gorres, in ZWT, iv., 1876; J. C. L. Gieseler, Church HUtory, ed. H. B. Smith, i. 177, New York. 1868; B. Aub^, Les ChrHiena dans Vempire romain, pp. 418-460. Paris, 1881; K. J. Neu- mann, Der rdmiache Stoat und die tUlgemeine Kirehe, i. 210 sqq.. Leipeic. 1890; SchaflF. Chritiian Church, ii. 69.
MAXIMUS MARGUNIOS MAXIMUS MARGUNIOS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAXIMUS MARGUNIOS: Greek bishop and theologian; b. in Crete; d. at Venice 1602. In 1579 he became a monk, and later was consecrated bishop of Kythera (the modem Cerigo), but resided chiefly at Venice. He was the most learned theologian of the period, and his life was devoted to the upbuilding of his church and his people. His unionistic tendencies, particularly in his doctrine of the Trinity, occasionally brought him into sharp conflict with Gabriel Severus and even with the ecclesiastical authorities at Constantinople. Never- theless, he recognized the difficulty of a union under the primacy of the pope, and was, on the other hand, an opponent of Protestantism, being prob- ably the soul of the movement which led Jeremiah to refuse to unite with the Tubingen Lutherans. Margimios was a prolific editor and author, al- though the majority of his writings are still inedited. His chief published works are: " Manual on the Procession of the Holy Ghost," and a treatise on the divine permission of evil, both contained in his " Two Epistles" (Frankfort, 1591); Brevis tractatus de con- ailiis atque prcecepHs evangeltcis (Venice, 1602) ; and " Lives of the Saints " (1603) . (Philipp Me ybr.) Bibliography: For the best lists of literature and accounts of the man consult: "&. Legrand. Bibliographie hellenique, ii., pp. xxiii.-Ixxvi., Paris, 1886; P. Meyer, Die Aeoloipr ache LdttenUur der griechiacken Kirchet Leipsic, 1800.
MAXIMUS OF TX7RIN MAXIMUS OF TURIN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAXIMUS OF TURIN: Bishop of Turin; b., probably in the Rhaetian Alps, about 380; d. after 465, although Gennadius states that he died in 420. The only details known concerning his life are that in 451 he attended the Synod of Milan and that in 465 at the Roman synod he signed immediately after Pope Hilarius. He also witnessed the martyr- dom of three missionary priests at Anaimia in the Rhaetian Alps in 397. He was deeply influenced in his training by Ambrose, whose works include many sermons by Maximus. His numerous writings, 116 sermons, 117 homilies, and 3 tractates on baptism, are important for the history of Christian life while paganism was still strong, especially in the rural districts, and while the migration of peoples was in full course. His ninety-fourth homily alludes to the destruction of Milan by Attila, and be also refers to the cult of "Diana, the divinity of the fields,'' in whose honor the priests wounded or intoxicated themselves; the games and divination which marked the festival of the new year; and the custom of " helping " the moon by outcries at its eclipse. He sought to calm the terror felt at the barbarian inroads, and urged his people to remain constant in their faith, yet rebuked ,them sternly for their readiness to profit by the withdrawal of the Huns by purchasing the plunder and even the slaves which the invaders were unable to take away. (R. Schmid.) Bibliography: The extant writings are most conveniently consulted in MPL, Ivii. For accounts of the man con- sult: Gennadius, De vir. ill., xl.; O. Bardenhewer, Patro- logie, p. 497, Freiburg, 1804; and DCB, iii. 881-882. The legends collected in ASB, June, v. 48 sqq., are without historical value.
MAY, JOHANN HEINRICH MAY, JOHANN HEINRICH

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAY, JOHANN HEINRICH: German Pietist; b. at Pforzheim (16 m. s.e. of Carlsruhe) Feb. 5, 1653; d. at Giessen Sept. 3, 1719. He studied at the University of Wittenberg, which he entered in 1671 ; while going to Sweden, he made at Hamburg the acquaintance of the Orientalist E. Edzard, with whom he studied the Bible, the Talmud, Arabic, and Syriac. After a winter in Copenhagen, he re- sumed his studies at Hamburg, but was recalled by his father to southern Germany. At Leipsic he became acquainted with J. B. Carpzov, and at Strasburg with S. Schmidt; but a more profound influence was exerted on him by H. Ludolf, whom he aided in reading the proof of his Historia jEthiojnca (Frankfort, 1681). From Frankfort, where he had become imbued with the pietism of Spener, he went for a short time to Veldenz as court preacher to the palsgrave, but in 1684 was appointed by the elector professor of Oriental languages at the gymnasium of Durlach, where he was also pastor of St. Stephen's. In 1688 he was called to Giessen as professor of Oriental languages. Here he passed the remainder of his life, becoming second professor of theology, ptedagogiarch, bursar, superintendent of Alsfeld, and assessor of the consistory. Of May's numerous works none has borne the d6S ICazimaa Oonfeaaor test of time except his edition of the Hebrew Bible, a revision of the work of his predecessor at Giessen, David Clodius (Frankfort, 1692). His importance lies in the fact that he powerfully influenced the pietistic reformation of the theological faculty at Giessen. When he entered Giessen, he found scant opportunity for a practical propagation of his views; but in 1689 he annoimoed a course of private studies on Romans, in continuation of his confirma- tion-class, to which both children and adults were invited. This evoked a formal protest to the prince on the part of May's colleague, P. L. Hannecken, which led to a controversy which finally caused the retirement of Hannecken in 1693. His successor, Bilefeld, used his influence both as professor and court preacher to break down the opposition of the orthodox party, and by 1695 the pietistic reform was complete. In this latter phase of the conflict May took little public part, but his quiet activity conduced far more to the victory of Pietism than was apparent on the surface. (Erwin Preubchen.) Bibliography: The basal source, apart from the archives at Darmstadt, is the memorial oration by J. G. Schupart, Giessen, 1723. Consult: F. W. Strieder, Orundlage zu einer hessischen Oelehrien- und SchrifUteUergeBchichUt viii. 326 sqq.. Cassel, 1788; W. K6hler, Die Anfdnge de» Pietismus in Oieaaetit vol. i., Giessen, 1907.
MAY, SAMUEL JOSEPH MAY, SAMUEL JOSEPH

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAY, SAMUEL JOSEPH: American Unitarian; b. in Boston, Mass., Sept. 12, 1797; d. at Syra- cuse, N. Y., July 1, 1871. He was graduated at Harvard College in 1817, attended the divinity school, was ordained in 1822, and was pastor at Brooklyn, Conn. (1822-35), South Scituate, Mass. (1836-42), and Syracuse, N. Y. (1845-68). He was an earnest anti-slavery advocate, and from 1836 to 1854 he was the general agent of the Massachusetts Antislavery Society. He wrote: Some Recollec- tions of our Anti-Slavery Conflict (Boston, 1869). Bibliography: T. J. Mumford, Memoir of Samuel Joseph May, Boston. 1873.
MAYER, EMIL HUGO WALTHER MAYER, EMIL HUGO WALTHER

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAYER, EMIL HUGO WALTHER: German Lutheran; b. at Lyons, France, Sept. 9, 1854. He was educated at the Lyons Lyceum and at the University of Berlin, where he studied from 1872 to 1876 (Ph.D., Halle, 1879). He was a teacher at the Königliches Friedrich-Wilhelms-Gymnasium in Ber- lin from 1880 to 1893, and in the latter year accepted the appointment of associate professor of syste- matic theology in the University of Strasburg, where he was promoted to his present position of full professor in 1900. In theology he is an adherent of the scientific school, and has written : Das Verkdlt- nis der Kantischen Religionsphilosophie zum Gamen des Kantischen Systems (Berlin, 1879); Die christ- liche Moral in ihrem Verhdltnis zum staatlichen Recht (1892) ; Das christliche Gotivertrauen und der Glaube an Christus (Gottingen, 1899); Ueber die Aufgaben der Dogmaiik (Tiibingen, 1902); Die Aufgabe der innem Mission gegenuber der gegenwdrtigen Gefahr- dung der christlichen Lebensanschauung durch antichristliche Geistesstromungen (Bnmswick, 1903); Der christliche Gottesglaube und die naturwissen- schaftliche Welterkldrung (Strasburg, 1904) ; Christen- tum und KuUur (Berlin, 1905); Das psychologische Wesen der Religion (Strasburg, 1906); and con- tributed to Philoiesia (in honor of Paul Kleinert's seventieth birthday; Berlin, 1907).
MAYER, JOHANN FRIEDRICH MAYER, JOHANN FRIEDRICH

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAYER, JOHANN FRIEDRICH: German po- lemical writer and orator; b. in Leipsic Dec. 6, 1650; d. in Stettin March 30, 1712. He studied in Leipsic, taking his master's degree in 1668, and in Strasburg. He was appointed Saturday preacher in Leipsic in 1672, and pastor and superintendent at Leisnig in 1673, whence, in 1678, he was called to Grimma. His one desire was for an academic life, and on April 7, 1684, he accepted the appointment as fourth pro- fessor of theology at Wittenberg, becoming at the same time substitute preacher for Quenstedt in the Castle church of the town. It was here that he was awakened to a more earnest understanding of Christianity by Spener (q.v.), whom he praised in his first sermon given before the venerable Calov. Mayer shone in argument and was a very popular preacher and lecturer. In spite of scandal caused by his unhappy marital relations, he was appointed preacher at the St. Jacob's Church in Hamburg, 1686. Although gratified at his promotion, Mayer had no wish to give up his academic vocation, but Spener did not retain him, and his attempt to hold his position as professor and dean of the theological faculty at Wittenberg failed, though he succeeded in obtaining the post of extraordinary professor at the Hamburg Academy, and in addition was made honorary professor of the theological faculty at Kiel in 1687. On Quenstedt's death. May 22, 1688, Mayer made another attempt to be reinstated as professor in Wittenberg University, but in spite of the representations of Johann Winckler (q.v.) Spener was unyielding. From this time, Mayer ranged himself on the side of Spener's opponents. Among the many religious controversies at that period was one relating to the opera. Mayer and Winckler were opposed to each other on this ques- tion, the latter having attacked operatic represen- tations in July, 1686. In the ensuing conflict, Mayer gained a victory over Winckler before the senate and ministry. In the controversy on the " religious oath " Mayer took a prominent part, and appealed for a decision to the theological faculties, while his opponents sought the support of several distinguished theologians outside Ham- burg, and in particular of Spener, against whom Mayer vented his personal animosity. Mayer was even more bitter in his controversy with Joliann Heinrich Horb (q.v.). He discovered every con- ceivable heresy — Pelagian, popish, Socinian, quaker- ish, and Arminian — ^in a pamphlet put in circulation but not written by Horb, entitled Klugheit der Gerechten (Hamburg, 1693), and although Horb ex- plained that it was to be understood only according to the "analogy of faith," Mayer induced the min- isters of Hamburg to withhold the sacrament from Horb, who fled the city. Mayer's standing in Ham- burg had been greatly injured by the whole con- troversy, but he was more than ever honored as a theologian and scholar in other countries, and trav- eled to Sweden and Holland, making the friendship of kings and princes, and receiving titles and honors. He was appointed general superintendent in Pom- erania and Rügen, president of the consistory, professor primarius, procancellarius perpetuus, and pastor of St. Nicholas Church in Greifswald. He wished to still retain his Hamburg pastorate, but as T«r M4 this was refused him, he induced his friends to have him recalled to St. Jacob's Church, which, after violent controversy, they did in 1704. But Mayer now wrote to the senate that he had no desire to leave the king's service, and Charles XII. declared that Mayer had no thought of going to Hamburg, and increased his stipend and retained him. Mayer held the theological decanate in Greifswald for eight years. When the Russian General Buck, in Janu- ary, 1712, requested him to omit the war prayer or give up preaching, he chose the latter and went to Stettin where he died. Before leaving Hamburg he published the first hymn-book for standard use, containing two sacramental hymns by him. The titles of 581 pieces from his pen are given in the sketch found in Lexikon der hambwrgischen SchrifUieUer, V. 89-164, Hamburg, 1870. (Cahl Berthbau.) Bibliography: J. Geffcken, Johann Winckler und die ham' burgische Kirche seiner Zeit, Hamburg, 1864; idem, in ZeiUchrift dee Vereine fUr hamburgiecke Oeachichtet i (1841), 667 Bqq.; ADD, xxi. 09 aqq.; and the literature under HoBB, Johann Hsxnrich.
MAYER, KARL JULIUS MAYER, KARL JULIUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAYER, KARL JULIUS : German Roman Cath- olic; b. at Buhl (26 m. s.w. of Carlsruhe), Baden, Mar. 12, 1857. After completing his education at the University of Freiburg, he was parish priest in Hastatt, Mannheim, and Bruchsal until 1896, when he became director of the archiepiscopal theological seminary at Freiburg, a position which he retained three years. Since 1899 he has been professor of moral theology in the University of Freiburg. Besides editing the new series of the Freiburger Diozesan-Archiv (Freiburg, 1900-04), he has written Geschichte der Benediktiner-Abtei St. Peter auf dem Schwarzwald (Freiburg, 1893); Leben des heiligen Ulrichs (1893); Die christliche Askese, ihr Wesen und ihre Entfaltung (1894); and Der heilige Konrad, Bischof von Konstanz und Patron der Erzdidzese Freiburg (1898).
MAYHEW, EXPERIENCE MAYHEW, EXPERIENCE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAYHEW, EXPERIENCE: Missionary to the Indians; b. in Martha's Vineyard, Mass., Jan. 27, 1673; d. there Nov. 29, 1758. He came of parentage which for three generations had done missionary work among the Indians, and he himself began to preach to them in 1694, devoting his life to the service. In 1709 he finished a version of the Psalms and of John for the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in New England (Boston, 1709, cf. C. Evans, American Bibliography, i. 198-199, Chicago, 1903). He also published a work upon Indian Converts (1727), giving an account of thirty Indian ministers and some eighty other pious Indians (reprinted 1729). In connection with a Discourse Shewing that God Dealeth with Men as Reasonable Creatures (Boston, 1720) he gave A Brief Account of the State of the Indians on Martha's Vineyard . . . 1694-1709. Bibliography: W. B. Sprague. Annals of the American Pulpit, i. 133, New York. 1869.
MAYHEW, JONATHAN MAYHEW, JONATHAN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAYHEW, JONATHAN: New England minis- ter; b. in Martha's Vineyard, Mass., Oct. 8, 1720; d. in Boston July 9, 1766. He was graduated at Harvard College 1744; entered the ministry, and in 1747 he was called to the West Church, Boston, maintaining the connection throughout his life. He was an earnest preacher and an accomplished controversialist. He was especially noted as a vigorous opponent of the Society for the Propaga- tion of the Gospel in Foreign Parts, because he, in common with intelligent New-Englanders generally, regarded it as a mere disguise for introducing prelacy. He was also an ardent patriot and did much to hasten the Revolution. In this connection he issued a Discourse concerning unlimited submis' sion and non-resistance to the higher powers: with some reflections on the resistance made to King Charles /., and on the anniversary of his death: in which the mysterious doctrine of that Prince's saint- ship and martyrdom is unriddled (Boston, 1750, reprinted there 1818, 1867, 1876, and in Thornton's Pulpit of the American Revolution, Boston, 1860). He also published Observations on the charter and conduct of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign Parts (1763). Other works by him are cited by full titles in C. Evans, American Bibliog- raphy, consult index, iii. 424, Boston, 1905. Biblioorapht: A. Bradford. Memoir qf the Ufe and ITri- tings of Jonathan Mayhew, Boston. 1838; W. Walker. Ten New England Leaders, pp. 293. 208. 333, 339. New York, 1901: F. H. Foster. Hist, of New England Theology, pp. 131-133. Chicago, 1907.
MAZARIN BIBLE MAZARIN BIBLE

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MAZARIN BIBLE: The first complete book printed in the West from movable type. It receives its name from the fact that " a copy in the library of Cardinal Mazarin first attracted the attention of bibliographers " in 1760 (See Bible Versions, A, II., 2, § 4). It was printed by Gutenberg, in Mainz, 1450-55, but is without date or place. There are two sorts of copies of this Bible, that on paper, which is the earlier, and that on vellum. Bibliography: S. A. Allibone, in Literary World, Boston, Nov. 18, 1882.
MEAD, CHARLES MARSH MEAD, CHARLES MARSH

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEAD, CHARLES MARSH: Congregational- ist; b. at Cornwall, Vt., Jan. 28, 1836. He was educated at Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vt. (A.B., 1856), after which he taught for two years (1856-58) at Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass., and one year (1858-59) at Middlebury College. He received his theological education at Andover Theological Seminary, from which he was graduated in 1862. He then studied at the universities of Halle and Berlin until 1866 (Ph.D., Tübingen, 1866), and on his return to the United States was appointed professor of Hebrew in Andover Theological Sem- inary, a position which he held until 1882. He then spent ten years in Germany, and from 1892 until his retirement from active life in 1898 was profes- sor of Christian theology in Hartford Theological Seminary. In 1872 he became a member of the American Bible Revision Committee (Old Testa- ment). In addition to preparing the volume on Exodus for the American edition of J. P. Lange's commentary on the Bible (New York, 1876), and be- sides translating a portion of I. A. Dorner's '' System of Christian Ethics" (in collaboration with R. T. Cunningham; 1887), he has written The Soul Here and Hereafter: A Biblical Study (Boston, 1879); Supernatural Revelation: An Essay concerning the Basis of the Christian Faiih (L. P. Stone lectures at Princeton Theological Seminary; New York, 1889); Romans Dissected (under the pseudonym E. D. McRealsham; 1891); Christ and Criticism (1893); and Irenic Theology (1905).
MEADE, WILLIAM MEADE, WILLIAM

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEADE, WILLIAM: Protestant Episcopal bish- op; b. near Millwood, Clarke Co., Va., Nov. 11, 1789; d. at Richmond Mar. 14, 1862. He was graduated from Princeton College in 1810; prepared for the ministry under Rev. Walter Addison of Maryland, and was ordained Feb. 24, 1811. He was rector of Christ Church, Alexandria, 1811-13; became curate of Millwood 1813, and afterward rector, and soon was known as an influential leader in his church. In 1823 he was the '' Founder of the Protestant-Episcopal Theological Seminary of Vir- ginia," and in 1829 was elected assistant bishop to Bishop Moore of Virginia, succeeding to the charge of the see in 1841. He published Lectures on the Pastoral Office (New York, 1849); Old Churches, Ministers and Families of Virginia (2 vols., Phila- delphia, 1856); The Bible and the Classics (New York, 1861). Biblioorapht: J. Johns, A Memoir of iKa Life of , , , William Meade, Baltimore, 1867; W. S. Perry, The Evi*- copata in America, p. 51, New York, 1895. MEADE, WILLIAM EDWARD: Church of Ire- land; bishop of Cork, Cloyne, and Ross; b. at Donaghmore, County Cork, Feb. 24, 1832. He was educated at Trinity College, Dublin (B.A., 1867), and was ordered deacon in 1862 and ordained priest in the following year. He was rector of Ardtrea, County Tyrone, from 1864 to 1884, succes- sively prebendary of Armagh (1877-S4), treasurer of Armagh Cathedral (1882-85), and archdeacon of Armagh (1885-94). In 1893 he was elected by the Armagh Diocesan Synod as ad interim bishop of Armagh, and in the following year was consecrated bishop of Cork, Cloyne, and Ross. He was also a prebendary in St. Patrick's Cathedral, Dublin, in lC«Mds, Hebrew Xeoklenburv-Streliti AM 1882-«5, aecretary to the General Synod in 1880, a member of the Representative Body in 1883, and AYftiTtining chaplain to the bishop of Armagh in 1886-93, as well as a diocesan nominator and a member of the diocesan court.
MEALS, HEBREW MEALS, HEBREW

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEALS, HEBREW: The hours for meals among the ancient Israelites and the Orientals of the present day are not as definite or as regular as with modern Europeans. Nevertheless it is prob- able that they also had their regular time for taking food. The fellah of Palestine eats his bread, perhaps with a little fruit, according to the season, before he goes to work in the fields, or else after having worked for one or two hours. About noon he again takes a little food, some bread and fruit, then enjoying his noonday rest. Neither in the morning nor in the afternoon does he prepare a hot meal, the principal repast being taken in the evening after the day's labor is ended, and consisting usually of a warm dish, even if it be only some onion soup. In general, however, the poor partake of only two meals, one in the late morning and the second in the evening. As these usages are conditioned by the climate which makes the hot noontide an un- desirable time for the chief meal, it may be safely assumed that the same custom held in ancient times, although the Old Testament does not say much re- garding the hours at which meals were taken. Food was brought to Elijah in the morning and in the evening (I Kings xvii. 6), and the Israelites in the desert had bread in the morning and meat (quails) in the evening (Ex. xvi. 12) ; the principal meal was in the evening; this was also the case with the servants of Boaz (Ruth iii. 3-7), although the reapers in the field were given food and their hour of repose at noon (Ruth ii. 14; cf. Susanna, 7, 13). While eating, those Orientals who are not yet influenced by European culture sit cross-legged on the floor, upon mats or carpets, around a low table which consists of a metal sheet or of a large wicker- work plate, resting on a low stand. The larger the board, the greater the hospitality of the host; some are two meters in diameter. Very often the Bedouins use only a round piece of leather spread upon the floor. After its use it is drawn together so as to form a bag, by means of a cord which passes through rings attached at the border. After the Israelites settled in the land, this custom probably changed; chairs and tables existed in ancient times in western Asia (see House, the Hebrew, and ITS Appointments), and the Old Testament shows that they formed part of the ordinary household furnishings (II Kings iv. 10). Use was also made of the miUah, " divan," as a seat during meals (Ezek. xxiii. 41). From a casual remark of Amos it ap- pears that in his time a new fashion arose which he condemned; namely, that of reclining during the repast (Am. ii. 8, vi. 4). In the time of Christ, prob- ably under Greco-Roman influence, this usage was general (Matt. ix. 10, and frequently). The divans, for three or five persons, were covered with costly rugs in the homes of the rich (Prov. vii. 16-17; Ezek. xxiii. 41) . The Israelites reclined upon them in such a way as to rest upon the left arm, having the right hand free for use in eating; the one seated at the right might rest the back of his head on the bosom of his left-hand neighbor (cf. John xiii. 23, xxL 20). Knives, forks, and spoons were not known as utensils for eating, but were used for cooking pur- poses; the meat as served was cut into small pieces (Ezek. xxiv. 4). Meat, vegetables, broth, etc, were put together in a large dish that was set on the table; every one had his flat cake of bread, with which he took the broth out of the dish or upon which he put his vegetables, just as on a plate; the meat was taken out with the fingers (Ruth iL 14; Prov. xxvi. 15; Matt. xxvi. 23). The host himself helped an honored guest to the best pieces (I Sam. i. 4, ix. 23-24). Under these circumstances, wash- ing of the hands before and after meals was neces- sary; in later times it became even a religious custom. The usage of praying before a meal is not men- tioned in the Old Testament; in the New Testament, however, it appears as a general practise before the meal; at least, Christ as well as his disciples always speak a few words of thanks (berakah, eulogia, eucharistia; Matt. xiv. 19 and often; Acts xxviL 35; cf. I Tim. iv. 3 sqq.). The rabbis also valued praying after meals (cf. Berachoth, 6-8, etc.; see Prayer). The meal of the common man was very sim- ple, bread formed its most essential part (see Bread and Baking); to this were added milk, butter, and cheese; vegetables and fruit constitu- ted a third indispensable adjunct. Meat was taken only exceptionally on holidays, when a sacrifice was offered, when honored guests arrived, or when a family festival was held. The rich naturally in- dulged at all seasons in the luxuries of the table (cf. Am. iv. 1, vi. 4-5). When they entertained guests, the guest was honored by the slaughtering of a beast of the herd, otherwise he was principally distinguished by the size of his portion (Gen. xliii. 34; I Sam. ix. 24). I. Benzinger, Bibliography: An excellent article is found in £B, iii. 2989-3002. The subject is discussed in the Bible dic- tionaries under Food, Meals, Banquets, and like headings; also in the treatises on Biblical archeology.
MEARS, DAVID OTIS MEARS, DAVID OTIS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEARS, DAVID OTIS: Presbyterian; b. at Essex, Mass., Feb. 22, 1842. He was educated at Amherst College (A.B., 1865), and, after studying theology privately, was ordained to the ministry of his denomination in 1867. He has held successive pastorates at North Avenue Church, Cambridge, Mass. (1867-77), Piedmont Congregational Church, Worcester, Mass. (1877-93), Calvary Presbyterian Church, Cleveland, O. (1893-95), and Fourth Presbyterian Church, Albany, N. Y. (since 1895). He was associate editor of The Golden Rule (now The Christian Endeavor World) in 1879-80, and besides numerous briefer contributions, sermons, and addresses, and in addition to an edition of E. N. Kirk's Lectures on Revivals (Boston, 1875), has written Life of Edward Norris Kirk (Boston, 1877); The Deathless Book (1888); The Pulpit and the Pews (Oberlin, O., 1892); and Inspired through Suffering (New York, 1895).
MECCA MECCA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MECCA: The chief holy city of the Moham- medan faith. It is situated in Western Arabia, 267 Meals, Hebrew Mecklenburg-Strelitz latitude 21® 30' north, longitude 40** 8' east, in a narrow and barren valley in the province of Hedjaz, sixty-five miles east of Jiddah, its port on the Red Sea, and about two hundred and fifty miles south of Medina. It has no manufactures and no commerce. Its inhabitants depend almost entirely on the pil- grims who come to pray in its celebrated mosque, and to kiss the black stone of the Kaaba. See Kaaba; and Mohammed, Mohammedanism.
MECELENBURG-SCHWERIN MECKLENBURG-SCHWERIN

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MECKLENBURG-SCHWERIN: A grand-duchy of the German empire; area 5,137 square miles; population (1905) 625,045, of whom 609,914 were Lutherans and Reformed, 12,093 Roman Catholics, 742 Greek Catholics, 810 unclassed Christians, and 1,482 Israelites. Mecklenburg became Christian in the twelfth century and accepted Lutheranism in 1549. The practical administration of the Lutheran State Church was committed in 1571, by statutory regulation, to the polity of Superintendencies and Consistories. The reigning sovereign, along with his territorial jura circa sacra, holds the metropolitan ju8 in sacra, Synodical rights are vested in the territorial estates, the representatives of the landed proprietors and of the towns. The sovereign exer- cises his jus circa sacra through the ministry of justice; his metropolitan jurisdiction has been exer- cised, since 1850, through the Superior Church Council in Schwerin. The ecclesiastical courts are the Consistory and, for cases of appeal, the Superior Ecclesiastical Court, both at Rostock. The church is subdivided into six provincial superintendencies (Doberan, Güstrow, Malchin, Parchim, Schwerin), Wismar, and one town superintendency (Rostock). The provincial superintendencies are further subdi- vided into thirty-five presidencies, under presiding officers called prcBpositi. There are 308 parishes, and 472 churches, besides 48 chapels. In accordance with the synodical regulation of 1841, the pastors in each presidency hold an annual synod, under the district prcepositus. There are two general conferences, which alternate in annual sessions, the one consisting of all the pastors, the other of pastors and laymen. With both conferences are associated conventions of the Society for Foreign and Jewish Missions and of the Inner Mission. The average yearly income of a pastor is approx- imately 4,000 marks. The superannuating provision of 1900 allows a retirement salary arooimting to twenty-five per cent of the stipend after ten years of service, and as high as ninety per cent after fifty years. The widows of pastors, praspositi, and superintendents, in addition to their parochial tithe and a residential indemnity from the widows' fund, draw pensions of 750, 850, and 1,200 marks respectively. Ecclesiastical patronage is partly vested in the sovereign (to nearly two-thirds of the cures), and partly proprietary or municipal. Candidates for the spiritual office have to undergo two examinations, pro licentia concionand\ and pro ministerio. In the way of practical preparation, the candidates attend the theological seminary at Schwerin for the period of a year between the first examination and the second. The duties of sac- ristans, precentors and organists are fulfilled, in almost every instance, by public-school teachers, in a legally regulated connection with their positions. Church-building expenses are generally so divided that the ecclesiastical patrons furnish the material and half the cash cost of construction; the congre- gation bearing the remainder of the cost. In the matter of church doctrine, the clergy stand loyal to the Lutheran Confession, and the congrega- tions are at least externally faithful to ecclesiastical ordinances. Open ecclesiastical enmity is of rare occurrence. Christian benevolence has been on the increase for fifty years past, and yields gratifying fruit in such works as those of the House of Deacon- esses at Ludwigslust, with some 300 sisters, laboring in 100 stations, and of the Inner Mission (Rescue House at Gehlersdorf , Infirmary at Schwerin, Home for Cripples, and Magdalen Asylum at Rostock, institutional homes, etc.), as also in the support of the Gotteskasten (q.v.) for helping Lutherans abroad (see Diaspora) and of missions to the heathen. The relation between church and schools is close. The direction of schools is constitutionally in the hands of the church superintendents and pastors, under the supervision of the Ministry of Instruction. Rectors of the municipal public schools are certified theological candidates. Conmion-school teachers obtain their preparation in two seminaries, whose directors and principal teachers must be divines. The Board of Seminary Curators includes (besides a representative of the government) two divines, a superintendent and the resident pastor. Religious instruction in the seven state high schools is like- wise in the hands of approved divines. The five theological professors of the state university at Rostock are appointed by the Ministry of Instruc- tion, subject to the approval of the Superior Church Council. There are no sects in Mecklenburg on any organ- ized footing. Baptists and Irvingites occur sporad- ically. The Reformed Church has one pastor, the Roman CathoUc Church six pastors, with four congregations, belonging to the diocese of Osna- brück. Heinrich Behm. Biblioorapht: J. Wiggers, Kirchengetchichte Meekler^ burga, Parchim, 1840; MecklenburgiBche Oeschichte in Ein- xeldaratelluno, parts 5 sqq., Berlin, 1809 sqq.; G. Mail, Kirchliche VerkAltniaae in Mecklenburg, ib. 1800; E.Millieo, Cirkular-Verordnungen dee Oberktrchenrata . . . atu der Zeit 1849-1894, Schwerin, 1895; idem. Die Emertier- uno»-Ordnuno fUr die evanoeliech-hUheriechen Oeiatlichen in , , , MecklenburgSchwerin, ib., 1904; M ecklenburif' iachea Urkundenbuch, ib.. 1907.
MECELENBURG-STRELITZ MECKLENBURG-STRELITZ

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MECKLENBURG-STRELITZ: A grand-duchy of the German empire, separate from Mecklenburg- Schwerin since 1701; area 1,131 square miles; population (1905) 100,451, of whom 100,314 were Lutherans, 2,499 Roman Catholics, 128 Greek Cath- olics, 212 unclassed Christians, and 298 Israelites. The church organization is similar to that of Mecklenburg-Schwerin (q.v.). In his metropolitan capacity the sovereign exercises his governing power through the consistory at Neu-Strelitz, which also attends to the ecclesiastical administra- tion of the Ratzeburg district. The jus circa sacra is exercised through the state government. The consistory at Neu-Strelltz acts as an ecclesiastical court of first instance; appeals lie to the Superior Ecclesiastical Court at Rostock. Mecklenburg- MMUrdi Strelitz has only one superintendent, under whom are six præpositi and the provost at Ratzcburg. There are 153 churches. With reference to other ecclesiastical conditions the statements as to Mecklenburg - Schwerin generally apply here aa well. Hbinrich Behm. BiBUoan^PBT: Coaeult the literaluie under Uecklen-
KEDARDUS, SAIITT MEDARDUS, SAINT

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDARDUS, SAINT: Missionary bishop in northern France; b. at Salentiacum (Solency) in Picardy, not far from the present St. Quentin, c. 457; d. c. 545. He was educated in the school of his native city where he distinguished himself by his diligence, piety, and charity. He received holy orders at an early age, and about 530 succeeded the bishop of Veromanduum (Vemiand), but soon removed the see to Noviomagus (Noyon) which, as a fortified place, offered better protection against the barbarians. After the death of Bishop Eleu- therius. about 532, he was elected also bishop of Tountay, and for the rest of his life administered both dioceses, being very active and successful in spreading Christianity. By his pure and pious conduct and the enduring steadfastness with which he bore all sufferings and struggles for the advance- ment of the Christian faith, he occupied a well deserved place among the confessors. He is com- memorated by the Roman Catholic Church on June 8, and Is considered the patron of horticulture and agriculture, more specifically of haymaking. A church and a monastery were built over his grave at Soissons. Besides this city, the chief seat of devotion to Medardus, Dijon, Jodoigne (Geldon- acum) near Louvain, Cologne, Treves. Paris, and Prague boasted the possession of relics of the saint. {O. ZOcKLERt.) BiBuoanAPBT: The twti mrl7 bioemptuea of MtdanJiu were hy FortiiniKus VonantLus Bnd Blshnp Rddbod, which with other lives. docuuenU uid commentary aie col- lected in ASB. June. ii. 72-105. Early Dinteris] ia taund »1» in MPL, Ixxi. III7-11IS, Inxviu. 633-540. cixiii. 029-639. aad a Carmen by FortuQBtus Vencmliiu ia in MOH. Ai-cl. ant.. iT. 1 (1881), 44-18. Consult: J. Cot- blel. N'.lire hialoriqut *ur U culte de S. liidard. AtoienB, 1856: DCB. iii. 887-888.
MEDD, PETER GOLDSMITH MEDD, PETER GOLDSMITH

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDD, PETER GOLDSMITH: Church of Eng- land; b. at Leybum (36 m. n.w. of York) July 18, 1829; d. at North Cerney (near Cirencester, 15 m. s. of Gloucester) July 25, 1908. He was educated at King's College. London, and University College, Oxford (B.A., 1852; M.A., 1855). He was ordained deacon in 1853 and priest in 1859. Ho was curate of St. John Baptist, Oxford (1858-67); rector of Barnes, Surrey (1870-76); and in 1876 became rec- tor of North Cerney, GlouceBtershire. He was fellow of University College, Oxford, from 1852 to 1877; lecturer, tutor, bursar, and dean from 1853 to 1870; and Bampton lecturer in 1882. His works include: The Priest to the Altar, or Aids to the Devout Celebra- tion of Holy Communion (London, 1865); Sermons Preached in the Parish Church of Barnes (1877); and The One Mediator (1884), Bampton lectures. To- gether with W. Bright he edited the Latin version of the Book of Common Prayer (1865).
MEDEBA MEDEBA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDEBA: A town on the table-land of Moab east of the Jordan. It is situated almost directly east from Bethlehem, about five miles slightly west of south from Heshbon, at an elevation of 2,640 feet, and is the site of a modern town built on a pile of early Christian ruins having a circumference of a mile and a half. New interest attaches to tiK town because of the discovery there of a mosaic map of Christian Palestine and part of Egypt. Th place was anciently of considerable importance and finds frequent mention in the Old Testament (Num. xxi. 30; Josh. xiii. 9, 16; I Chron. six. 7; Isa. tt. 2; I Mace. ix. 36) and on the Moabite Stone (q.v.). It was originally Moabitic territory, but was taken by the Amorites, then by Israel ; In David's time it was an Ammonitjc point of defense, was captured by Omri (Moabite Stone, line 8, Mehedeba) and re- captured by Mesha, the Moabitic king who indited the Moabite Stone. The place comes into later mention as the home of the robber band which ac- complished the death of John the Maccabee; John Hyrcanus took the city after a siege of six months (Josepbua, Ant., XIH., ix. 1), and it had to be re- taken by Alexander Jannssus. Ptolemy the geog- rapher mentions it (V., xvu. 6) as lying betweea Bostru and Petra. After the Christian era it ap- pears as the seat of a bishop who attended the Council of Chalcedon (451). After that it was lost to sight until in 1880 a Christian colony, mostly of Greeks, from Kerak settled there, and there is also a Roman Catholic mission. The preparations for building led to a series of discoveries of interesting antiquities. These include a large pool (324 feet by 309, and from 10 to 13 feet deep), ruins of several churches, the remains of a colonnaded street, in- scriptions, mosaic pavements, and especially the map referred to above. The character of some of the ruins show that parte of the town had preten- sions to elegance. The story of the mosaic fumishea a lamentable instance of the loss to knowledge and to art which accrues from ignorance or stupidity. The first no- tice of the map came through a monk belonging to the Christian colony settled at Medeba in 1880. the find having been uncovered in clearing a floor for a new church on the lines of an old one. In 18S2 this monk wrote concerning the mosaic to the Greek patriarch of Jerusalem, who simply filed the letter, which remained hidden till the new patriarch, Gerosinoa, found it. The latter sent a master-mason (with the title of architect!) to examine the mosaic and with directions to include it in the new church if found worthy. The deputy reported that it was unimportant, and in the building of the church large portions were destroyed, it being calculated that only eighteen square meters remain of an original area of perhaps 280 square metera. In 1896 the patriarch sent Clt^opas Koskylides, librarian of the Society of the Holy Sepulcher, to reexamine the map, and he recognized its importance. Large parts had been covered by cement for the flooring of the new church, while nearly all the rest had been destroyed, traces being left, however, which showed how great had been the destruction wrought. The piece of the map remaining covers the terri- tory from Nablus to the Nile. It is decorative and free in execution, somewhat lacking in perspective, but its location of plttces is approximately accurate. The East is at the top; the northern portion is 269 Kedardiui XMliator nearly all destrosred; the extreme northern part was outside the present church walls, for in the early period the names Ephesus and Smyrna were read on it, showing that it originally included at least the southern part of Asia Minor. The artist accomplished veiy fair results with the difficult material and subject with which he worked. Moun- tains are indicated in colored lines, the Dead Sea in blue wavy lines; in the larger cities principal streets are roughly represented, while in Jerusa- lem appear the principal structures of the period (the Church of the Holy Sepulcher, and at least three other churches, one outside the city), as well as two colonnaded streets which run through the north and south length of the city, and three (or four) gates on north, east, and south. Smaller cities are indicated with waUs and round towers. The subdivision of the map was by tribes, with boundaries and chief towns. Nearly 140 names or parts of names can be traced. The territories of six tribes are represented in whole or in part — Dan, Simeon, Judah, Ephraim, Benjamin, and Zebulon. As examples of the places named may be cited: Modein, Nob, Lydda, Gath, Ashdod, Jericho, Ephrata, ^lamon, Bethabara, Ramah (in Benjamin and in Judah), Gibeon, ^non, Shiloh, Gerizim, Shechem, Gerar, Bethlehem Ephrata, Beth-zur, Ascalon, Gaza, Beersheba, the tomb of Joseph, the well of Jacob, and the oak of Mamre, in Palestine; and in Egypt Pelusium, Tanis, Sais, Hermoopolis, and three arms of the Nile. The date of the map is made out to be probably the middle of the fifth century, since the principal structures of Jerusalem seem to correspond with those of the city of that period. The extant remnant has proved of some service in confirming a number of locations already made out, and in suggesting a few others. Had the entire map been preserved, its value might have been very great. A subject of debate still is whether in the map's composition the Onomasticon of Euse- bius was employed. Geo. W. Gilmore. Bibliography: The principal account of the map is by C. Clermontr-Ganneau, in Recueil d'archeohoie orientaU, ii (1897), 161-175, from which is taken the matter in PEF, Quarterly Statement, 1897. pp. 213-225. cf. 167. 239, also 1898. pp. 85. 177-183. 251. and 1901. 235-246. Other summaries are to be found in The (New York) Independent, 1897. p. 1656; Biblical World, 1898. pp. 244-250; Meth- odiat Review, 1898. 478-480; Oeograj^ical Journal, 1901. p. 516. Other discussions are: G. Durand, Le Carte mo- aaique de Madaba, Paris. 1897; A. Schulten, Die Moeaik- karte von Madaba, Berlin. 19(X); Kubitschek, in the Mit^ theilungen of the Royal Geographical Society of Vienna. 1900, pp. 335-380; A. Jaooby. Dae geographiache Moeaik von Madaba, Leipsic. 1905. A large and important litera- ture is indicated in Richardson. Encyclopaedia, p. 666. On the town, apart from the map. consult: PEF. Qtuir- terhi Statement, 1895. July; M. Sejoume. in Revue biblique iniemationaU, 1892. 617-^44; DB, iii. 309-310.
MEDHXJRST, WALTER HENRY MEDHURST, WALTER HENRY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDHURST, WALTER HENRY: Missionary, sinologue, and lexicographer; b. in London Apr. 29, 1796; d. there Jan. 24, 1857. He studied at Hack- ney College; embarked for China as a missionary printer, 1816; was so successful as a student of languages and as a preacher that he was ordained at Malacca, 1819, and labored in Penang and Batavia; returned to England, 1836, but again went out to his work in Java, 1838; on the opening of Shanghai as a treaty port in 1842 he settled there and remained until the year of his death. He was accomplished in the Javanese, Chinese, and Japanese languages. With the cooperation of friends he produced what is known as the ** Delegates' Ver- sion " of the Bible in Chinese. Among his other works may be noted: English and Japanese Vocabu- lary (Batavia, 1830); Dictionary of the Hok-Kihi Dialect of the Chinese Language (Macao, 1832); China, its State and Prospects (London, 1838); Chinese and English Dictionary (2 vols., Batavia, 1842-43); Chinese Dialogues (Shanghai, 1844; new ed. by his son, 1861); and Dissertation on the Theology of the Chinese (1847). Bxblioorapht: H. O. Dwight. H. A. Tupper. and E. M. Bliss. Encydopedia of Miaeiona, pp. 444-445, New York, 1904; DNB, xxxvii. 202-203.
MEDIATOR MEDIATOR

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDIATOR: A title applied to Jesus Christ in relation to his work as intermediary between God and the world and between man and God. The New Testament presents Christ as mediator in two aspects, the cosmic and the redemptive. The prin- cipal passages bearing on the cosmic or universal mediation are I Cor. viii. 6; Col. i. 15-17; Heb. i. 2-3; John i. 3-4. As the image or Logos of God the son is the sole mediator of the divine creative activity. Eternal preexistence is affirmed of him. Through him the universe is a consistent unity, and progressively realizes the divine purpose. In him is seen the rational explanation and final aim of all things. This type of thought has its Jewish as well as Greek background. In the Jewish doc- trine of Angels (q.v.), of wisdom (Prov. viii.), and of the Spirit of God (q.v.), the idea of mediatorial agencies between God and the world is made famil- iar. Greek thought represented the Platonic-Stoic logos both as immanent reason and as expressed will. Josephus described the law as given by angels {Ant. XV., V. 3), a view repeated in Acts vii. 53; Gal. iii. 19; and Heb. ii. 2; cf. Jubilees, i. 27-29, and Assumption of Moses, i. 14. Philo gathers up the lines of both Greek and Jewish development in his doctrine of the Logos: the Logos is the mediator between the immortal God and the sinful human race (" Who Is the Heir ")• The New-Testament teaching culminates in the unique and unshared mediation of the eternal Christ. The other aspect of mediation — ^the redemptive — is more fully represented in the New Testament (Matt. xi. 27-28; Mark viii. 38; Luke ix. 11-27; John, passim; Acts xvii. 31; Eph. i. 10-21; Col. i. 20; I Tim. ii. 5-6; I John ii. 1-2). Mediation before Christ's earthly existence is affirmed in I Cor. x. 4; I Pet. L 11; and John i. 11-12. For Paul the mediation consists of vicarious suffering and death in behalf of sin, continues after death in his inter- cession (Rom. viii. 34) and gift of the Spirit (Rom. viii. 8-11), and in manifold saving activities until his return to judgment, the destruction of the last enemy, and the glorification of the saints (I Thess. iv. 16-17; I Cor. xv. 24-28, 50-57; Phil. iii. 20-21). The mediatorship of Jesus is the special theme of the epistle to the Hebrews. He was qualified for this task by the experiences of his earthly life. He was superior to the angels, to Moses, and to the priests. The latter was evinced by the fact that he was appointed not by men but by God, that he [ediator 270 offered not an external sacrifice but himself, through the eternal Spirit, the effect of which was spiritual and everlasting. He has opened for men the heavenly world, where as priest-king he continues his mediation of the new covenant. In successive periods of the Church the Christian doctrine of mediation reflects the changing doctrine of God and of man; it has therefore been identified in part with the various theories of the Atonement (q.v.). By the Church Fathers, Christ is designated as mediator, since he reconciles God and man, by uniting in his own nature the divine and the human which had become mutually estranged through sin (Cyril of Alexandria, Dial, i., "Concerning the Trinity"; Theophylact on Gal. iii.; Chrysostom, Seventh Homily on I Tim,), Since Gerhard, who followed the lead of many of the Fathers (cf . Euse- bius. Hist, ecd, I., iii.), Thomas Aquinas, and Calvin, the mediatorship of Christ has been divided into three aspects. (1) The prophetic: during his earthly life Christ revealed God's purpose of redemp- tion. (2) The high-priestly: Christ fulfilled two functions, satisfaction and intercession. He satis- fied God's justice through his active and passive obedience in his earthly life and death, to which the worth of his person and the intensity of his suffering lent an infinite value. As exalted he continues his high-priestly work through his inter- cession for the redeemed. The mediation of Christ was conceived by the Lutherans as meritorious and as related to all men; by the Reformed, as instrumental and as confined to the elect. (3) Christ's royal office, concealed during his earthly life, was assumed at his exaltation; as king he maintains and governs (a) all creatures (regnum potenticB), (b) believers here below (regnum gratia;), and (c) the church triumphant in heaven (regnum gloricB). Ritscld modifies the traditional view by substituting vocation for office in Christ's mediation, by emphasizing the likeness of the community to Christ as respects the vocation, by conceiving of the royal function as fundamental, expressing itself in relation to God in the priestly, in relation to man in the prophetic, activity, and by affirming that the priestly and prophetic vocation extends into the state of exaltation. Christ mediates his forgiveness first to the conmnmity and then to individuals according as they become members of the community. The individual believer is brought into commimion with God not through the living but through the historical Christ. In many of the popular sermons and hymns of the last two centu- ries Christ is set forth as mediator between an angry God and the condemned sinner, pleading with God for mercy, at the same time receiving the divine wrath into his own bosom and thus averting from the sinner the consequences of his sin. With the ethicizing of the character of God this view is yielding to a more adequate idea of Christ's media- tion, as consisting in the revelation and communi- cation of the life and love of God to men. The intercession of Christ, relieved of its picturesque features, signifies that the relation between God as gracious and man as sinful, established once for all in the life and death of Christ, is permanently valid in the changeless relation of Christ to the Father, and made effective for men through the influence of Christ's Spirit in their lives. C. A. Beckwith. Biblioorapht: G. Steward. Mediatorial Sovereignty, 2 vols., Edinburgh, 1863; W. Symington. Meeeiak, A» Prince; or, the Mediatorial Dominion of Jeeue Chritt. New York, 1881; P. G. Medd. The One Mediator, Lon- don, 1884; W. Milligan. The Aeoeneion and Heavenly Prieethood of our Lord, London, 1892; M. 8. Teny. The Mediation of Jeeue Chriet, New York, 1003; and the treatment of Christ as priest and of his oflEioea in the works on dogmatic theology.
MEDINA MEDINA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDINA: The city next in importance to Mecca, of the holy cities of Islam. It contains a large mosque with the mausoleum of Mohammed, and is annually visited by a great number of pilgrims. It has about 15,000 inhabitants. See Mohammed, Mohammedanism, I.
MEDLER, NICOLAUS MEDLER, NICOLAUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEDLER, NICOLAUS: Leader of the Refor- mation in Naumburg; b. at Hof (72 m. s. of Leip- sic) 1502; d. at Bemburg (88 m. s.w. of Berlin) Aug. 24, 1551. His preliminary studies were made in his native town and at the Latin School of Freiberg, after which he attended the universities of Erfurt and Wittenberg. After a brief sojourn as teacher at Amstadt and Hof, he became rector of the school at Eger, where he caused excitement by his Evangelical sermons, and was obliged to with- draw. Returning to Hof, he took charge of the town school, which flourished under his care from 1527 or 1528 onward, and was associated with the town pastor, Löner, as preacher at St. Michael's. On account of their sharp sermons both were ex- pelled from the town July 13, 1531. Medler removed to Wittenberg, and continued there five years. Provided by the elector of Saxony with an annual stipend, he labored as a private tutor and as assist- ant preacher to Luther, who was then in poor health, and for some time was chaplain to the exiled Electress Elizabeth of Brandenburg. On Sept. 1, 1536, he removed to Naumburg as pastor and overseer of the Church of St. Wenceslaus, an important post to which he had been nominated by Elector John Frederick on the recommendation of Luther. For the next eight years he was the reformer of the ecclesiastical and educational system of Naumburg. Starting from the existing begin- nings he proceeded mainly along the Wittenberg lines. His plan for reorganizing the parish church of St. Wenceslaus was approved Oct. 21, 1537, by Luther, Jonas, and Melanchthon, and was ratified by the elector. It shows not a few distinctive elements. The school prospectus makes provi- sion for Hebrew, Greek, and I^tin, and for the mathematical branches. Medler himself gave in- struction in Hebrew. In the matter of ceremonial regulation, what is especially to be remarked is the place of the Confiteor and its wording, which proved of considerable influence, and the use of Luther's German paraphrase of the Gloria in excel- sis. The five appendixes, including an order of confirmation, have unfortunately been lost. By 1540 the victory of Protestantism at Naum- burg was assured, and the cathedral alone remained as a citadel of Roman Catholicism. In July, 1541, 271 Xediator Xedo-PeralA however, the inhabitants of the cathedral district petitioned the elector for spiritual ministration at the hands of Medler, and John Frederick commanded him forthwith to begin Evangelical worship there, which he did on Sept. 11, 1541. Both Luther and Medler took part officially in the festivities attend- ing the induction of Amsdorf as Evangelical bishop (Jan. 19-20, 1542). Since Amsdorf usually resided at Zeitz, Medler continued to be the leading person- ality at Naumburg and prosecuted zealously the work of evangelizing the cathedral district. His life, however, became embittered by growing contentions, notably with Georg Mohr, who in 1544 had succeeded Medler's friend, Löner, as cathedral preacher at Naumburg. Even Luther censured Medler's lust of power, and his disposition to treat the new bishop as a nullity. With the council Medler's repeated requests for an increase of salary, and his independence in filling appointments caused manifold frictions. From this situation Medler was released by the elector's command to go to the Electress Elizabeth, his former patroness, who was now seriously ill. He left Naumburg about Apr. 20, 1545, and never returned. About the same time he was confirmed by the elector of Brandenburg in the position of court preacher to the Electress Elizabeth. He declined a professor- ship at Frankfort-on-the-Oder, but in deference to the wishes of Luther and Melanchthon accepted the superintendency at Brunswick, of which he took charge about Michaelmas, 1545. The agitated state of the times, no less than the wilfulness of his ovm disposition, prevented any lasting good results. In 1551, on the advice of Melanchthon, he accepted the position of court preacher at Bemburg, but was stricken with paralysis at his first sermon, June 7. Having been conveyed, for better care, to Witten- berg, he had a second stroke, and was brought back to Bemburg to die a few weeks later. His literary works, apart from the Naumburg Kirchenordnung and writings against the Interim, are mostly school- books, including revisions of Melanchthon's Latin grammar, rhetoric, and dialectics, and some math- ematical works. Luther reckoned him, along with Veit Dietrich and Johann Spangenberg, as one of his three true disciples, because he served school and Church with equal ardor. O. Albhecht. Biblioorapht: Sources of knowledge are: The OraHo ds vUa , . , N, Medleri by A. Streitberger, Jena, 1601; EpiaioleB Melanchthonia to Medler, ed. Dani, Jena, 1825; BriefwecfiBel dea J. Jonaa, ed. G. Kawerau, 2 vote., HaUe, 1884-^; Luthen Briefe, ed. De Wette. vols, iv.-vi.; BrauruchtDeioi»che Schulordnunoen, ed. F. Koldewey, pp. Ixix. sqq., 65-97, Berlin, 1886. References to the earlier literature (eighteenth century) will be found in Hauck- Herxog, RE, xii. 402. Consult: Riedel. in ZeiUchnft far preusaische Otachichte und LandeBkircKe, ii (1865), 65-100; Holstein, in the same, iv (1867), 271-287; S. Braun, Nawnburger Annalent ed. Kdster, Naumburg, 1892; E. Hoffmann, Naumburg im ZeikUler der Reformation, Leip- do, 1000; K6ster. in ZKQ, xzii (1001). 145 sqq.. 278 sqq.; O. Merts, Schulweaen der deuUchen Reformation, Heidelberg, 1002.
UEGIDDO MEGIDDO

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEGIDDO: A royal Canaanitic city assigned at the conquest to Manasseh. though situated within the borders of Issachar. Apparently it was not occupied at the conquest, though the statement is made that the inhabitants were subjected to tribute (Josh. xvii. 11-13; Judges i. 27-28), It was fortified by Solomon (I Kings ix. 15), and Aha- ziah died there (II Kings ix. 27). It is mentioned in connection with Taanach, the modern Tell Ta'anuk (Josh. xii. 21, svii. 11; Judges v. 19; I Kings iv. 12), on the edge of the plain of Esdraelon about half-way down its southern side. The site is therefore by some recognized in Tell el-Mutasellim, OD a spur jutting out from Carmel, not far from Lejjun, which marks the site of tlie Roman town Legio; others prefer Lejjun itself, the ruins of which lie on both sides of a perennial stream which may well be the " waters of Megiddo " (Judges v. 19). Its situation on the edge of the plain of Esdraelon, a battle-ground of the nations for millenniums (cf. Judges V. 19-21; II Kings xxiii. 29-30; Zech. xu. 11; and the Egyptian inscriptions, e.g., of Thothmes III.), gave it a strategic importance. Accordingly it appears in history as a fortified city (Josh. Iii. 21; I Kings ix. 15), and in Rev. xvl 16 (Har Hagedon, i.e., " the mountain [fortress] of Magedon " ) it figures as the typical fortress about which the final world conflict is to take place. Geo. W. Gilmore. Bibliography: Dillmatin'a mmmenlary on Joghiu at lii. 31: O. F. Moorc'ii comiaenUrv on JudgcB. pp. 47. 158; Conder. in the FEF, Mtiaoin. ii. 60-09 (identllieg it with Mujeddn near Qelhuhean. uiutuexlioosbly wrcmE); □. A. Smith. Hiilorical Gfograp^u of tin Holu Land. pp. S3, 385-387, 408, London, ISM.
HELLHDT MEINHOLD, JOHANNES

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEINHOLD, JOHANNES: German Lutheran; b. at Kammin (40 m. n.n.e. of Stettin), Aug. 12, 1861. He was educated at the universities of Leipsic, Berlin, Greifswald, and Tübingen from 1879 to 1884, and in the latter year became privat-docent for theology at Greifswald, where he was appointed associate professor four years later. In 1889 he went in a similar capacity to Bonn, where he was promoted to his present position of full professor of Old-Testa- ment exegesis and Hebrew in 1903. In addition to briefer contributions, he has written: Die Composi- tion des Buches Daniel (Greifswald, 1884); Beiträge zur Erklärung des Buches Daniel, L (Leipsic, 1888); Die geschichtlichen Hagiographen {Chronika, Esra, Nehemia, Ruth, Esther) und das Buck Daniel ausge- legt (in collaboration with S. Oettli; Nördlingen, 1889); Wider den Kleinglauben, ein emstes Wort an die evangelischen Christen oiler Parteien (Freiburg, 1895); Jesus und das Alte Testament, ein zweites emstes Wort an die evangelischen Christen (1896); Jesaja und seine Zeit (1898); Die Jesajaerzdhl- ungen, Jesaja 36-89 (Göttingen, 1898); Die Lade Jahves (Tübingen, 1900); Studien zur israelitischen Religionsgeschichtef i. (Bonn, 1903); Die biblische Urgeschichte in gemeinverstdndlicher DarsteUung (1904); and Sabbat und Woche im Alien Testament (Gdttingen, 1905).
MEIRHOLD, KARL HEINRICH JOACHIM MEINHOLD, KARL HEINRICH JOACHIM

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEINHOLD, KARL HEINRICH JOACHIM: Ger- man Lutheran; b. at Liepe (on the Island of Usedom in the Baltic) Aug. 21, 1813; d. in Kammin (120 m. n.n.e. of Berlin) July 20, 1888. His father was a pastor and a rationalist, like the clergy of his synod of that time, though his rationalism was not consistent. In 1827 he entered Mary's College at Stettin and in 1831 the University of Greifswald and later that of Halle. Under the influence of Tholuck and of Ullmann, and later of Schleiermacher in Berlin, he severed all relations with rationalism, drawing closer to the Bible. In 1838, he was appointed pastor at Kolzow, in the Island of Wollin, Pomerania, where he succeeded in main- taining Lutheran interests and soon became one of the acknowledged champions of the Lutheran Church. In the later part of the period of organi- sation of Lutheranism within the Prussian state church Meinhold was a prominent worker and influenced the final settlement. The synod of Wollin, to which Kolzow belonged, resolved that their parishioners should take the name of Lutherans officially and that the sacraments should be admin- istered according to the Lutheran rite. In 1846, a general synod petitioned the authorities to guar- antee the Lutheran rights, but without success. After 1848, the authorities decided that the Union should become absolute. During the political struggles the Lutheran associations, with head- quarters at Naugard, planned for self-defense. In 1851, Meinhold was appointed superintendent at Kammin, where he soon became the leader of the associations in their contest with the authorities. These associations had to contend with two tenden- cies, first that toward separation, secondly that toward absorption, with the latter of which the authorities sided, and in the contest Meinhold received blame from both parties. In 1869, Super- intendent Meinhold was suspended, but he was reinstated in 1874 by order of the ministry. Then supervened the Falk era: the clergy, expecting greater freedom and led by Meinhold, outlined their position at a conference at Gnadau in 1874. However, disciplinary measures were taken against Meinhold. A synodal order was issued, looking to a union between the confessional group and the authorities. In 1875, a general synod assembled and determined upon harmony; the result was that the Lutheran Church gained a right of existence within the Prussian state church. In 1880, Meinhold was reappointed superintendent, then district school inspector, and in 1888 a jubilee was celebrated for his fifty years of active service. (T. Meinhold.) Bxbuoorapht: AUgemeine tvangeliadif^utheritdie Kird^en- MeitunOf 1888. pp. 1107 sqq.
MEEHTTARISTS MEKHITARISTS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MEKHITARISTS: One of the noblest congre- gations in the Roman Catholic Church, which has developed a literary activity comparable to that of the congregation of St. Maur. Mekhitar, the founder of the order, was bom of humble parentage at Sebaste, in Lesser Armenia, Feb. 7, 1676, and died at Venice Apr. 27, 1749. When fourteen years of age he entered the monastery of the Holy Cross near his native place, where in 1691 he was made deacon. He busied himself in study of the Scriptures and patristic writings and developed a talent for hymn-writing. In search of learning he removed to Tokat, and thence to Echmiadzin, the seat of Armenian scholarship. Finding his desires unsat- isfied he returned to Sebaste, and in 1693 renewed his study of patristics. In 1695 he set out for Rome, and on the way fell in with the Jesuit missionary Antoine Beauvilliers, who advised him to study in Rome and then diffuse western learning through- out Armenia. His journey was broken, however, by a violent fever which attacked him in Cyprus; he returned to his home in the monastery near Sebaste, and there was made priest, 1696. His ambition had been aroused to accomplish two purposes, the moral and religious uplift of his countrymen and the reconciliation of the Roman Catholic and Armenian Churches. In 1699 he was made doctor of theology at Erzerum, became noted as a teacher, and interested many of his pupils in the missionary work which he had at heart. When his purposes respecting church union became known, he was compelled to move with great circumspection, and engaged a house at Pera, a suburb of Constantinople, where a printing-press was set up in the interest of his propaganda. Then began a persecution that compelled him to take refuge with the French ambassador and in the Capuchin monastery. He was advised to select a site in the peninsula of Morea, now a part of Greece, then a possession of Venice, as the seat of the missionary establishment which he contemplated; in 1703 he settled at Modon, in Morea, and by 1708 a monastery, church, and school had been built and occupied. In 1712 his order was constituted under the rule of St. Anthony and St. Benedict. In consequence of the war between Turkey and Venice, he was compelled to leave Modon; he obtained from Venice the island of San Lazarro, where he settled Sept. 8, 1717. The result of a journey to Rome was the gaining of so complete confidence in him on the part of pope and cardinals that all difficulties were removed, and, aided by rich countrymen, he was per- mitted to witness the completion of his projected buildings. Mekhitar sought to improve education among the Armenians not only in secular but in religious instruction. He also attempted to carry further the earlier efforts of Popes Urban VIII., Alexander VII., and Innocent XL for a union of the Roman Catholic and Armenian Churches. He fostered the study of the old Armenian language, writing Grammatica Armena (ed. A. Mekhitar, Venice, 1770) and a lexicon of Armenian (1744). He wrote commentaries on various books of the Bible, e.g., on Matthew (1737) ; after the translation of individ- ual books, he published a translation of the whole Bible in 1734; he also issued many other works rendered from Latin or Italian, selecting those which he thought would serve the purposes toward which he had worked. After his death the students who had gathered about him, who now called themselves Mekhitarists, took up his work. They and their successors stocked their library with the best treatises and rendered into Armenian the works of the ancient masters in philosophy and theology. Besides this, they were themselves producers, and such works appeared as M. Cham- chian's " History of Armenia " (3 vols., Venice, 1784-^, Eng. transl, 2 vols., Calcutta, 1827), L. Indshidshian's '^ Archeology and Geography " (11 vols., Venice, 1802-16), and the great Armenian lexicon compiled by a number of collaborators (Venice, 1836-37). Contributions to patristics and other branches of learning have resulted, as 27d Ccder [•lAnohthon, Philipp in the discovery of the thirteen letters of Ignatius in Armenian translation and of the commentary of Ephraem Syrus on the Gospel Harmony (of Tatian?). The institution in Venice has great influence even with Armenians not in the Roman Catholic Church, and branches in other lands — Turkey, Russia, France, Austria, and Hungary — have added to its wealth and prestige. Especially notable among these is the branch in Vienna, planted there in 1810, the printing-department of which has contributed largely to the spread of knowledge in the home country. The mother house is now the goal of all modem scholars who desire an intimate knowledge of Armenian language and literature. (K. KsssLBBt.) Bibuoorafht: E. Bore, Saint Laaare, ou hi§l, d« la aocUtS reZtffMUM armirUenne d€ MichUar, Venice, 1835; idem, Lb CouverU d« S. Lazare 6 Veniae, Paris, 1837; S. SomaUao, Quadro delta atoria letteraria di Armenia^ Venice, 1829; C. F. Neumann, Venuch einer Oeachichie der tmnentBchen LiUeratur, Leipsic. 1836; WindiBchmann. in TQ, 1836, part 1, cf. 1846, pp. 527 sqq.; Le VaiUant de FlorivaJ, Let MikhUarutea de S, LoMare, Venice. 1856; V. Lamdoia, The Armenian Monaetery of SL LoMorue — Venice, Venice, 1874; P. A. Hennemann, Dae Kloeter der armeniedien Mdnehe auf der Inael SL Laxtaro, ib. 1881; A. Mayer, Die MeehHariatentmchdruckerei, Vienna, 1888; F. Scherer, Die MeehiUiriBten in Wien, ib. 1892; K. Kalemkiarian, Skiue der literarieeh-typographiMchen ThAUgkeit der Mechi" tariHen CongregaHon in Wien^ ib. 1898; S. Weber, Die katholieche KireKe in Armenien, Freiburg, 1903; KL, viiL 1122-37. Some of the literature given under Ar- MSNiA will be found pertinent. Consult also Heimbutfier, Orden und KonffregaHonen, i. 313-319.
I860 MELCHIADES

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELCHIADES, mel-chi'a-dez (MILTIADES): Pope 310-314. According to the Catalogus Liberianus he was made bishop in 311, but this contra- dicts its own dates for his death and the length of his pontificate. The Liber pontificalis says that he was an African by birth. He was buried in the cemetery of St. Calixtus, and De Rossi thought he had discovered his grave to the right of the old burial-vault of the popes. In his time fall the edict of toleration by Galerius, the conquest of Rome by Constantine, and the edict of toleration by Constantine and Licinius. Constantine wrote to him from Gaul entrusting the decision in the Donatist question to him and other bishops (cf. Eusebius, Hist. eccl., X., v., in NPNF, 2 ser., i, p. 381), and he held a synod in consequence (Oct. 2, 313) in the palace of the Empress Fausta on the Lateran. Its proceedings and decision against Donatus and in favor of Cæcilianus are reported by Optatus {De schismate Donatistarum, I., xxii. sqq.), (A. Harnack.) Bibliography; Liber pontificalis, ed. Mommsen. in MGH. Gest. pont. Rom., i (1S9S). 46; Jaffé. Regesta, i. 28, ii. 732; DCB. iii. 917-919 detailed); B. Flstins. Liia of the Popes, i. 67. London, n.d.; Milman, Latin Christian- ity. i. 94; Bower, Popes, i. 41-45; KL, viii. 1623-25.
MELETIUS OF LYCOPOLIS MELETIUS OF LYCOPOLIS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELETIUS OF LYCOPOLIS: Originator of the so-called Meletian schism in Egypt; d. at Lyco- polis between 325 and 326. One account of the events leading to the Meletian schism is contained in Historicæ fragmentum (fe schiamate Meletiano, a fragment of an Alexandrian church history. During the persecution of Christians in Lower Egypt, this source relates, four bishops, Phileas of Thmuis, Hesychius, Pachomius, and Theodore, whose sees were in the neighborhood of Alexandria, were removed from their congregations and held in prison in Alexandria, expecting martyrdom or deportation. The spiritual care of the forsaken congregations lay in the hands of itinerant bishops and preachers who did not always perform their duty. Even Alexandria was without a spiritual head, since Peter had forsaken his city. In this time of distress there was only one man who showed himself equal to the occasion. Bishop Meletius of Lycopolis. He not only traveled among the suffering congregations, but at their request insti- tuted new bishops. This action, however, was not consonant with the tradition of the church, both because no bishop had been allowed to take over duties in another see, and because the bishop of Alexandria had for some time claimed to be the spiritual head of the province. Thus the attitude of Meletius was interpreted as a desire to make himself the ecclesiastical primate of Egypt. As it was afterward learned with certainty that the four imprisoned bishops were still alive, there developed in the congregations a party which looked upon them as still their legitimate heads. The bishops related the events to Peter of Alexandria and complained, but Meletius neither excused himself nor did he seek confirmation of his acts from the metropolitan. He even dared to enter Alexandria and to interfere with its ecclesiastical affairs, as he found the city still forsaken by its bishop. He ex- communicated two presbyters and ordained two others in their place, thus again meddling with the affairs of another diocese. As a consequence Peter excommunicated him. According to another source concerning the begin- nings of Meletianism, found in Epiphanius {Haer, Ixviii.),' Peter was imprisoned in Alexandria together with Meletius and many other bishops and clergy. The persecution had already lasted for some time; a number of Christians had become martyrs, others had bought their release from prison by sacrifice, thus excluding themsolves from the Church, but they repented afterward and endeavored to be received vn.— 19 again into the Church through the mediation of the martyrs. The party of the martyrs, headed by Meletius, showed a hesitating attitude, at least for the time of persecution, while another party headed by Peter advocated an immediate rehabil- itation. In this way the Meletian schism originated. Meletius together with his adherents founded the " Church of the martyrs." After the return from his deportation to the copper mines of Phaino in Arabia, he did not reoccupy his episcopal seat in Lycopolis, but remained in Alexandria as head of his own church which regarded itself in contra- distinction to the Catholic Church as the strict community of pure Christians. The Catholic Church, on the other hand, had no communion with the Meletians, because Peter had excluded Meletius. Owing to the friendly relation of the Meletians to the episcopate of Alexandria, they received a favorable treatment on the part of the members of the Council of Nics^a, especially as the latter hoped to hinder in this way an alliance of Meletianism with Arianism. A document of the council addressed to the bishops of Egypt asked Meletius to return to Lycopolis as bishop, but without the right of ordination. The clericals of his community were to be consecrated anew, and acknowledged in their order, but always as ranking below the Catholic clerics, and in order to suppress all aspirations of the episcopal seat of Lycopolis to the primacy the metropolitan rights of Alexan- dria over all Egypt were expressly acknowledged. The Meletian party comprised twenty-nine bishops in Egypt, and four presbyters, three deacons, and a military chaplain in Alexandria. Meletius accepted the decree of the synod, delivered his churches to Alexander of Alexandria, and returned to Lycopolis. But there took place a rapid change in the sentiment of the Meletians. The successor of Meletius led an embassy to Constantinople in order to obtain the recognition of the peculiar position of the Meletians, in other words, the annulment of the decree of Nicsea. As they were not admitted, they entered into connection with Eusebius of Nicomedia, who suc- cessfully advocated their cause before the emperor, thus obtaining sanction for the union between Meletianism and Arianism. (H. Acheus.) Biblioorapht: The *' Fragment " cited in the text is in M. J. Routh, Reliquics tacra, iv. 91 sqq., Oxford, 1848, and in MPQ, x. 1665 aqq., xviii. 600-510. Consult on these Hefele, ConcUienoeachichie, i., § 40 (same in the Eng. transl.). Other sources are: Athanamus, " Apology against the Arians/' §§ 11, 59. and his " Letter to the Bishops of Eg3rpt and Libya," chap, xxii.; Socrates, HiaL eecL, i. 6, 9; Sosomen, HUL ecd., i. 24, ii. 18. 21, 23; Theodoret, Hitt. eccL Consult: DCB, ii. 890-891; KL, viii. 1221 sqq.
MELETIUS PEG AS MELETIUS PEGAS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELETIUS PEGAS: Patriarch of Alexandria in the sixteenth century; b. about 1540; d. at Alex- andria, 1601 or 1602. He studied at Padua, was employed about 1575 at the courts of the patriarchs of Alexandria and Constantinople, and ascended the patriarchal throne of Alexandria in 1590. His most important work is his " Miscellanies," printed in the '* Book of Joy " of the Patriarch Dositheos of Jerusalem (pp. 553-604 [Bucharest], 1705). It treats of the true church and attacks at the same time the primacy of the pope. Against Rome were directed also '' An Orthodox Christian Discourse " (Vilna, 1696) and "The Orthodox Doctrine" (1769). Meletius influenced the confessional strug- gles in Poland by a number of dogmatic epistles, one to King Sigismund III. of Poland, one to Bishop Hypatius Potei of Vladimir and Brest, and a number of letters which were published by Niko- demos Metaxas, " On the Primacy of the Pope, in a Series of Letters " (Constantinople, 1627). Against the Jews he wrote, " Apology of the Chris- tian Religion, Addressed to the Jews " (Greek and Slavonic, Lemberg, 1593) [in catalogue of British Museum, ascribed to another Meletius]. The important part which he took in the synod of 1593 in Constantinople shows that he was active also for the development and expansion of his church. (Philipp Meyer.) Bibliography: The scattered references are collected in P. Meyer, Die theologische Litteratur der griechischen KircKe im 16. Jahrhundert, pp. 53-54, Leipsic, 1899.
MELETIXTS STRIGUS MELETIUS STRIGUS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELETIUS STRIGUS: Greek theologian; b. at Candia 1586; d. at Galata, a suburb of Constanti- nople, 1664. He studied in Padua and became monk in a monastery of Crete whence he was soon expelled on account of his attacks on the Catholics. After a short stay in Alexandria he turned in 1630 to Constantinople where he received a position as teacher of theology. He was a pronounced opponent of Cyril Lucar (q.v.). In 1642 he cooperated at the synod of Jassy in drawing up the orthodox creed and wrote its Greek translation. In 1644 he was banished from Constantinople by Patriarch Par- thenios the Elder, because he had hindered the circulation of the translation of the Bible into modern Greek by Maximos Kallioupolites. Only after the death of Parthenios in 1651 could he safely remain in Constantinople. The only one of his works which has been published is the '' Refutation of the Calvinistic Articles and Questions of Cyril Lucar " (Bucharest, 1690). (Philipp Meyer.) Bibliography: B. Legrand, Bibliographie hellénique, ii. 470-472, Paris, 1894; E. a Schelstrate, Acta orientalis eccUaia contra Lutheri hæresim, i. 393 sqq., Rome, 1739.
MELITO MELITO

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELITO: Bishop of Sardis. He flourished in the reign of Marcus Aurelius (161-180). Of his numerous works in most cases only the titles are known from a list of Eusebius probably copied from a collection in the library of Cæsarea. The list is as follows (NPNF, i. 203 sqq.) : two books " On the Passover "; " On the Conduct of Life and the Prophets"; "On the Church"; "On the Lord's Day"; "On the Faith of Man";" On [his] Creation"; "On the Obedience of Faith"; "On the Senses"; "On Soul and Body"; "On Baptism"; "On Truth "; " On Faith "; " On the Birth of Christ "; " On Prophecy"; " On Hospitality"; " The Key"; On the Devil"; " On the Apocalypse of John"; On the Corporeality of God "; " Apology to Antoninus "; " Selections "; and perhaps a work " On the Suffering of Christ." There are extant only remnants of the " Selections," of the " Apol- ogy," and the works " On Baptism " and " On the Passover." The Greek fragments edited by Ana- stasius Sinaita are quoted under titles not mentioned by Eusebius. There are also some Syriac fragments which imdoubtedly go back to indirect Greek it u tradition, for probably the Syriac Church neTcr possessed his works complete. Of the works falsely ascribed to him may be mentioned the Syriac Apology, which can not be identical with the Apology mentioned by Eusebius, for the sentences quoted from it are not found in the other, but most probably, as Nöldeke has explained, was a Syriac original work. Under the name of Melito, Pitn published a Latin " Key to the Scripture '' which he considered a compilation from the '' Key " of Melito; but Steitz and others have proved its spuriousness. From the scantiness of the material it is impossible to estimate justly Melito's imi>ortance for the history of church and doctrine. The titles of his works show that he took an interest in the dogmatical questions of his time and participated in the Paschal controversies which preceded the great schism over Easter. He was probably interested in Montanism, as appears from titles like " On the Conduct of Life and the Prophets," "On the Church," or "On Prophecy," yet he can not be called a Montanist (A. Schwegler, Man- tamamua, p. 223, Anm. 5, TQbingen, 1841); for the manner in which Tertullian wrote of him is against such an assumption. His attitude in this matter can be understood if he is compared with Irensus, whom he resembled also in other ways. His moral strictness, which made him a celibate, and his high regard for prophecy and spiritual matters explain his close relation to Montanism, and still more make clear its spread; for his asceti- cism showed the universality of the thoughts that it emphasized. In his Christology Melito laid stress on the distinction of both natures. His separating the Apocrypha from the canonical books shows that his theological education surpassed the ordi- nary standard. A great many surmises have been made in regard to his doctrine of God in connection with his work " On the Corporeality of God," but he probably expressed there the same realism that was represented by Tertullian. (Erwin Preuschen.) Biblioqrapht: The fragments are collected in M. J. Routh, Reliquice Bacrce, i. 115 sqq.. Oxford, 1846; J. C. T. Otto. Corpus apologetarum Christianorutn, ix. 410 sqq., Jena, 1872; and W. Cureton, Spicilegium Syriacum, London, 1855. An Eng. tranal. is found in ANF, viii. 750-762. The earlier literature, named in ANF, Bibliography, pp. 110-111, is in the main antiquated. Consult: Hamack, lAUeratur, i. 246-255, ii. 1, pp. 358 sqq., 517 sqq.. 522 sqq., ii. 2 passim ; DCB, iii. 894-900 (important); A. Ehrhardt. in Straasburger theologische Studien, i.. Supple- ment (1900), 258 sqq.; KrQger, History, pp. 123-120.
MELIUS, PETER MELIUS, PETER

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELIUS, PETER: Hungarian Reformer and author; b. at Horhi 1515; d. at Debreczin (116 m. e. of Budapest) Dec. 15, 1572. His name is a Hel- lenization of his Hungarian family name Juhász. After three years at the University of Wittenberg (1555-58), he returned as pastor to Debreczin, where he labored till his death. After 1557, only the Lutherans had legally enjoyed religious freedom; but two years later Melius, with his two colleagues, took the first opposing steps in a pastoral conference, clearly stating Calvin's view in a short Orthodoxa sententia de cœna Domini. The Transylvanian Lu- therans, led by Matthias Hebler, Superintendent of Szeben, both opposed the Reformed party and excluded it from their church. The Re- formed joined Melius, who now composed <156^ the comprehensive Confessio Ecclesiae Debrecinensis. The Lutherans appealed to four Lutheran univer- sities in Germany, and accused the men of Debreczin of distorting the Augsbui^ Confession. Melius replied in two pamphlets {RefvtaHo and Apologia) , defending the Reformed position, while the Re- formed themselves turned to Geneva and Beza at two synods held in 1562-63. New impulse was furnished by this act. The yoimg Prince of Tran- sylvania, John Sigismund, still attempted to hold the Protestants together in a single body, and convened a general synod at Enyed (Apr., 1564); but, after joint debate, the cause of union was lost, and the Diet of Torda (Jime, 1564) sanctioned equal freedom for the Reformed Church. The mat- ter of organization thus becoming a practical neces- sity, Melius, as the first Reformed bishop, convoked the first general synod at Debreozin (Feb., 1567), where seventeen presbyteries were represented from both sides of the River Tisza. By adopting the Second Helvetic Confession, they declared them- selves an integral part of the Reformed Church in Europe. At the same synod, canons were drawn up, entitled ArticuU majorea, and defining the polity of the synod. The young Church had hardly been organized when it was destined to encounter a new enemy. The prince's court physician, Georgius Blandrata (q.v.), secretly brought with him from Poland the books of Servetus, and imparted their tenets to the court preacher, Franciscus Davidis (q.v.), who then began to spread the Unitarian doctrines in Transyl- vania (1566). Melius firmly withstood him, and finally took part in the synod of Csenger (July 26, 1570), but Unitarians who had been invited didjnot appear. The synod formulated the Confessio vera, which was embodied in the Corpus et syntagma conr fessionum (Geneva, 1612) under the incorrect desig- nation Polonica confessio. The credit is thus due to Melius and his companions that Hungarian Calvin- ism was not swallowed up in the Unitarian stream. Melius likewise purposed to oppose the theses of the Jewish rabbis of Paris, assailing the divinity of Christ, but his career was cut short by death. Melius corresponded with Bullinger, Beza, Thre- tius, and Dudics, and wrote many books. Among his thirteen Hungarian productions special mention may be made of his Az eg^z keressiy&n tudomdny summdja (*' Sunmiary of Christian Doctrine," Debreczin, 1562). He also composed exegetical works, and translated the Books of Samuel and Kings, and the New Testament (1567), the latter version being lost. His nine Latin works are mainly polemical and doctrinal. Of these the most impor- tant are Confessio Ecclesice Debrecinensis (Debreczin, 1562); Apologia et abstersio Ecdesice Debrecinensis a ccUumnis quibus temere apud academias et principes accusatur (1563) ; Refutatio confessionis de cana Dom- ini MatthicB HeUer et his coniunctorum (1564) ; Brevis confessio pastorum (both in Latin and in Hunga- rian; 1567); and ArtictUi ex verbo Dei et lege natures compositi (1567). F. Balooh. Bibliography: F. A. Lampe, Hut. ecdeaia reformata in Hungaria, passim, Utrecht, 1728; E. Budai, HUU of Hungary (in Hungarian), ii. 166-168. Debreczin, 1808; P. Bod, Hut. €ccl. Hungarorum, ed. Rauwenhoff, i. 266, Leyden. 1888; J. B. Datot and &. M. Pattanoa, Btport of Proceedings of the Second Oeneral Council of the Pre*" hyterian AUiance, pp. 1009-1120. Philadelphia, 1874; F. Balogh, Meliue Piter hatdea, Debrecsin, 1866; idem, HiaL of the Reformed Church of Hungary, Lancaster, Pa^ 1006.
MELVILL, HENRY MELVILL, HENRY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELVILL, HENRY: Church of England; b. at Pendennis Castle (2 m. s.w. of Falmouth), Cornwall, Eng., Sept. 14, 1798; d. in London Feb. 9, 1871. He was graduated from the University of Cambridge (B.A., 1821; M.A., 1824; B.D., 1836); was minister of Camden Chapel, Camberwell, London, 1829-43; was appointed chaplain to the Tower of London, 1840; was principal of the East India College, at Haileybury, 1843-59; and held the Golden Lecture- ship, St. Margaret's Lothbury, 1850-56. In 1853 he was appointed one of her Majesty's chaplains; in 1856 a canon of St. Paul's; in 1863 he was made rector of Barnes, Surrey, and rural dean. He enjoyed a high reputation for pulpit oratory; his style was florid, and his delivery impassioned. Of the twelve volumes published by him, some of them in several editions, all were the results of his pulpit activities. His Lectures on Practical Subjects was reprinted in Philadelphia, 1864; and two volumes of his Sermons, ed. Bishop Mcllvaine, appeared New York, 1870. BIBLIOGRAPHY: J. Grant, Metropoliian Pulpit, ii. 1-21, London, 1839; The Lampe of the Temple, pp. 210-241, ib. 1866; J. E. Ritchie, London Pulpit, pp. 60-68, ib. 1868; DNB, xzxvu. 229-230.
MELVILLE, ANDREW MELVILLE, ANDREW

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MELVILLE, ANDREW: B. at Baldovy, near Montrose (30 m. n.e. of Dundee), Scotland, Aug. 1, 1545; d. at Sedan (130 m. n.e. of Paris), France, in 1622. After preliminary training in Latin, Greek, and French, at Montrose, he entered St. Mary's College, St. Andrews, in 1559; and when he left St. Andrews for the University of Paris, in the autumn of 1564, he was commended as " the best philoso- pher, poet, and Grecian of anie young maister in the land." In Paris he studied Hebrew as well as Latin, Greek, and philosophy. Two years later he went to Poitiers to master civil law and became a regent in the College of St. Marceon. He afterward trav- eled to Geneva, where he was speedily appointed to the humanity chair. During his five years' resi- dence there he devoted himself chiefly to the study of theology under Beza, who, at his leaving, wrote that the greatest token of affection the church of Geneva could give, was that it had consented to be deprived of Melville that the church in Scotland might be enriched. Having returned to Scotland, in July, 1574, he accepted the principalship of Glasgow University. He began his work there in Nov., and by his incredible labors and enthusiasm drew students from all quarters; so that the classrooms which for some years before had been literally empty, were soon filled to overflowing. Before Melville's return to Scotland, ** Tulchan " episco- pacy had been erected; and when John Durie pro- tested in the General Assembly, in Aug., 1575, against the lawfulness of the bishop's office, Melville showed that prelacy was unscriptural, and should be abolished, and parity in rank and authority be restored among the ministers of the church. Five years later, the episcopal office was formally abol- ished by the assembly, without a dissenting voice. Melville was on all the committees employed in preparing the Second Book of Discipline, took a prominent part in the discussions concerning it, and was moderator of an assembly which approved it, in April, 1578. In December, 1580, Melville was transferred to the University of St. Andrews; installed as principal of St. Mary's College, which, by act of Parliament, had been appropriated to the study of divinity. Here, at first, he met with much opposition; but in less than two years his learning and zeal wrought a favorable change. The number of students increased; and the cause of religion prospered, both in the city and in the university. This was interrupted only by his being called to defend the polity and liberties of the church. Despite the confession or covenant of 1581, the privy council revived the regulations recognizing episcopacy, framed at Leith in 1572; and Lennox, one of the king's unworthy favorites, had Robert Montgomery pre- sented to the archbishopric of Glasgow. This high- handed procedure of the court was boldly met by the church, and Montgomery was excommunicated. The privy council proclaimed the excommimication null and void, ordered those who refused to pay him the episcopal rents to be imprisoned, and laid Glasgow College under a temporary interdict. In his opening sermon before a special meeting of the assembly, Melville inveighed against those who had introduced " the bludie gullie of absolute power into the country, and who sought to erect a new popedom in the person of the prince." A remon- strance was drawn up, which he and the others presented to the king. In Feb., 1583-84, he was summoned before the privy coimcil for seditious and treasonable preaching. Conscious of his inno- cence, and furnished with ample proof, he appeared and gave account of his sermon. On the council resolving to proceed with the trial, he maintained that he ought to be tried in the first instance by the church courts. As he would yield neither to entreaties nor threats, he was found guilty of declining the judgment of the council, and was sentenced to imprisonment in Blackness Castle, and further punishment at the Idng'a pleasare; but he escaped to England. As the court wished to make James absolute fay bringing every cause before the privy council, it was necessary to curb the church courts; and accordingly, in 1584, Parliament overthrew presby- tery, and laid the liberties of the country at the king's feet. But in 1585, after twenty nKHiths* absence, Melville returned with the exiled nobles. Weary of tyranny, their countrymen flocked to their standard, Arran fled, and the king received them into favor. Melville was moderator of the assembly in June, 1587, and was one of its ooin- missioners to the Parliament which annexed the temporal lands of bishoprics, abbacies, and priories to the crown, thus paving the way for the entire abolition of episcopacy. At the coronation of the queen, in May, 1590, he recited a Latin poem entitled Stephaniakiony which he composed on two days' notice. Patrick Adamson, who still persevered in opposing presbytery and attacking Melville, having fallen into poverty, addressed '' el^ant and plaintive verses to his Majesty," who turned a deaf ear to him; but Melville generously supported him for several months, as he himself was afterward aided, when a prisoner in the Tower of London, by Adamson's nephew, Patrick Simpson. In June, 1592, Melville's labors were crowned with success; Parliament having consented to pass an act rati- fying the assemblies, synods, presbyteries, and kirk sessions of the church and declaring them, with their jurisdiction and discipline, as agreed to by the king, and embodied in the act, to be, in all time coming " most just, good and godly." This .settlement is still the charter of the Church of Scotland's liberties. Contrary to his promise, James insisted in restoring the popish nobles, and put the ministers on their defense by declaring that state affairs should not be introduced into their sermons, that the assembly should not convene without his conmiand, that its acts should not be valid until ratified by him, and that church courts should not take cognizance of offenses punishable by the criminal law. One minister being dealt with as an example, the others made common cause with him. Soon they were forbidden to speak against the doings of the council, the king, or his progenitors, under the pain of death, and ordered to subscribe a bond, before receiving their stiF>ends, promising to submit to the king and council when accused of seditious or treasonable doctrine. Melville and the other commissioners of assembly were ordered to leave Edinburgh, and their power was declared illegal. Determined to restore episcopacy James, by secret and corrupt influence, secured a vantage- ground for his future plans at an assembly which Melville could not attend. It was with difficulty he carried out his measures, even in a modified form, at next assembly, where Melville was present. The committee of ministers there appointed to advise with the king about church affairs was " the needle which drew in the episcopal thread." In 1597 Melville was deprived of the rectorship of St. Andrew's University after holding it seven 3^ears. To get rid of his opposition in the church courts, 298 Xelvllle, Andrew XemoxiaiB and Baored Stones all doctors or regents teaching theology or philos- ophy, not being pastors, were forbidden to sit in any of these courts under pain of deprivation and rebellion. Prelates were declared by Parliament to have ever represented an estate of the realm; and, when the assembly met, the king would not allow it to proceed until Melville retired; and ultimately he was forced to quit the town. James protested that he did not intend to restore bishops, but only wished some of the wisest ministers, as commissioners of the kirk, to have a place in the privy council and Parliament to judge in their own affairs. To this the assembly by a small majority agreed. The king would not permit Melville to sit in the assembly of 1600, and, by acceding to many caveats, he induced the members to comply with his plan. When the Scottish Parliament restored the bishops to their ancient privileges, in 1606, Melville, who was sent by St. Andrew's presbytery, protested. As the bishops had as yet no spiritual power, Melville and seven other ministers were summoned to London, nominally to confer with the king on church affairs, really to deprive their brethren of their aid and counsel in opposing the changes contemplated. The English nobles were astonished at Melville's talents and courage. On a highly ritualistic service which he had been made to witness in the Chapel Royal he wrote a Latin epigram, which one of the court spies set to watch him conveyed to the king. For this Melville was tried by the English privy council Nov. 30, and though he had given out no copy, was found guilty of scandalum magnaium. In April he was sent to the Tower, where for ten months he was treated with great severity. Pen, ink, and paper were taken from him; and none saw him save the person who brought his food. But his spirit was free and unbroken, and he covered the walls of his cells with verses beautifully engraved with the tongue of his shoe-buckle. By means of packed assemblies and bribery, prelacy was established in Scotland when he and other faithful men were far away. Though the Protestants of Rochelle were eager to have Melville as professor of divinity, James would not consent; but, after four years' captivity, he, at the request of Du Plessis-Momay (q.v.), allowed him to go to Sedan to share with Tilenus the profes- sorship of divinity. There his last years were spent, the bitterness of his exile being alleviated by the kindness of some Scottish professors and students. Among these last were John Durie (q.v.), and perhaps Alexander Colville, destined so long to carry on his work in St. Mary's College. The contest in which he took so prominent a part affec- ted not only the government of the church but also the cause of civil and religious liberty. "Scotland," says his nephew James, " never received a greater benefit at the hands of God than this man." '' If," says Dr. McCrie, '* the love of pure religion, rational liberty, and polite letters, forms the basis of national virtue and happiness, I know no individual, after her Reformer, from whom Scotland has received greater benefits, and to whom she owes a deeper debt of gratitude and respect, than Andrew Melville." He was full of spirits, vigorous and courageous, quick-tempered but kindly, of great and varied learning, but more of a scholar than a popular orator. His chief work was in the universities and chiutsh coiui» rather than in the pulpit; and that, perhaps, was the reason why, with all his influence among his brethren, he never gained such sway over the nobles and people as Knox and Henderson attained. The hard measure meted out to him by Eling James was one of the greatest blots on that reign. D. Hat Fleming. BIBLIOGRAPHY: The principal sources are: J. Melvill, Auto- biography and Diary, tcUh Coniinuatum, ed. R. Pitcaim, Edinburgh, 1842; J. Row, Hist, d the Kirk d ScoOand, ed. D. Laing, ib., 1842; W. Scot, An ApolooeHcal Narror' tion of the State and Government of the Kirk of Scotland einee the Reformation, ed. D. Laing, ib. 1846; J. Spottiswoode, HieL of ihe Church of Scotland, ed. M. Russell, ib. 1851; D. Calderwood. HieL of the Kirk of Scotland, ed. T. Thom- son, 8 vols., ib. 1842-49; Register of the Privy Council of Scotland, ed. D. Masson, vols, iii.-iv., ib.. 1880-81. The one life of importance is by T. McCrie, 2 vols., ib. 1819, also in his works, ed.. his son, the younger McCrie. ib. 1856, reissued. 1899. Consult also DNB, xxvii. 230; H. Cowan, Influence of the Scottish Church in Christendom, London, 1896.
HEHAHEH MENAHEM

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENAHEM: Sixteenth king of Israel, son of Gadi, usurper and successor of Shallum. His dates according to the old chronology are 772-763 B.C.; according to Kamphausen, 740-738; according to Curtis, 741-737 {DB. i. 401); according to Kitlel, 740-737. The narrative in II Kings xv. 14-22 makes Menahem march fromTirzah and kill Shallum in Samaria, and then waste the region about Tappuah {bo the corrected text) because that town had declined to receive him. Tirzah, the old capital of the northern kingdom, was doubtless well fortified, and Menahem was its commandant. He may have been the head of one of the two portioitii into which the kingdom split after the death of Jeroboam. His victory over Shallum must have been the result of b severe conflict, and Tappuah was doubtless the center of the opposition to Menahem (cf. Isa. ix. 19-20; Hob, vii, 7, viii. 4). The BibUcal narrative also states that Pul (Tiglath- Pilescr, see AaaYRiA, VI., 3. } 9) came against the land and that Menahem paid him a tribute of 1,000 talents to be recognized as king. This does not involve that it was at Mcnahem's invitation that Tiglath-Pileser came, but it appears that the Assyrian had been in Syria aa early as 740 b.c, that his intervention in Israel was a part of his general plan to reduce that hind to a province of his empire, and that Menahem took advantage of the situation. It is hardly possible to allow to Menahem the full ten years assigned to his reign in II Kings xv. 17. His tribute to Pul belongs to the year 738, and he can not have reigned long after this to allow for the other reigns which fell before the destructioD of Samaria in 722. (R. Kirniu) BIBLIOGRAPHY: The wturcee bio II Kin«e xv. 14-22. Con- B<i!I: B. KitKl. GethiMt der HtbrAer.ii. 4«S-^72. Goth*, 1000: DB. iii. 340: EB. iii. 3019-20; JE. viii. 406-466. and tbe pertinent aectiona of tbe literature siven Doder Auab; and Isbiei., Histobt or.
HEHDELSSOHH, MOSES MENDELSSOHN, MOSES

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENDELSSOHN, MOSES: German Jewish phi- losopher; b. at Dessau (67 m. s.w. of Berlin) Sept. 6, 1729; d. in Berlin Jan. 4, 1786. He came of poor parents and pursued his studies in the Bible, tbe Talmud, Maimonides, and afterward modern languages and literatures, under great privations. In 1750 he became tutor in the family of a rich Jewish manufacturer in Berlin, in 1754 bookkeeper, and, later, partner in the firm. From about the same time date his intimate acquaintance with Lessing, Nicolai, Abbt, etc., an earnest study of the philosophy of Locke, Shafl«sbury, Spino/a, and Wolff, and the beginning of his long and varied literary activity. His Phmilon, migr van der Vnsterb- lichkeil der Scele (Berlin, 1707; Eng. transi,, Phaedon; or. the Dealh o/ Socratea. London, 1789), and Morgenstundcn (1786), lectures on the existence of God and immortality, procured for him fame as a philosopher. He also deserves well for his efforts for the elevation, mental and moral, of his core- ligionists in Germany, and especially in Berlin. Among his many books may be mentioned : Pope, ein Melapkysiker (in collaboration with Lessing; 1755); Briefs Hba-dU Bmpfimlungen (1755); Jera- talem. oder aber rdigidge Maehl und Judenthum (2 iiarta, 1783; Eng. transl., Jenualem, a Treatise oa EcdesiaaliaU Aiithoriiy and Judaism, 2 vols., I>jq- don, 183S); and a commentary on Canticles (1772). He also tracalal«d the Pentateuch (1783), and the Paahns (1788). The moat complete edition of his works is that by hia grandson G. B. Mendelssohn (7 vols., Berlin, 1843—15); his philosophical writings Vere edited by M. Brasch (2 vo!s., Leipaic, 1880). BIBLIOGRAPHY: S. Hennl. Dit familia UendO-okn. 0th rd., ISeS. Ens- Innil.. London, 1882; M. BBmuela. Mtm- oiTE of Maitt Mendtlfvhn, LoailoD, 1829; J. H. Ritur, Utndnlmohn und Le—ina. Berlin. 1886: M. KityKrlioK, JUofo Utindrlttolin. LailMic. 1888; JE., viii. 479-4SG. An MoellBnt bibliography ii furoiahed in J. M. Baldwin. DiclimarvofPhihiophllandPtvcfudem, iil. I. pp. 309-370. New York, 190S.
UENDES, FREDERICK DB SOLA MENDES, FREDERICK DE SOLA

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENDES, FREDERICK DE SOLA: Jewish rabbi; b. at Montego Bay, Jamaica, July 8, 1850. He was educated at Northwick College (1865-68), the University of London (1868-70; B.A., 1869), and the university and Jewish theological seminary of Breslau (1870-73; Ph.D., Jena, 1871). On returning to England, he became rabbi of Great St. Helen's Synagogue, London, in 1873, but within the year accepted a call to the rabbinate of Congre- gation Shaaray Tefillah (now West End Synagogue) , New York City, of which he is still the head. In 1879 he was one of the founders of The American Hebrew, which he edited until 1SS5. In 1900-02 he was likewise associated with the editorial staff of The Jewish Encyclopedia, and in 1903 edited the Jewish Menorah, He is one of the collaborators in the revision of a new Jewish translation of the Bible, and besides translating the " Jewish Family Papers; Iiotters of a Missionary " of Gustav Mein- tardt (the pseudonym of W, Hcreberg; New York, , 1875), has written Defense, not Defiance; A Hebrew's Reply to the Mitsionarieii (ISIS); Child's First Bible (1879); and OuUines of Bible History (1886).
HENI MENI

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENI: A deity named in the Old Testament only in Isa. Ixv. 11 (A.V. " that number," margin " Meni "; R.V. "Destiny," margin " Meni ") as worshiped by idolatrous Israelites. Light is thrown on the subject by the etymology (Hebr. manak, "to number," Arab, "to apportion '7, by the occurrence in Arabic of the feminine form Manai, one of the daughters of Allah (Koran, liii. 20), and by the use of the Arabic maniyya, " fate " (cf. the Nabatean Manawat, " Fates," Wellhausen, Heidentum, pp. 25-29). The word Aedhmeni, " servant of Meni," occurs on Achaemenian coins, and Meni{a) is found as a parallel to BeluM fartunm rector, " Bel, controller of fortune," on an altar at Vaison in Provence, in which there seems to be present a reminiscence of the Biblical passage. It is unlikely that Meni is of Babylonian origin, the name not having been found as a god name in the cuneiform inscriptions. He was probably introduced into Palestine by Arameans or by the Arabs who began to press in soon after the exile. The plausible suggestion has been mode that as Gad was the deity of (good) fortune, Meni is the controller of misfortune. The equation Meni-Ishtar- Venus is probably ruled out by the sex of Meni. The name was misuo- derstood by Aquila, Syromachus, Theodoiion, and Jerome. Geo. W. GtLuoaG.
MENKEN, GOTTFRIED MENKEN, GOTTFRIED

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENKEN, GOTTFRIED: German Reformed pas- tor; b. at Bremen May 29, 1768; d. there June 1, 1831. In the house of his parents he imbibed a Biblical piety which was, however, free from all narrowness though consciously opposed to ration- alism. While still in the gymnasium he preached, and when he entered the University of Jena in 1788 his theological convictions had already assumed definite form. The rationalism of the university induced him to devote himself wholly to the Bible, to which the mysticism of his earlier days gave way. In 1790 he went to the University of Duisburg where he found a more sympathetic atmosphere in the circle of F. A. Hasenkamp and others whose study of the Bible was governed by the spirit of Bengel and Collenbusch. In 1791 he passed his theological examination, but stayed two years longer at Duisburg. He was assistant preacher in Uedem near Cleve (1793-94), for the German Reformed congregation in Frankfort-on-the-Main (1794-96), pastor of the Reformed congregation in Wetzlar (1796-1802), second preacher of St. Paul in Bremen (1802-11), and first preacher of St. Martin (1811-25). The theology of Menken was not original with him; but the vigor of his expressions gave him a d90 Menius Mennonitoa far-reaching influence, especially upon Bible stu- dents. The immovable center of his theology was the Bible, which he looked upon as the divine testimony of the past, present, and future history of salvation in the center of which stood Christ. From Collenbusch Menken acquired his views on the ethical relation of God to humanity, the atone- ment, and salvation. The divine nature is love, of which holiness and justice are only phases. These fundamental attributes of God are revealed in the order of his kingdom, which is never based upon an unfathomable decree, but always upon foreseen worthiness. In order to assure this worth- iness, every reasonable creature is in need of a test; if in this way sin comes into the world, it serves only a good purpose that there may come into existence a more perfect and blessed creation. If Adam fell, death was for him not a pimishment, but a natural consequence of sin, and if his heirs are overcome by sin, this also is not a punishment, but a suffering of injustice, since they are personally innocent of the sinfulness and mortality of their being. Christ delivered human nature from that unjust imposition, by assuming it not as it was originally, but as it was after the fall. This was not intended to assail the divinity or personal sinlessness of Christ, but only to emphasize his humanity. So it follows that in no way is there a compensation of the claims of divine holiness or of the law by the death of Christ. The sinlessness acquired by Christ can be appropriated by faith in him. Faith in Christ is a divine power producing tliat holiness and glory in man, and on this depends the main interest of the whole doctrine, and con- sequently the worthiness of man is in no way a divine gift, but the chief demand of God, for the sake of which he imparts to man his grace. All predestinarian ideas are combated from this stand- point. It is only consistent with this whole concep- tion, which lacks a clear estimate of sin as positive opposition to God, that sanctification can be com- pleted upon earth. As justification or forgiveness of sins in no way necessarily results from this doc- trine, they really have no place in it, and the fact that Menken nevertheless used these conceptions shows that the Biblical vein in him was stronger than the influence of Collenbusch. His chief works are: Chriatlicke HomUien (Frank- fort, 1797); Neue Sammlung christlicher HomUien (1801); Ckrisaiche HomUien Ober SteUen an die GeschichU dee Propheten Eliaa (1804); Versuch einer Anleiiung zum eignen Unterricht in die Warh- fieiten der heUigen Schrift (an exposition of his system; 1805); Betrachtungen iiber doe Evangdium MaUh&i (only one volume published; 1809); Das Glattbensbekenntnie der chriiUichen Kirche (1816); Erklärung des elften Kapitels des Briefes an die Hebrder (1821); Predigten (1825); Blicke in doe Leben dee Apostd Pavlue und der ersten Chrieten- gemeinen (1828); and HomUien uber das neunte und zehrUe Kapitel des Brief es an die Hebrder (1831). His works have been collected in seven volumes (Bremen, 1858-65; new edition, 8 vols. 1894-95). (E. F. Kakl MtJixBR.) BIBLIOGRAPHY: C. H. GUdemeister, Leben und Wirken dee . . . Gottfried Menken, 2 vols.. Bremen. 1861. E. G. Achelifl publiflhed a selection of Menken's HomUien, to which he prefixed an introduction dealing with the life, Gotha, 1888. Consult also A. Ritschl, Oeechichie dee Pietiemiu, i. 666 sqq., Bonn, 1880.
HENNAS MENNAS

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENNAS: Patriarch of Constantinople 536- 552; d. at Constantinople Aug. 5, 552. Nothing is known of his early life. He was a priest and presi- dent of the Hospice Samson when he was appointed to the patriarchate at the desire of Justinian in the place of Anthimus (who had been deposed by a synod at Constantinople in 535), and was conse- crated by Agapetus, being the first Eastern patri- arch to receive consecration from a pope. He presided at a synod held at Constantinople in 536, called to finish the case of Anthimus, left imcom- pleted by the death of Agapetus. His administration is marked by ability and a regard for the peace of the Church. He is commemorated by the Greek Church on Aug. 24, and by the Latin on Aug. 25. BIBLIOGRAPHY: ASB, Aug., v. 164-166; Hefele, Concilien- geeehichte, ii. 671, 763 sqq., 787 sqq., 812 sqq.. 865-866, Eng. transl.. iv. 193-104, 218. 286-286; DCB, iii. 902-903.
MEMOLOGIOH MENOLOGION

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MENOLOGION: The equivalent in the Greek Church of the Calendarium and Martyrologium of the Latin Church. It contains a, list of the festivals in honor of the saints and martyrs, together with abort notices of the life and death of the saint or martyr celebrated. It is not to be confused with the Menaion (q.v.), which contains the offices tor the day as well as the " Acta " of tile eaint. Tho basis of the present Menologion was laid in 880 under the Emperor Basil. See Acta Martyrum, Acta Sanctorum, II,, £ 1.
MERCERSBUR6 THEOLOGY MERCERSBURG THEOLOGY

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MERCERSBURG THEOLOGY: A school of philosophy and theology which took its rise about 1836 in Marshall College and in the Theological Seminary of the German Reformed Church, then located at Mercersburg, Pa. It grew out of the con- tact between the modem Evangelical theology of Germany and Anglo-American church life, and quickened the German Reformed Church to new activity. It produced considerable fermentation and controversy, which affected also the Lutheran and other neighboring churches, but is now a matter of history, though its fruits remain. The movement had three phases. The first was philo- sophical (1836-43); the second was theological, and turned chiefly on the church question (1843-58); the third was liturgical (1858-66). The leaders of this school of thought were F. A. Rauch, J. W. Nevin, and Philip Schaff (qq.v.), though Rauch's plans were frustrated by his premature death. Complementing each other reciprocally, Nevin and Schaff developed the ideas of Mercersburg theology in different ways. Nevin discussed the questions concerning the Church and the sacraments. Turning to ^rprian and the Nicene age, he represented the contrast between the church idea then extant and the sect system of the nineteenth century, but aimed chiefly to show that the Oxford Tractarian theory of repristi- nation was historically imtenable, and would lead logically to the whole system of the papacy. On the nature of the sacraments he reproduced the anti-Zwinglian and anti-Lutheran conception of John Calvin, which he held to be the true Reformed doctrine. Schaff in his Principle <tf Fro(Mtan(Mfii| vindicated the doctrines of the Refonnation on the basis of historical development, in decided opposition to Romanism and Puseyism on the one hand, and also to rationalism and sectarianism on the other. The Mercersburg school was chai^ged with transcendentalism, mysticism, and Romanising tendencies, but all these charges gradually subsided. A regular heresy trial was held at the synod of York in 1845, and again at two subsequent synods; but in each case the Meroersburg professors were acquitted by an almost imanimous vote. Mercersbuig theology taught that the divine- human person of Jesus Christ is the primordial truth of Christianity, both of revelation and redemp- tion. From the Christ-idea, as the fundamental principle, are to be developed all scriptural doc- trines. Issue was taken with the high Calvinistic principle of a twofold unconditional predestination, as well as with the contrary Arminian principle of free will, and no less decidedly, also, with the Roman system, which starts from the idea of the Church as a visible and centralized organization. Mercersburg was the first theological school in America to propoimd and vindicate what has since been called the ** Christocentric " idea of Christianity. Jesus Christ, the incarnate Son of God, is the second Adam, the head of a regenerate human race. Bom in him and of him, by the Holy Spirit, believers are his members. He, glori- fied in heaven, and they, though still in the flesh on earth, together constitute one mystical body, a spiritual organism. This is the Christian Church, holy, catholic, and apostolic. Of supernatural origin, invested with divine authority, possessing spiritual powers adequate to the fulfilment of her mission, instinct with heavenly life, and destined to overcome her enemies, she is the communion in which men may obtain salvation and eternal life. The Church, extending through all ages, and destined to embrace all nations, is ever identical with herself, having one Lord, one faith, one bap- tism; yet different phases of the fulness of her spiritual life, including doctrine and morals, cultus and ecclesiastical polity, appear at different epochs in her history. Hence no statements of doctrine formulated in any past age need be final, and no form of organization can be fixed and imchangeable. The Church modifies doctrinal formulas according to her progress in the knowledge of Christian truth, and adjusts her organization to the advanced status of her life and to her altered connections with the world. Christ perpetuates his mediatorial office by an order of. chosen men, who, by the laying-on of hands, are duly invested with divine authority to speak in his name, to dispense the sacraments, and to bear rule as undershepherds over the flock. At the same time, Mercersburg always taught the general priesthood of the laity and the equality of ministers. The sacraments of baptism and the Lord's Sup- per are not empty forms, but the significant signs and seals of God's covenant with us. They are means of grace which become efficacious by faith alone. By baptism, the subject is received into the covenant. The Lord's Supper is the conmiemora- tion of the onoe crucified but now glorified Christ, and the oonmiunion of his body and blood, by the impartation of his own divine-human ful- ness, he nourishes his people unto everlasting life. The contrary opinion, which then largely prevailed in the American churches, that baptism is only the empty symbol of forgiveness and of the new birth, and the Lord's Supper merely a celebration of the crucifixion of Christ, was sharply criticLsed. Mer- cersburg found fault with tli^ conunon style of extemporaneous public prayer, and advocated a revival, in a modernized form, of the lituigieal church-service of the Reformation period. The result was, A LUurgy, or Order of Chrittian Wcnkip . (Philadelphia, 1858), prepared by Schaff, Nevin, Harbaugh, Gerhart, and others, and a book of common prayer, entitled An Order of Worship for the Reformed Church (1866). Both, however, were merely optional, and not intended to supersede free prayer. A new German hymn-book was also prepared by Dr. Schaff (1859), which is now generally used in the German congregations of the Reformed Church. The Mercersburg movement was Christological, and in close sympathy with the positive Evangelical theology of Protestant Germany, though necessarily modified by American surroundings and wants. At present, the peculiar characteristics of the Mercersbuig school are no longer distinctive, because similar Christological tendencies have since sprung up, and taken root in other dencnni- nations; hence former issues have been superseded. The formation of the General Synod in 1863 set- tled the doctrinal differences which had divided the church into two parties. See Refobmed Chuhch. E. V. GsBHAirrt. Bxbuoobapht: F. A. Rauch, Ptyeholooy, New York, 1846; J. W. Nevin, The Anxioue Bench, Chambenbuis. 1843; The Myatical Pretence, a Vindication of the Reformed or CtUviniatic Doctrine of the Holy Ettchariai, Philadelphia, 1846; idem. The Hiatory and Gentua of the Heidelberg Cate- chiem, Chambersburg. 1847, and his Introduction to the triglot tercentenary ed. of the Heidelberg Caiechiam, New York, 1863; idem, Antichriet; or, the Spirit of Sect and Schiem, New York, 1848; P. Schaff. The Principle of Proteatantiem as Related to the Present State of the Churdi^ Chambersburg, 1845; idem, What is Church History f A Vindication of the Idea of Historical Development, Phila- delphia. 1846; E. V. Gerhart. in Bibliotheca Sacra, Jan., 1863, pp. 1-78; idem, Institutes of the Christian Religum, New York, 1891; H. Harbaugh, Christohffical Theology, Philadelphia. 1864; T.G.Apple. The Theology of the German Reformed Church, in the Proceedings of the Second General Council of the Presbyterian Church, held in Philadelphia, 1880, Philadelphia, pp. 484-497. Consult also The Met- cerriiurg Review, vols, i.-xii., 1849-60; Der deutsche Kir- chenfreund, 1848-54; German Reformed Messenger; Mi$^ utes of the German Reformed Synod, from 1843 to 1866; The Provisional Liturgy, Philadelphia, 1858; The Order </ Worship for the Reformed Church, ib. 1867.
MERCY, SISTERS OF MERCY, SISTERS OF

한

아직 번역 본문이 없습니다.

영

MERCY, SISTERS OF: The name of several religious congregations of women in the Roman Catholic Church. 1. Institute of Our Blessed Lady of Mercy: A congregation founded by Catherine Elizabeth McAuley (q.v.). The beginnings of this order go back to 1827 when the founder, then forty years of age, and having recently inherited a large fortune, established in Dublin (on the feast of Our Lady of Mercy, Sept. 24) an institution for the harboring of destitute women and orphans and for the aid of 813 Xaroersbiuv Theology Kerlbah poor schools. The house was placed in charge of Miss Anna M. Doyle who was assisted in the school work by Miss Katherine Byrne. At that period there was no intention of founding a religious order, but rather of organizing a society of secular ladies who, between the period of leaving school and settling in life, might devote a portion of their time to the instruction of the poor and to other works of charity. But as several of her associates evinced a desire to make this a life-work and become sisters. Miss McAuley was led to establish, with the permission of the archbishop, a religious community under the title: ** Institute of Our Blessed Lady of Mercy." In 1828 the members adopted a distinc- tive costume, but it was not until Dec. 12, 1831, after a year's novitiate in the Presentation Monas- tery of George's Hill, that they made their religious profession, taking the three vows according to the presentation form. Returning to their convent. Sister Mary Katherine was appointed superior by Dr. Murray, archbishop of Dublin, but for several years the institute had no written rule. The costume adopted by the foimdress consists of a habit of coarse black serge, or cashmere, falling in folds from the throat to the feet in front, and lengthened into a train behind. It is confined to the waist by a leathern girdle, or cincture, on which the beads and cross of the order are suspended. The sleeves are long and wide, falling in plaits from the shoulders, with tight undersleeves. The habit and veil are very ample: the guimp is a deep linen collar, worn in front, and the coif, an envelop of the same material, covers the head, partly con- cealing the face. The rule of the institute, based on that of St. Augustine, was approved by Pope Gregory XVI. June 8, 1841. The specific objects of the order are the education of the poor, the visita- tion of the sick, and the protection of distressed women of good character. Besides the three ordinary vows of religion the sisters bind themselves to the service of the sick, the poor, and the ignorant, and they also take a vow of stability or perseverance in the institute. The order comprises two classes of sisters, choir and lay religious, and each separate conmnmity is subject canonically to the bishop of the diocese in which it is situated. Forty-three convents of the order were established before the death of the founder in 1841. There are houses of the order also in England, Scotland, Australia, and the United States. The Sisters of Mercy were first introduced into the United States in 1843 by Bishop O'Connor of Pittsburg, where the beginnings of the American foundation were materially fur- thered by the generosity of Miss Eliza Jane Tieman who, on joining the commimity, bestowed upon it a large fortune inherited from her father. The development of the order in the United States was quite rapid, and it had in 1909 about forty mother houses in various cities from Maine to California. The sisters conduct schools, academies, hospitals, asylums, etc. The number of pupils under their charge is about 80,000, and the total number of professed sisters is about 4,500. 2. Sisters of Mercy of SeeZ| France: A congre- gation foimded in 1823 in the diocese of Seez, France, by five pious wonaeQ under the direotioQ of a zealous priest, M. Bazin. They first took the name " Sisters of Charity," but in 1825 it was changed to ** Sisters of Mercy " in order that the new community might be distinguished from that of the Sisters of Charity foimded by St. Vincent de Paul. The object of the order is to minister to the spiritual and temporal needs of the sick, and especially of the poor in their homes. There are foimdations of the order in England as well as in France. 8. Sisters of Mercy of Montreal {Sceura de la mia-' &icorde): A congr^ation established in Montreal, Quebec (where the mother house is located), by Bishop Ignatius Bourget in 1848. The foundress was Madame Rosalie Jett^ (in religion. Mother Mary of the Nativity), but from the beginning she declined to accept the office of superior, and Sister St. Jane de Chantal was placed in chaxge. The specific object of the institute is to assist women in labor, both rich and poor, especially the latter, whom the sisters receive in their institutions or visit in their homes. In receiving patients no discrimination is made in respect to religion, color, nationality, or place of residence. No questions are asked, and all precautions are taken to protect the honor of patients and avert the crime of infanticide. The children are cared for both in the main institu- tions and in homes established especially for the purpose. Patients who desire to remain in the institution for a time after their convalescence are placed in charge of a sister. They follow a certain rule of life, without, however, contracting any religious obligation, and are known as " conse- crated " (amaacr^). If they choose to remain in the convent permanently and show the proper dispositions, they are allowed, after a period of probation, to become ** Magdalens," and after a further probationary period they are admitted to take the vows of the subsidiary Magdalen order. The congr^ation is governed by a mother general who is elected every six years. The institute was approved by Pope Pius IX., June 7, 1867. These sisters have establishments not only in Canada, but also in New York, Chicago, Milwaukee, and Green Bay. Jabiss F. Dribcoll. Biblioorapht: Heimbuoher, Orden und Kongregationen, iii. 386-^87, 564; Currier. ReUffiout Orden, pp. 576-678* 596; Official Caiholie Directory, New York, 1900.
출처: public_domain